Pagina wordt geladen...
Owner’s Manual
ELS-01/01C/01X
EN
Excellence Winner of
STC's International Technical
Publications Competition, 2004
(1)B-9 1/2
2
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical
shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required
voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.
• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have
accumulated on it.
• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and
do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on
it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything
over it.
• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or
modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it
should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it
inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet
conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into
any openings.
• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.
A burning item may fall over and cause a fire.
• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden
loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke
should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch,
disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected
by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage
to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold
the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.
• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used
for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.
• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.
Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the
outlet.
• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or
heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to
prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal
components.
• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,
mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio
may generate noise.
• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally
fall over.
• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.
• When setting up the instrument, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is
easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off
the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet.
• Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch from
the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation, and possibly result in
the instrument overheating.
Power supply/Power cord
Do not open
Water warning
Fire warning
If you notice any abnormality
Power supply/Power cord Location
(1)B-9 2/2
3
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the
power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all
components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes
of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume
controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.
• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners,
solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.
•Take care that the key cover does not pinch your fingers, and do not insert a
finger or hand in any gaps on the key cover or instrument.
• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the key
cover, panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and
unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected
by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might
discolor the panel or keyboard.
• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not
use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.
• Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or
uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you
experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.
• Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall
over.
• Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or step-
ladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury.
• Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the
possibility of accident or injury.
• If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them
periodically using the included tool.
Saving and backing up your data
• Always save data to a SmartMedia card or other external media, in order to help
prevent the loss of important data due to a malfunction or user operating error.
Backing up the external media
•To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you
save your important data onto two external media.
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or
modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
Connections
Maintenance
Handling caution
Using the bench
Saving data
The serial number of this product may be found on the bottom
of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space
provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record
of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft.
Model No. ELS-01 / ELS-01C / ELS-01X
Serial No.
(bottom)
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
4
Accessories
•Bench
• Owner’s Manual
•Playing the ELS-01/01C/01X — Tutorial Guidebook
•SmartMedia card
Congratulations!
You are the proud owner of a fine electronic organ, the Electone STAGEA ELS-01/01C/01X.
The Yamaha Electone combines the most advanced tone generation technology with state-of-the-
art digital electronics and features to give you stunning sound quality with maximum musical
versatility.
In order to make the most of your Electone and its extensive performance potential, we urge you to
read the manual thoroughly while trying out the various features described.
Keep the manual in a safe place for later reference.
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
5
Main Features
Wide Variety of Registration Menus page 19
The Registration Menu buttons feature a total of 240 Registrations, allowing you to instantly set up the
Electone for playing your favorite type of music. The ELS-01C/01X contains even more — an additional 60
Registrations that utilize the expressive VA Voices and Organ Flute Voices. The Registrations in Registration
Menu are divided into five basic categories for ease of selection. Moreover, you can edit any of the
Registrations and customize them to fit your own performance needs.
Richly textured, four-layer AWM Voices and High Quality Digital
Effects
pages 22
and 50
The ELS-01 contains a huge amount of exceptionally high-quality Voices – 415 altogether – created with the
AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) tone generation system. The ELS-01C/01X adds to that 94 VA (Virtual
Acoustic) Voices and a virtually limitless variety of Organ Flute Voices. The authentic touch response
keyboard lets you play these Voices with all the expressiveness and control of an actual acoustic instrument.
What’s more, there are 183 different effect types in 15 categories that you can apply to each Voice section —
letting you enhance and even completely change the character of the Voices, without having to use the Voice
Edit features.
Dynamic, Contemporary Rhythms and Auto Accompaniment page 51
The exceptionally of wide selection of 274 rhythms lets you choose exactly the rhythm you need in your
performance. Each rhythm contains 15 variations (sections) – such as Main, Fill In, Intro, Ending, and Break
– that you can easily switch while you play, to make your performance even more dynamic and professional.
Each rhythm has its own matching accompaniment divided into five instrument parts, providing basic
backing as well as embellishments.
Large, 6.5-inch TFT-LCD with Intuitive Touch Panel Operation page 12
This large LCD display not only lets you clearly see a wide selection of settings and parameters at almost any
angle, it also serves as a touch control panel — letting you intuitively make selections and adjust settings
simply by touching the screen! Once you touch a setting, you can even adjust it in finer detail if necessary
with the Data Control dial.
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
6
This product utilizes NF, an embedded Internet browser from ACCESS Co., Ltd. NF is used with
the patented LZW, licensed from Unisys Co., Ltd. NF may not be separated from this product,
nor may it be sold, lent or transferred in any way. Also, NF may not be reverse-engineered,
reverse-compiled, reverse-assembled or copied.
This software includes a module developed by the Independent JPEG Group.
• The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd.
• This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or
with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without
limitation, all computer software, styles files, MIDI files, WAVE data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized
use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of
copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.
• Copying of the commercially available music sequence data and/or digital audio files is strictly prohibited except
for your personal use.
•Electone and STAGEA are the trademarks of Yamaha Corporation.
• The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective companies.
• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may
appear somewhat different from those on your instrument.
• The panel illustrations and LCD screens shown in this owner's manual are taken from the ELS-01C, Version
1.60.
• The pan flute and sitar, shown in the displays of the ELS-01/01C/01X, are on display at the Hamamatsu
Museum of Musical Instruments.
The ELS-01/01C/01X is compatible with the following formats.
“GM (General MIDI)” is one of the most common Voice allocation formats. “GM System
Level 2” is a standard specification that enhances the original “GM” and improves Song data
compatibility. It provides for increased polyphony, greater Voice selection, expanded Voice
parameters, and integrated effect processing.
XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha
specifically to provide more Voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over
Voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future.
GS was developed by the Roland Corporation. In the same way as Yamaha XG, GS is a major
enhancement of the GM specifically to provide more Voices and Drum kits and their variations,
as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects.
The Style File Format combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into a single
unified format.
Products bearing the SONDIUS-XG logo are licensed under patents of Stanford University and
Yamaha as listed on the internet web site, <http://www.sondius-xg.com>.
1
Voices
2
Quick Introductory Guide
Organ Flutes
(ELS-01C/01X)
3
Voice Controls
and Effects
4
Rhythm/
Keyboard Percussion
5
Registration Memory
6
Music Data Recorder
(MDR)
7
Voice Edit
8
Rhythm Program
9
Footswitches, Knee Lever
and Expression Pedals
10
Transpose
and Pitch Controls
11
13
Internet Direct Connection
Connections
14
Appendix
12
Contents
Accessories ..............................................................4
Main Features ...........................................................5
Panel Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Front Panel ................................................................8
LCD Display/Display Select ....................................10
Overview .................................................................10
1 Quick Introductory Guide . . . . . . . . . .11
Getting Started........................................................11
Using the LCD Display............................................12
LCD Display Settings ..............................................15
Voice Display ..........................................................17
Registration Menu ...................................................19
Confirming the Version of Your Electone ................21
Factory Set (Initializing the Electone)......................21
2 Voices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Voices for each keyboard .......................................22
Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons .................23
Selecting Voices from the User buttons..................28
Voice List.................................................................30
3 Organ Flutes (ELS-01C/01X). . . . . . . .35
4 Voice Controls and Effects. . . . . . . . .38
Selecting from the Voice Condition display ............39
Selecting from the panel .........................................43
Effect List ................................................................50
5 Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion . . . . . .51
Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm buttons............51
Selecting rhythms from the User buttons................58
Rhythm List .............................................................59
Accompaniment......................................................61
Automatic Accompaniment
– Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) ....................................62
Melody On Chord (M.O.C.).....................................64
Keyboard Percussion..............................................65
6 Registration Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Storing Registrations...............................................80
Selecting Registrations ...........................................82
Saving the Registration data to SmartMedia card ..83
Initializing Registration Memory ..............................84
Registration Shift .....................................................84
Unifying a specific parameter.................................89
7 Music Data Recorder (MDR) . . . . . . . .92
Calling Up the M.D.R. Display ................................92
Formatting External Media ......................................95
Selecting a Song.....................................................96
Recording .............................................................101
Changing the Song Name ....................................104
Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File)...107
Recalling Recorded Registrations ........................111
Playing Back a Song.............................................112
Other Functions (Tools).........................................118
8 Voice Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Voice Structure......................................................127
Editing a Voice ......................................................128
Saving the edited Voice ........................................137
Quitting Voice Edit.................................................138
Recalling an Edited Voice .....................................138
9 Rhythm Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Outline of the Rhythm Programming Operation ....139
Rhythm Pattern Program .......................................140
Rhythm Sequence Program ..................................170
Saving Rhythm Pattern and Rhythm Sequence Data
to external media...................................................179
10 Footswitches, Knee Lever
and Expression Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Footswitches .........................................................180
Knee Lever ............................................................183
Expression Pedals.................................................185
11 Transpose and Pitch Controls. . . . 188
12 Internet Direct Connection. . . . . . . 189
Connecting the Instrument to the Internet.............189
Accessing the Website from the Electone ............190
About the Internet Settings Display.......................198
Exiting from the Internet Display ...........................201
Initializing Internet Settings ...................................201
Glossary of Internet Terms ....................................202
13 Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Accessory Jacks and Controls .............................203
Connection Examples – External Devices ............206
Connection with Computer....................................212
MIDI.......................................................................213
MIDI Control ..........................................................217
14 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Bench Assembly ...................................................219
Installing the Pedalboard (ELS-01X) .....................220
Installing Optional Hardware.................................221
MIDI Data Format ..................................................222
Troubleshooting ....................................................236
Specifications........................................................239
Index .....................................................................241
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
8
REVERB
SUSTAIN
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE
1
MAX
BRILLIANCE
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MIN
VOLUME
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 2
BRILLIANCE VOLUME
MAX
MIN
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MAX
MIN
STRINGS BRASS TUTTI PAD SYNTH
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO ORGAN GUITAR CHOIR WORLD
PERCUS-
SION
1
2
STRINGS BRASS TUTTI PAD SYNTH
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO ORGAN GUITAR CHOIR WORLD
PERCUS-
SION
1
2
LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 1
REGISTRATION MENU
KEYBOARD
PERCUSSION
BRILLIANCE
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
VOLUME
LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 2
BRILLIANCE VOLUME
MAX
MIN
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MAX
MIN
STRINGS BRASS TUTTI PAD SYNTH
WOOD-
WIND
UPPER
(KNEE)
MARCH
LATIN
WORLD
MUSIC
BALLAD ROCK
DANCE
WALT Z POPS R & B
SWING &
JAZZ
LOWER
(KNEE)
PEDAL
PIANO ORGAN GUITAR CHOIR WORLD
PERCUS-
SION
1
2
STRINGS BRASS TUTTI PAD SYNTH
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO ORGAN GUITAR CHOIR WORLD
PERCUS-
SION
1
2
12
2
1
1
1
23
123
123 ABCD
45
RHYTHM
VOLUME
SEQ.
2
SEQ.
3
SEQ.
4
SEQ.
MAX
MIN
TEMPO
INTRO
ENDING
MAIN / FILL IN
BAR / BEAT
RHYTHM
CONTROL
START
BREAK
SYNCHRO
START
TEMPO
13 14 15 16
1234
Panel Layout
Front Panel
(The panel illustration below is taken from the ELS-01C.)
LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 1, 2
(page 23)
REVERB buttons
(page 43)
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1, 2
(page 22)
Monitor speaker
SUSTAIN buttons
(page 47)
REGISTRATION MENU
(page 19)
RHYTHM/
KEYBOARD PERCUSSION
(page 51)
SmartMedia slot
(page 93)
[M.] (Memory) button
(page 80)
Registration memory
(page 80)
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
9
BRILLIANCE VOLUME
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MAX
MIN
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MAX
MIN
VIOLIN
SYNTH
FLUTE TO
LOWER
TRUMPET
1
LEAD VOICE 1
BRILLIANCE VOLUME
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MAX
MIN
CONTRA
BASS
ELEC.
BASS
TIMPANI TO
LOWER
SYNTH
BASS
1
PEDAL VOICE 1
BRILLIANCE VOLUME
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MAX
MIN
CONTRA
BASS
ELEC.
BASS
TIMPANI TO
LOWER
SYNTH
BASS
1
PEDAL VOICE 2
BRILLIANCE VOLUME
LEAD VOICE 2
VA VA
ACOUS-
TIC
VIRTUAL
VA VA
ELEC-
TRONIC
SOLO
(KNEE)
CUSTOM
1
MASTER VOLUME
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
DATA CONTROL
POWER
5678 910 12
D.
11
LCD display/
DISPLAY SELECT
(page 10)
PEDAL VOICE 1, 2
(page 23)
LEAD VOICE 1, 2
(page 22)
Monitor speaker
MASTER VOLUME
dial (page 11)
POWER switch
(page 11)
[D.] (Disable) button
(page 82)
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
10
LCD Display/Display Select
Overview
1 LCD display (touch-panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . page 12
2 DATA CONTROL dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 14
3 [VOICE DISPLAY] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 17
4 [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button . . . . . . . . . . .pages 62, 64
5 [MDR] button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 92
6 [FOOT SWITCH] button . . . . . . . . . .pages 85, 180
7 [UTILITY] button . . . . . . pages 15, 186, 188, 217
8 [INTERNET] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 190
9 [VOICE EDIT] button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 129
) [PATTERN] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 140
! [SEQUENCE] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 170
@ [U. ORGAN FLUTES] button. . . . . . . . . . . page 35
# [L. ORGAN FLUTES] button . . . . . . . . . . . page 35
$ [ROTARY SP SPEED] button . . . . . . . . . . page 48
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
DATA CONTROL
1
2
3 4 5
6 7 8
9 ) !
@ # $
Key cover/Music rest
Front Panel (page 8)
Upper keyboard
Lower keyboard
USB/MIDI connectors (page 205)
Knee lever (page 183)
Speaker switch
Left footswitch (page 180)
Expression pedal (page 12)
Second expression pedal
(ELS-01C/01X); (page 185)
Pedalboard
Speaker
I/O connectors
(page 203)
Right footswitch (page 84)
Output terminals (page 204)
Pedalboard (ELS-01X)
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
11
Quick Introductory Guide
Whether you are an advanced performer or have never touched an electronic keyboard in your life, we
recommend that you take the time to go through this basic section. It shows you in the simplest
possible manner how to start playing your Electone.
Plug the power cord into an appropriate electrical outlet.
Make sure that the POWER switch of the speaker is set to on.
If you are using the ELS-01C or ELS-01X, also set the REAR SPEAKER switch
to on (not available on the ELS-01).
Turn on the Electone by pressing the POWER switch.
Set the MASTER VOLUME control.
The MASTER VOLUME control is an overall control that affects the volume of
the entire instrument.
Contents
1 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
2 Using the LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
• Changing the Display Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
• Pressing Buttons on the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
• Adjusting Parameter Values by Using the Display
Sliders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
3 LCD Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
• Selecting the Display Language . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
• Muting the Touch Panel Sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
• Adjusting the Display Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
4Voice Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
5 Registration Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
• Selecting Registrations from the Registration Menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
• Registration Menu List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
6 Confirming the Version of Your Electone . . . . . .21
7Factory Set (Initializing the Electone). . . . . . . . .21
1
Getting Started
Only use the voltage specified as correct for the Electone. The required
voltage is printed on the name plate of the Electone. Yamaha products are
manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area where they are to
be sold. If you intend to use the instrument in another location, or if any
doubt exists about the supply voltage, please consult with a qualified
technician.
1
2
NOTE
When using the rear speaker,
place the Electone against a
wall, allowing about 20 cm
from the wall for optimum
sound.
3
POWER
4
NOTE
You do not need to switch the
power of the speaker on/off
whenever you use the
instrument.
If you want, you can always
keep it on and turn off the
power by pressing the main
POWER switch of the
instrument.
MASTER VOLUME
Decreasing
the volume
Increasing
the volume
1
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
12
1
Quick Introductory Guide
Press the Expression pedal down with your foot.
This instrument features a special touch panel that allows you to change the parameters
by simply touching the ‘virtual’ buttons or sliders on the display. (Please note that two
or more parameters cannot be operated simultaneously.)
You can also use the Data Control dial to make fine changes to the parameter value
shown in the display.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Changing the Display Page
There are some oval-shaped numbered buttons at the top right of the display. Pressing
these buttons changes the “page” of the display. The selected page’s button turns
orange.
2
Using the LCD Display
5
Maximum volume
Minimum volume
NOTE
When cleaning the display,
use a soft, dry cloth.
Do not use any sharp or
hard tools to operate the
touch panel. Doing so may
damage the display.
Page 1
Page 2
Press this button to select Page 1
Press this button to select Page 2
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
13
1
Quick Introductory Guide
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Pressing Buttons on the Display
There are three types of buttons: those that select a function, those that switch a
function on/off, and those that open a list or menu of parameters. To select the desired
function, simply press the button in the display directly.
For switching on/off or opening a parameter list, see the instructions below.
To switch the function on or off:
You can independently mute each Voice section in the Voice Display, each
accompaniment part in Rhythm Menu display, and each Element in the Voice Edit
display.
To open the parameter list:
When you press the button, a parameter list will appear in which you can select the
desired parameter. To close the list, press the [CLOSE] button at the top right of the
list.
On
Off, or mute (button is grayed out)
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
14
1
Quick Introductory Guide
Adjusting Parameter Values by Using the Display
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Sliders
You can adjust some parameters such as Volume, Reverb, Pan and so on, by using the
‘virtual’ sliders in the display. There are two ways to move the slider in the display:
touching it directly, and using the Data Control dial. We suggest that you touch the
display slider when making coarse adjustments and use the Data Control dial for fine
adjustment.
Touching the display slider directly:
Press a point in the slider to which you want to adjust the parameter value. The slider
will move to the point you pressed. Also, by sliding your finger up or down while
holding down the display slider, you can change the parameter value.
Using the Data Control dial:
Touch on/above the slider in the display to enable the parameter and set a rough value,
then turn the Data Control dial.
To control Pan, you can move the horizontal slider in the same way as vertical sliders.
Slider will move to the point you touch
Slider will follow your finger
or
DATA CONTROL
Touch here to enable the parameter
Blue mark
DATA CONTROL
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
15
1
Quick Introductory Guide
Here you can change the display settings: displayed language (English or Japanese),
touch panel sound, and display brightness.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Selecting the Display Language
The LCD display can be shown in two languages, English and Japanese. The default
setting is English.
Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the GLOBAL Page of the
Utility Display.
Press the desired button, (Japanese) or [English].
3
LCD Display Settings
NOTE
The settings in the Utility
Display are automatically
saved when another display
is called up.
1
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
2
LANGUAGE
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
16
1
Quick Introductory Guide
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Muting the Touch Panel Sound
The Electone is set by default with the touch panel sound turned on, giving you audio
feedback when you press a button or control. If you want to mute the touch panel
sound, follow the procedure below.
Press [UTILITY] button to call up GLOBAL Page of the Utility
Display.
Press the [OFF] button of the TOUCH PANEL SOUND to mute the
sound.
To turn the sound on again, select [ON] in Step #2.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Adjusting the Display Brightness
You can adjust the display brightness to a comfortable, easy-to-read level.
Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the GLOBAL Page of the
Utility Display.
Move the LCD BRIGHTNESS slider by touching it directly or
using the Data Control dial.
Higher settings make the display brighter and lower settings make it darker.
1
2
TOUCH PANEL SOUND
1
2
DATA CONTROL
LCD BRIGHTNESS
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
17
1
Quick Introductory Guide
You can visually confirm the currently assigned Voices to each keyboard, currently
selected rhythm, Registration Shift, and so on, in the Voice Display.
How to call up the Voice Display:
The Voice Display always appears when the Electone is turned on. To call up the Voice
Display from any other display, press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button.
The Voice Display consists of two different pages that can be switched by pressing the
[1] or [2] button at the top right of the display.
4
Voice Display
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
3
1
2
564
Switching the Display Pages
Voice Display [Page 1]
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
18
1
Quick Introductory Guide
1 Voice Sections
Shows the Voices currently assigned to each Voice section. You can also mute specific
Voice section by pressing its button (the button is grayed-out).
2 RHYTHM
Shows the currently selected rhythm.
3 A.B.C. MODE
Shows the mode of the Auto Bass Chord.
4 TEMPO
Shows the current rhythm tempo.
5 BAR/BEAT
Shows the bar/beat when the rhythm is playing.
6 REGISTRATION
Shows the current position of the Registration Shift.
You can confirm the parameter values (for example, Reverb, Volume, Pan) for each
Registration Memory simultaneously. Moreover, you can unify a specific parameter
used in various Registration Memories at one time. See page 89 for the details.
Reference Page
Selecting a Voice (page 23)
Reference Page
Selecting a rhythm (page 51)
Reference Page
Auto Bass Chord (page 62)
Reference Page
Adjusting the tempo
(page 56)
Reference Page
Registration Shift (page 84)
Voice Display [Page 2]
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
19
1
Quick Introductory Guide
A “Registration” consists of panel settings including the selected Upper Keyboard
Voices, Lower Keyboard Voices, Pedal Voices, rhythm and so on. Each Registration
Menu button (1 – 5) includes 48 Registrations (or 60 Registrations on the ELS-01C/
01X), each specially suited for playing in a different music style.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Selecting Registrations from the Registration Menu
Press one of the REGISTRATION MENU buttons.
Each button has different Registrations for different music genres. For example,
if you want to play Jazz, press the [4] button. For details on the Registration
Menu, see page 20.
Select the desired Registration by pressing the appropriate
button on the display.
One display page contains 12 Registration buttons. Pressing the numbered
buttons in the display changes the display pages, letting you select up to 48
Registrations from one Registration Menu button (or 60 Registrations, on the
ELS-01C/01X).
The color of the selected Registration name changes to orange, indicating that it
has been selected, and the Auto Bass Chord mode is shown at the bottom of the
display.
Play your favorite song with the selected Registration.
5
Registration Menu
NOTE
Additional basic
Registrations are preset on
the Registration Memory
locations from 1 to 16. See
page 80 for details.
Kids
Pops & Rock
Dance & Ballad
Jazz & Latin
Symphony & World
1
REGISTRATION MENU
12345
1
2
3
4
5
2
Change the display pages here.
Reference Page
Auto Bass Chord (page 62)
3
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
20
1
Quick Introductory Guide
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Registration Menu List
Page
REGISTRATION MENU 1
KIDS
REGISTRATION MENU 2
POPS & ROCK
REGISTRATION MENU 3
DANCE & BALLAD
REGISTRATION MENU 4
JAZZ & LATIN
REGISTRATION MENU 5
SYMPHONY & WORLD
1
Simple 8 Beat 1 Dynamic 8 Beat Organ Ballad Blow On Sax Fanfare
Simple 8 Beat 2 NY Ballad Dramatic Ballad Sax Ensemble String Orchestra
Light Step British Pop Love Ballad Moonlight Romantic Violin
Sunny Pop 8 Beat Modern Smooth Lead Big Band Baroque
Kids March 1 Rock Band Pop Ballad Clarinet Swing Flute&Harp
Kids March 2 Detroit Pop Guitar Ballad Jazz Combo Serenade
Kids March 3 Techno Pop Acoustic Ballad Medium Jazz Fast March
Synth. Rock Sheriff Reggae Healing Guitar Organ Session Wild West
Symphonic March 1 Rock&Roll Chillout Guitar Combo Vienna Waltz
Symphonic March 2 Power Rock Sweetheart 1 Tender Ballad Polka
Bluegrass 60’s Guitar Rock Sweetheart 2 Jazz Waltz Chanson Club
Sea Carnival Unplugged Slow & Easy Five-Four Theatre Organ
2
Basic Waltz Motor City Euro Trance Big Band Samba Flamenco
Brass Ensemble Lovely Shuffle 6/8 Trance Mambo Brass Pop Flamenco
Pure Waltz Gospel Shuffle Cool Hip Hop Mambo Tenor Mexican Dance
Rococo Ensemble Joyful Gospel Latin House Montuno Mariachi
Pop Cha Cha Frankly Soul Dance Beat Bossa Nova Celtic Dance
Comical Rumba Soul Euro Dance Pop Pop Bossa Folk Step
Comical Samba Gospel UK Pop Sweet Rumba Italiano
Toy Orchestra 6/8 Soul Jive Beguine Musette
Charleston Hit Pop Disco Queen Cha Cha Cha Country
Winter Swing New Country Disco Soul Mellow Groove Hawaiian
Snow Waltz 1 Eternal Pop Pop Disco Modern R&B Chinese Nocturne
Snow Waltz 2 Ground Beat Hot Disco Dixieland Jazz Japanese Sound
3
Alpine Polka *A Bounce Pop *A Ibiza *A Jungle Drum *A Orchestra March*A
Alpine Polka *B Bounce Pop *B Ibiza *B Jungle Drum *B Orchestra March*B
Alpine Polka *C Bounce Pop *C Ibiza *C Jungle Drum *C Orchestra March*C
Alpine Polka *D Bounce Pop *D Ibiza *D Jungle Drum *D Orchestra March*D
Dream Ballad *A Blues Jam *A Power House *A Jazz Club *A Pasodoble *A
Dream Ballad *B Blues Jam *B Power House *B Jazz Club *B Pasodoble *B
Dream Ballad *C Blues Jam *C Power House *C Jazz Club *C Pasodoble *C
Dream Ballad *D Blues Jam *D Power House *D Jazz Club *D Pasodoble *D
Pops Orchestra*A Evergreen Waltz*A Dance Latino *A Afro Session *A Tango *A
Pops Orchestra*B Evergreen Waltz*B Dance Latino *B Afro Session *B Tango *B
Pops Orchestra*C Evergreen Waltz*C Dance Latino *C Afro Session *C Tango *C
Pops Orchestra*D Evergreen Waltz*D Dance Latino *D Afro Session *D Tango *D
4
Kids On Stage *A 16 Beat Pop *A Twilight Disco*A ChaCha Grandee*A Show Time *A
Kids On Stage *B 16 Beat Pop *B Twilight Disco*B ChaCha Grandee*B Show Time *B
Kids On Stage *C 16 Beat Pop *C Twilight Disco*C ChaCha Grandee*C Show Time *C
Kids On Stage *D 16 Beat Pop *D Twilight Disco*D ChaCha Grandee*D Show Time *D
Galaxy March *A Top Gear Rock *A Love Song *A 3/4 Fast Jazz *A Majestic Sound*A
Galaxy March *B Top Gear Rock *B Love Song *B 3/4 Fast Jazz *B Majestic Sound*B
Galaxy March *C Top Gear Rock *C Love Song *C 3/4 Fast Jazz *C Majestic Sound*C
Galaxy March *D Top Gear Rock *D Love Song *D 3/4 Fast Jazz *D Majestic Sound*D
SE *A Southern Pop *A Movie Ballad *A Twilight Sax *A Orchestra Swing*A
SE *B Southern Pop *B Movie Ballad *B Twilight Sax *B Orchestra Swing*B
SE *C Southern Pop *C Movie Ballad *C Twilight Sax *C Orchestra Swing*C
SE *D Southern Pop *D Movie Ballad *D Twilight Sax *D Orchestra Swing*D
5
(ELS-01C/
01X)
Bright 16 Beat *A Funk *A Hip Hop Pop *A Organ Bossa *A Orchestra 3001*A
Bright 16 Beat *B Funk *B Hip Hop Pop *B Organ Bossa *B Orchestra 3001*B
Bright 16 Beat *C Funk *C Hip Hop Pop *C Organ Bossa *C Orchestra 3001*C
Bright 16 Beat *D Funk *D Hip Hop Pop *D Organ Bossa *D Orchestra 3001*D
Movie Panther *A West Coast Rock*A Fusion Shuffle*A Afro Cuban *A Wedding Song *A
Movie Panther *B West Coast Rock*B Fusion Shuffle*B Afro Cuban *B Wedding Song *B
Movie Panther *C West Coast Rock*C Fusion Shuffle*C Afro Cuban *C Wedding Song *C
Movie Panther *D West Coast Rock*D Fusion Shuffle*D Afro Cuban *D Wedding Song *D
Powerful Swing*A 6/8 Enka *A Whole Ballad *A Midnight Jazz *A Fantasy *A
Powerful Swing*B 6/8 Enka *B Whole Ballad *B Midnight Jazz *B Fantasy *B
Powerful Swing*C 6/8 Enka *C Whole Ballad *C Midnight Jazz *C Fantasy *C
Powerful Swing*D 6/8 Enka *D Whole Ballad *D Midnight Jazz *D Fantasy *D
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
21
1
Quick Introductory Guide
You can confirm the version of your Electone by the following procedure.
Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the GLOBAL Page of the
Utility Display.
Press the [Version] button in the display.
The Version dialog appears in the display. Pressing [OK] closes the dialog.
All current settings including Registration Memory, User Voices, User Rhythms, and
LCD Display settings can be deleted at once by the following procedure. Be careful
when executing Factory Set, since it erases all your existing data. Always save your
important data to external media, such as a SmartMedia card.
Factory Set does not reset the Internet Direct Connection settings. If you want to reset
the Internet Direct Connection settings, see page 201.
Turn off the power.
While holding down the ENDING [1] button, turn the power back
on.
Release the ENDING [1] button after Voice Display appears.
If you don’t want to reset the LCD Display settings, you can initialize only Registration
settings. See page 84 for more information.
6
Confirming the Version of Your Electone
7
Factory Set (Initializing the Electone)
1
2
Reference Page
Saving Registrations
(page 107)
Reference Page
Initializing Internet Settings
(page 201)
1
2
123
ENDING
POWER
3
Reference Page
Initializing Registration
Memory (page 84)
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
22
2
Voices
Voices
This Electone features hundreds of high quality Voices. Any of these Voices can be used on
the Upper Keyboard, Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard. Up to four Voice sections are
available on the Upper Keyboard for playing together in a layer, while the Lower Keyboard
and Pedalboard each have two Voice sections.
Voices for the Upper Keyboard
Up to four different Voice sections are available on the Upper Keyboard for playing
together: Upper Keyboard Voice 1, Upper Keyboard Voice 2, Lead Voice 1, and Lead
Voice 2. Voices for each section can be selected from the panel.
Lead Voice 1 and 2 sound only the highest note (or last note played) if two or more
keys are played together. This makes the Lead Voices ideal for “lead” or solo
instruments such as Trumpet and Saxophone. Lead Voice 2 includes additional,
exclusive VA Voices which are not available in other Voice sections.
Contents
1Voices for each keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
2 Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons . . . . . . .23
• Selecting a Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
• Changing the Voice volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
3 Selecting Voices from the User buttons . . . . . . .28
4Voice List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Voices for the Upper Keyboard
Voices for the
Lower Keyboard
Voices for Pedalboard
1
Voices for each keyboard
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1
BRILLIANCE
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
VOLUME
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 2
BRILLIANCE VOLUME
MAX
MIN
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MAX
MIN
STRINGS BRASS TUTTI PAD SYNTH
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO ORGAN GUITAR CHOIR WORLD
PERCUS-
SION
1
2
STRINGS BRASS TUTTI PAD SYNTH
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO ORGAN GUITAR CHOIR WORLD
PERCUS-
SION
1
2
BRILLIANCE VOLUME
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MAX
MIN
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MAX
MIN
VIOLIN
SYNTH
FLUTE TO
LOWER
TRUMPET
1
LEAD VOICE 1
BRILLIANCE VOLUME
LEAD VOICE 2
VA VA
ACOUS-
TIC
VIRTUAL
VA VA
ELEC-
TRONIC
SOLO
(KNEE)
CUSTOM
1
Upper Keyboard Voice 1 Upper Keyboard Voice 2
Lead Voice 1 Lead Voice 2
Reference Page
AWM Voices and VA Voices
(page 34)
2
2
Voices
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
23
Voices for the Lower Keyboard
Up to two different Voice sections are available on the Lower Keyboard for playing
together: Lower Keyboard Voice 1 and Lower Keyboard Voice 2. Voices for each section
can be selected from the panel.
Voices for Pedalboard
Up to two different Voice sections are available on the Pedalboard for playing together:
Pedal Voice 1 and Pedal Voice 2. Voices for each section can be selected from the panel.
Pedal Voices 1 and 2 sound only the highest note if two or more pedals are played, by
default.
Since selection of Voices follows the same procedure throughout all Voice sections,
instructions for only the Upper Keyboard Voice 1 are given here.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Selecting a Voice
Press one of the Voice buttons in the Upper Keyboard Voice 1
section.
LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 1
BRILLIANCE
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
VOLUME
LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 2
BRILLIANCE VOLUME
MAX
MIN
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MAX
MIN
STRINGS BRASS TUTTI PAD SYNTH
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO ORGAN GUITAR CHOIR WORLD
PERCUS-
SION
1
2
STRINGS BRASS TUTTI PAD SYNTH
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO ORGAN GUITAR CHOIR WORLD
PERCUS-
SION
1
2
Lower Keyboard Voice 1 Lower Keyboard Voice 2
Reference Page
POLY (page 40)
2
Selecting Voices with the Voice buttons
BRILLIANCE VOLUME
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MAX
MIN
CONTRA
BASS
ELEC.
BASS
TIMPANI TO
LOWER
SYNTH
BASS
1
PEDAL VOICE 1
BRILLIANCE VOLUME
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MAX
MIN
CONTRA
BASS
ELEC.
BASS
TIMPANI TO
LOWER
SYNTH
BASS
1
PEDAL VOICE 2
Pedal Voice 1 Pedal Voice 2
1
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1
BRILLIANCE
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
STRINGS BRASS TUTTI PAD SYNTH
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO ORGAN GUITAR CHOIR WORLD
PERCUS-
SION
1
2
Voice buttons
2
Voices
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
24
For example, if you have pressed the [PIANO] button, the following display
(Voice Menu) will appear.
Select the desired Voice name from the Voice menu.
The Voice menu contains many Piano Voices, more than can fit on one display
page. To change the display pages, press the appropriate number buttons in the
display.
The color of the selected Voice name changes to orange, indicating that it has
been selected.
2
2
Voices
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
25
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Changing the Voice volume
There are two ways to set the Voice volume: using the VOLUME buttons on the panel
and using the volume slider in the display. The VOLUME buttons let you make coarse
adjustments to the volume while the slider gives you fine control.
Using the VOLUME buttons on the panel (coarse)
Press one of the VOLUME buttons of each Voice section on the panel to set the desired
level for each Voice.
The buttons have seven volume settings, from a minimum of 0, or no sound, to a
maximum of full volume.
Using VOLUME slider in the display (fine)
Pressing the same Voice button on the panel again (or pressing the Voice name of the
selected Voice in the display) calls up the Voice Condition Display.
To set the volume, touch the VOLUME slider in the display or use the Data Control
Dial. The control range is from 0 (no sound) to 24 (full volume).
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1
BRILLIANCE
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
STRINGS BRASS TUTTI PAD SYNTH
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO ORGAN GUITAR CHOIR WORLD
PERCUS-
SION
1
2
DATA CONTROL
Volume slider
NOTE
Depending on the volume
value (set by the slider), two
adjacent VOLUME button
lamps may be lit at the same
time, indicating an
intermediate position.
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
24
20
16
12
8
4
0
24
23
1
0
12
2
Voices
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
26
Pressing a Voice button once calls up the Voice Menu display for the selected
button. Pressing it a second time calls up the Voice Condition display. Successive
presses alternate between the two displays.
When the Voice Condition display is shown, pressing [VOICE MENU] button on
the display also calls up the Voice Menu.
From the Voice Condition display, you can control Voice-related parameters such as
Pan, Effect, Volume, and so on. For more information on the Voice Condition
display, see page 39.
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1
BRILLIANCE
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
STRINGS BRASS TUTTI PAD SYNTH
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO ORGAN GUITAR CHOIR WORLD
PERCUS-
SION
1
2
CAUTION
Turning the Electone off
erases all panel settings
you have made.
If you wish to keep the
panel settings you have
made, save them to a
SmartMedia card or other
external media before
turning the Electone off
(page 83).
About the To Lower function
Voices selected for the Lead Voice 1, Pedal Voice 1, and Pedal Voice 2 sections can
also be played on the Lower Keyboard when the [TO LOWER] button in each
section is on. When [TO LOWER] is on, the Lead Voice and Pedal Voice cannot be
played on the Upper Keyboard and Pedalboard, respectively.
The To Lower function is not available in the Lead Voice 2 section.
BRILLIANCE VOLUME
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MAX
MIN
VIOLIN
SYNTH
FLUTE TO
LOWER
TRUMPET
1
LEAD VOICE 1
BRILLIANCE VOLUME
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MAX
MIN
CONTRA
BASS
ELEC.
BASS
TIMPANI TO
LOWER
SYNTH
BASS
1
PEDAL VOICE 1
2
Voices
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
27
About the Solo function
The Lead Voice 2 section features an exclusive Solo function. Solo lets you
instantly switch to a solo Lead Voice in the middle of your performance, muting
all other Upper Keyboard Voices.
Select the Voice that you wish to play solo in the Lead Voice
2 section.
In this condition, all the Voices for Upper Keyboard (Upper Keyboard
Voice 1 and 2, and Lead Voice 1 and 2) can be played.
Press the [SOLO (KNEE)] button in the Lead Voice 2 section.
This sets Solo to standby status.
To use Solo, unfold the knee lever. (Bring it down into position.)
In this condition (Solo on), only the Lead Voice 2 is playable on the
Upper Keyboard. (All other Voices are muted.)
To temporarily turn Solo off as you play, press the Knee
Lever to the right with your knee.
In this condition, all Voices set to the Upper Keyboard except for Lead
Voice 2 are playable on the Upper Keyboard. (Only Lead Voice 2 is muted.)
Each time you press the Knee Lever (Solo off) you can play all Voices except
Lead Voice 2, and each time you release it (Solo on) you can play only Lead
Voice 2 on the Upper Keyboard.
Notes on using Solo
• The knee lever can be used to control other functions, such as switching Sustain.
When other functions are assigned to the knee lever, pressing knee lever turns
these functions on at the same time.
•Pressing the knee lever while holding down a key will not turn Solo off for that
key. Solo remains active until the next key is played after pressing the knee
lever.
• Lead Voices 1 and 2 sound only the highest note if two or more keys are played.
However, in the Solo mode, Lead Voice 2 sounds for the last key played.
Reference Page
Knee Lever (page 183)
Reference Page
Voice Condition Display
(page 39)
1
2
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MAX
MIN
BRILLIANCE VOLUME
LEAD VOICE 2
VA VA
ACOUS-
TIC
VIRTUAL
VA VA
ELEC-
TRONIC
SOLO
(KNEE)
CUSTOM
1
3
Unfold
4
2
Voices
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
28
This Electone has a wide variety of Voices from which you can choose – far greater than
what is immediately apparent from the Voice buttons on the panel. Each Voice section
has one or two User buttons (numbered 1 or 2) which can be found at the right side of
each Voice section. You can use the User buttons to select Voices that cannot be selected
normally from the Voice buttons – such as Contrabass for the Upper Keyboard Voice.
Press one of the User buttons in any of the Voice sections.
Select the desired instrument category with the category buttons
in the display. You can also choose the “USER” category to select
a User Voice you have created.
For example, to call up Marimba 1, select the percussion category.
The name of the selected category (Percussion) is displayed on the upper left.
The Voice name shown under the category name is that of the currently assigned
Voice and is irrelevant to the Voice menu below.
3
Selecting Voices from the User buttons
1
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1
BRILLIANCE
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
STRINGS BRASS TUTTI PAD SYNTH
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO ORGAN GUITAR CHOIR WORLD
PERCUS-
SION
1
2
User buttons
2
Reference Page
Voice Edit (page 127)
Instrument
categories
Reference Page
Voice List (page 30)
Percussion
2
Voices
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
29
Select a Voice (Marimba 1, for example) from the displayed Voice
Menu.
Pressing number buttons in the display calls up the other Voices in the category,
The Voice name of the selected Voice (Marimba 1) appears under the category
name, indicating that the Voice has been selected.
To directly select the desired category, hold down one of the User buttons and
simultaneously press the desired Voice button.
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1
BRILLIANCE
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
STRINGS BRASS TUTTI PAD SYNTH
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO ORGAN GUITAR CHOIR WORLD
PERCUS-
SION
1
2
1. While holding down the User button…
2. Press the Voice button.
3
2
Voices
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
30
This list shows all available Voices on the Electone. Numbers written at the left side of each column in this list
indicate the numbered buttons displayed in the Voice Menu.
4
Voice List
STRINGS/VIOLIN
1
Strings 1
Strings 2
Strings 3
Strings 4
Strings 5
Strings 6
Strings 7
Strings 8
Strings 9
Chamber Strs 1
Chamber Strs 2
Chamber Strs 3
Chamber Strs 4
2
Pizzicato Strs 1
Pizzicato Strs 2
Pizzicato Strs 3
Pizzicato Strs 4
Tremolo Strings
3
Strings1&7
Strings2&Viola
Strings3&4
Strings7&Violin5
Violin5&Cello
Octave Strings 1
Octave Strings 2
4
Violin 1
Violin 2
Violin 3
Violin 4
Violin 5
Violin 6
Viola
Cello 1
Cello 2
Pizzicato Violin
CONTRABASS
1
Contrabass 1
Contrabass 2
Contrabass 3
Contrabass 4
Contrabass 5
Acoustic Bass 1
Acoustic Bass 2
Pizzicato Bass 1
Pizzicato Bass 2
BRASS/TRUMPET
1
Brass Section 1
Brass Section 2
Brass Section 3
Brass Section 4
Brass Section 5
Brass Section 6
1
Trombone Sec 1
Trombone Sec 2
Trombone Sec 3
Trombone Sec 4
Trombone Sec 5
2
Brass1&Trp6
Brass2&Trp6
Horn 1&4
Octave Brass 1
Octave Brass 2
Octave Brass 3
Octave Brass 4
Octave Brass 5
Octave Brass 6
Octave Brass 7
3
Trumpet 1
Trumpet 2
Trumpet 3
Trumpet 4
Trumpet 5
Trumpet 6
Trumpet 7
Muted Trumpet 1
Muted Trumpet 2
Muted Trumpet 3
Flugel Horn 1
Flugel Horn 2
4
Trombone 1
Trombone 2
Trombone 3
Trombone 4
Muted Trombone 1
Muted Trombone 2
5
Horn 1
Horn 2
Horn 3
Horn 4
Horn 5
Horn 6
Muted Horn
6
Tuba 1
Tuba 2
Euphonium
Brass Bass 1
Brass Bass 2
Brass Bass 3
WOODWIND/FLUTE
1
Flute 1
Flute 2
Flute 3
Flute 4
Piccolo
Recorder 1
1
Recorder 2
Ocarina
Whistle
2
Clarinet 1
Clarinet 2
Clarinet 3
Clarinet 4
Bass Clarinet
3
Oboe 1
Oboe 2
Oboe 3
Oboe 4
Oboe 5
English Horn 1
English Horn 2
Bassoon 1
Bassoon 2
Bassoon 3
4
Alto Sax 1
Alto Sax 2
Tenor Sax 1
Tenor Sax 2
Tenor Sax 3
Soprano Sax 1
Soprano Sax 2
Baritone Sax
5
Sax Ens 1
Sax Ens 2
Sax Ens 3
Woodwind Ens 1
Woodwind Ens 2
Woodwind Ens 3
Woodwind Ens 4
TUTTI
1
Strings&Winds
Strings&Brass 1
Strings&Brass 2
Strings&Horn
Brass&Sax 1
Brass&Sax 2
Brass&Sax 3
Brass&Winds
2Orchestra Hit
CHOIR
1
Choir 1
Choir 2
Choir 3
Choir 4
Choir 5
Choir 6
Choir 7
Choir 8
Choir 9
2Vocal
PAD
1
Smooth Pad 1
Smooth Pad 2
Smooth Pad 3
Smooth Pad 4
Smooth Pad 5
Smooth Pad 6
Smooth Pad 7
Smooth Pad 8
2
Resonance Pad 1
Resonance Pad 2
Resonance Pad 3
Resonance Pad 4
Resonance Pad 5
Resonance Pad 6
Resonance Pad 7
Resonance Pad 8
Resonance Pad 9
Resonance Pad 10
Resonance Pad 11
3
Bell Pad 1
Bell Pad 2
Bell Pad 3
Bell Pad 4
Bell Pad 5
Bell Pad 6
Bell Pad 7
Bell Pad 8
Bell Pad 9
4
Space Pad 1
Space Pad 2
Space Pad 3
Space Pad 4
Space Pad 5
Space Pad 6
5
Noisy Pad 1
Noisy Pad 2
Noisy Pad 3
Noisy Pad 4
Noisy Pad 5
SYNTH
1
Synth Lead 1
Synth Lead 2
Synth Lead 3
Synth Lead 4
Synth Lead 5
Synth Lead 6
Synth Lead 7
Synth Lead 8
2
Pop Lead 1
Pop Lead 2
Pop Lead 3
ELS-01/01C/01X
2
Voices
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
31
2
Pop Lead 4
Pop Lead 5
Pop Lead 6
Pop Lead 7
3
Synth Cla 1
Synth Cla 2
Synth Cla 3
Synth Cla 4
Synth Cla 5
Synth Cla 6
Synth Sax
Synth Trumpet
Synth Violin
4
Synth Brass 1
Synth Brass 2
Synth Brass 3
Synth Brass 4
Synth Brass 5
Synth Brass 6
Synth Brass 7
Synth Brass 8
Synth Brass 9
Synth Brass 10
Synth Brass 11
Synth Brass 12
Synth Brass 13
5
Synth Strs 1
Synth Strs 2
Synth Strs 3
Synth Strs 4
Synth Strs 5
Synth Strs 6
Synth Strs 7
6
Synth Bell 1
Synth Bell 2
Synth Bell 3
Synth Bell 4
Synth Bell 5
Synth Bell 6
Synth Bell 7
Synth Decay 1
Synth Decay 2
Synth Decay 3
Synth Decay 4
ORGAN
1
Pipe Organ 1
Pipe Organ 2
Pipe Organ 3
Pipe Organ 4
Pipe Organ 5
Harmonica 1
Harmonica 2
Harmonica 3
2
Theatre Organ 1
Theatre Organ 2
Theatre Organ 3
Theatre Organ 4
Theatre Organ 5
Theatre Organ 6
Theatre Organ 7
2
Theatre Organ 8
Accordion 1
Accordion 2
Accordion 3
Accordion 4
Bandoneon
Reed Organ
3
Jazz Organ 1
Jazz Organ 2
Jazz Organ 3
Jazz Organ 4
Jazz Organ 5
Jazz Organ 6
Jazz Organ 7
Jazz Organ 8
Jazz Organ 9
4
Pop Organ 1
Pop Organ 2
Pop Organ 3
Pop Organ 4
Pop Organ 5
Rock Organ 1
Rock Organ 2
Rock Organ 3
5
Organ Bass 1
Organ Bass 2
Organ Bass 3
Organ Bass 4
PIANO
1
Piano 1
Piano 2
Piano 3
Honkytonk Piano
Harpsichord 1
Harpsichord 2
Clavichord
2
DX E.Piano 1
DX E.Piano 2
DX E.Piano 3
DX E.Piano 4
Stage E.Piano 1
Stage E.Piano 2
Stage E.Piano 3
Stage E.Piano 4
Stage E.Piano 5
Stage E.Piano 6
3
Stack E.Piano 1
Stack E.Piano 2
Clavi 1
Clavi 2
GUITAR
1
Nylon Guitar 1
Nylon Guitar 2
Steel Guitar 1
Steel Guitar 2
12Str Guitar
Jazz Guitar 1
Jazz Guitar 2
Harp 1
Harp 2
1 Harp 3
2
Elec Guitar 1
Elec Guitar 2
Elec Guitar 3
Elec Guitar 4
Elec Guitar 5
Muted Guitar
Distortion Gtr 1
Distortion Gtr 2
Distortion Gtr 3
3
Banjo
Mandolin
Pedal Steel Gtr
PERCUSSION
1
Vibraphone 1
Vibraphone 2
Marimba 1
Marimba 2
Xylophone
Glockenspiel 1
Glockenspiel 2
2
Celesta 1
Celesta 2
Music Box 1
Music Box 2
Chime 1
Chime 2
Chime 3
TIMPANI
1
Timpani 1
Timpani 2
Timpani Roll 1
Timpani Roll 2
Timpani Roll 3
ELECTRIC BASS
1
Fingered Bass 1
Fingered Bass 2
Fingered Bass 3
Fingered Bass 4
Fingered Bass 5
Slap Bass 1
Slap Bass 2
Slap Bass 3
Slap Bass 4
2
Picked Bass 1
Picked Bass 2
Picked Bass 3
Picked Bass 4
Fretless Bass 1
Fretless Bass 2
SYNTH BASS
1
Funk Bass 1
Funk Bass 2
Funk Bass 3
Funk Bass 4
Funk Bass 5
Funk Bass 6
Funk Bass 7
Funk Bass 8
Funk Bass 9
1 Funk Bass 10
2
Dance Bass 1
Dance Bass 2
Dance Bass 3
Dance Bass 4
Dance Bass 5
Dance Bass 6
Dance Bass 7
Dance Bass 8
3
Smooth Bass 1
Smooth Bass 2
Smooth Bass 3
Smooth Bass 4
Smooth Bass 5
Smooth Bass 6
Smooth Bass 7
WORLD
1
Pan Flute 1
Pan Flute 2
Bagpipe
Dulcimer
Shakuhachi
Yokobue
Shamisen
Koto
Taishokoto
2
Erhu 1
Erhu 2
Sheng
Zheng
Pipa
Nay
Surnay
Oud
Sitar
Kamanche
3
Steel Drum
Log Drum
Kalimba
2
Voices
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
32
ELS-01C/01X (VA)
Voice Name Range Description
VA ACOUSTIC
1
V-Flute 1 G2 – A6
Flute with breath and other noises, which may squeak in higher registers. Setting the Touch Tone
(After) higher and applying keyboard pressure can recreate flutter tonguing.
V-Flute 2 C2 – C6
Flute suited for legato playing. Setting the User Vibrato depth to higher values has a nice effect.
V-Ocarina C3 – C6
Soft ocarina.
V-Oboe C3 – F5
Wider dynamic range with the Touch Tone effect.
V-Clarinet D2 – F5
Playing pianissimo creates breath noises, while playing fortissimo creates a brighter sound with
slightly lower pitch.
V-Soprano Sax A#2 – D5
Rounder and softer soprano saxophone.
V-Alto Sax 1 D#2 – G4
A bright alto saxophone for contemporary music. You can make the sound ‘break up’ as if
overblowing the instrument by setting After Touch to maximum and applying pressure to the key.
V-Alto Sax 2 C2 – E4
Alto saxophone suited for fusion music. Playing legato creates squeaky attack sounds and high
After Touch settings produce an overblowing effect.
V-Tenor Sax 1 A#2 – C4
Multi-purpose tenor saxophone. Soft in pianissimo and brighter in fortissimo.
V-Tenor Sax 2 C1 – G4
Soft tenor saxophone suited for jazz. Playing Legato creates squeaky attack sounds.
V-Breath Sax 1 A#2 – C4
Soft, breathy tenor saxophone suited for slow tempo music.
V-Breath Sax 2 C2 – E4
Brighter, breathy tenor saxophone suited for jazz.
2
V-Trumpet 1 A#2 – A#4
Soft trumpet. Slides and glissandos can be created with Horizontal Touch.
V-Trumpet 2 C2 – C5
Trumpet with characteristic attack sound. Lip slurs can be created by changing the pitch.
V-Trumpet 3 G2 – C5
Soft trumpet. Applying slight keyboard pressure produces breath noise.
V-Muted Trumpet A#2 – A#4
Cup-muted trumpet.
V-Trombone E1 – G3
Slides and glissandos can be created with Horizontal Touch. Also, high After Touch settings
produce an overblowing effect.
V-High Trombone C2 – C5
Brighter trombone suited for high notes.
V-Shakuhachi ---
Higher Touch Tone (After) setting increases breath noise and also squeaks the sound.
V-Erhu ---
Playing with softer touch produces hoarse sounds.
V-Sitar ---
Playing with harder touch squeaks the sounds.
VA VIRTUAL
1
V-Pan Pipe 1 E2 – G5
Setting the Touch Tone (After) higher and applying keyboard pressure can result in flutter tonguing.
V-Pan Pipe 2 C1 – C6
Panpipe flute sound. After and Initial Touch affect the pitch and timbre.
V-Bamboo C1 – C6
Bamboo panpipe sound with breath noise. After Touch changes the pitch dynamically.
V-Bottle C1 – C6
Sound of blowing a bottle. Playing trills over a wide interval range creates a squeaky attack sound.
V-Floboe F2 – C7
A hybrid sound combining oboe and saxophone.
V-Alt Kwek C3 – C7
A hybrid sound grafting an oboe reed onto a piccolo, with a distinctive pitch change in the low
registers.
V-Tin Whistle C2 – C7
Sound of a small flute. Playing with softer touch produces breath noise.
V-India ---
Percussive sitar sound.
V-East G1 – C5
Sitar with resonance and reverberation.
V-Zag ---
Simulation of a bowed ethnic instrument. Playing legato brings out higher octave sounds.
2
V-Asian Pluck C1 – G6
Plucked ethnic instrument. Using Initial Touch brings out higher octave sounds.
V-Air Reed 1 A2 – C5
A hybrid sound grafting an oboe reed onto a saxophone. High After Touch settings produce an
overblowing effect.
V-Air Reed 2 E2 – C5
A hybrid sound combining a conventional flute with panpipes.
V-Airphone A2 – C5
A hybrid sound grafting an oboe reed onto a soprano saxophone.
V-Thin Reed E2 – G5
A hybrid sound grafting a clarinet mouthpiece onto a flute. High After Touch settings produce an
overblowing effect.
V-Harmophone G1 – G5
A hybrid sound combining a harmonica and saxophone. Depending on use of Touch Tone, both
breath noise and a bright clear sound can be produced.
V-Saxonica G2 – G5
Harmonica sound resembling an alto saxophone. Playing with soft touch results in a high-pitched
sound.
V-Grass Reed E2 – G5
A hybrid sound grafting a bassoon reed onto a brass wind instrument. After Touch changes the
pitch.
V-Soft Reed 1 A2 – G5
A hybrid sound grafting a clarinet mouthpiece to a brass wind instrument.
V-Soft Reed 2 C1 – C6
A hybrid sound grafting a bassoon reed onto a soprano saxophone; includes breath noise.
V-Troppo E1 – C6
Thick bassoon sound. After Touch changes the pitch dynamically, and applying keyboard
pressure more produces wind noise.
3
V-Buzz String A2 – F5
Simulation of a hybrid bowed-wind instrument.
V-Bow String E1 – E6
Artificial synthesized strings sound.
V-String Bow C1 – C6
Simulation of a slow-attacked violin bowed with something other than a violin bow. Playing trills
over a wide interval range creates a squeaky attack sound.
V-Cosmosis C1 – G5
Bowed strings. Initial Touch affects the attack sound.
2
Voices
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
33
Each acoustic instrument has its own ideal note range. Keep in mind that playing outside of the range may create unexpected and unrealistic
sounds.
Voices that do not have a specified ideal note range (“---” is shown in the chart above) can be played in any range and result in optimum sound
with stable pitch.
* When the Feet parameter is set to 8', the resulting sound is actually 16'.
3
V-E.Violin C1 – C6
Synth violin.
V-Bowe C1 – C5
Simulation of a hybrid bowed-saxophone sound.
V-Claviolin G2 – G5
A hybrid sound combining a violin and wind instrument.
V-Air Bow C2 – G5
A bowed instrument sound with noise.
V-Waspy Horn C1 – G4
A hybrid sound grafting a brass wind instrument mouthpiece to a wind instrument. After Touch
affects the muted condition. Lip-slide can be created with Horizontal Touch.
V-Mizu Horn C1 – C6
A hybrid sound combining a harmonica and trumpet.
V-Cosmo Mute C1 – C5
Simulation of a distorted brass wind instrument. After and Initial Touch affect the muted condition.
V-Fago F1 – C7
Simulated deep bassoon sound. Playing with soft touch produces breath noise with a high tone range.
VA ELECTRONIC
1
V-Jazz Guitar E1 – E5
Soft and warm jazz guitar sound.
V-Picked Guitar E1 – E5
Hard-attack guitar played with a pick.
V-Simple Bass ---
Voice suited for bass phrases. After and Initial touch affect the resonance effect.*
V-Bass Attack ---
Voice suited for bass phrases. Initial touch affects the muted condition.*
V-Thumb Bass C1 – E4
Bass sounds played with the thumb.*
V-Fretless C1 – C5
Fretless bass.*
V-Saw Lead C1 – C5
Multi-purpose lead sounds. After Touch affects the filter changes.
V-Edge Lead C1 – C4
Synth bass sound with a sharp attack portion. After Touch affects the filter changes.
V-Dist Lead G1 – C5
Distorted lead sounds. Setting the Touch Tone (After) higher and applying keyboard pressure
raises the pitch.
V-Woody Lead C2 – G5
Lead sound with woody quality.
V-Muted Lead C2 – C5
Lead sound with wah-wah effect. After Touch heightens the wah-wah effect.
V-Talken Lead C1 – C5
Human voice-like lead sound. Setting the Touch Tone (After) higher and applying keyboard
pressure allows creation of hum noise.
2
V-Mad Tube ---
Distorted synth lead with long release sound. High After Touch settings produce an overblowing
effect.*
V-Mob ---
Distorted lead sound played with pick. Setting the Touch Tone (After) higher and applying
keyboard pressure raises the pitch by an octave.*
V-Transylva C1 – C6
Softly distorted lead sounds.*
V-Destiny ---
Wah guitar with a sharp attack.
V-Igneous C1 – C4
Lead sound with full feedback effects. After Touch affects the degree of feedback.
V-Wurli Lead C1 – C5
Simple synth lead with a sharp attack. High After Touch settings produce an overblowing effect.
V-Fifty Fifty ---
Analog synthesizer with simple square wave sound.
V-Ana Wave ---
Analog synthesizer. Initial touch and the length of holding down a key changes the filter effect.
V-Lyric Off C1 – C6
Wind synth sound with square wave sound.
V-Ossyncro C1 – C6
Lead sound with dynamic pitch change.*
V-Wahman C1 – A3
Wah-wah lead voice with pitch change in the attack.
V-Q. Klav C1 – G5
Funky electric clav sound. Initial touch affects the timbre.*
3
V-SFX 1 ---
Simulated hand-tapping of the open end of a pipe.
V-SFX 2 ---
Simulated scraping of a metallic plate. After Touch affects the degree of scraping.
V-SFX 3 ---
Simulated hitting of a metallic plate with a wood block. Initial Touch changes the apparent
hardness of the wood block.
V-SFX 4 ---
Soft playing results in wind sounds. Applying keyboard pressure (After Touch) produces a
distorted guitar sound.
V-SFX 5 ---
Jet noise. Applying keyboard pressure produces lead sound.
V-SFX 6 ---
Simulation of metallic plates colliding.
V-SFX 7 ---
Initial touch affects the resonance effect.
V-SFX 8 ---
Cry of a strange animal.
V-SFX 9 ---
Simulation of a thick and long hose.
V-SFX 10 ---
Trumpet with loop feedback sound.
V-SFX 11 ---
Initial touch produces the sound of hitting metal, and After Touch increase the noise.
V-SFX 12 ---
Initial touch produces the sounds of footsteps, and After Touch creates a windy sound.
V-SFX 13 ---
The sound of a soprano saxophone played in the distance. Playing with softer touch produces only
breath noise.
V-SFX 14 ---
Lead sound with After Touch-produced pitch change.
V-SFX 15 ---
Initial touch produces the sound of metal being scraped, and After Touch creates noise.
V-SFX 16 ---
Cry/roar of an animal.
Voice Name Range Description
2
Voices
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
34
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
AWM Voices and VA Voices
The ELS-01C/01X features two different types of Voices: AWM (Advanced Wave
Memory) and VA (Virtual Acoustic).
VA Voices are available only on the Lead Voice 2 section while AWM Voices are
available on all sections except Lead Voice 2.
AWM is a synthesis system based on sampled waves, or audio recordings of actual
instruments. AWM Voices uses multiple samples, so that they sound like a real
instrument.
On the other hand, VA synthesis applies sophisticated computer-based “physical
modeling” technology to musical sound synthesis. VA Voices in this Electone offer
many advantages in terms of musical performance, not just in terms of sound, but also
in terms of the behavior that makes acoustic instruments so musical.
VA synthesis simulates the very complex vibrations, resonances, reflections and other
acoustic phenomena that occur in an actual wind or string instrument.
Notes on VA Voices
Since the VA Voices have unique sonic characteristics and are closer in behavior to
acoustic instruments than the AWM Voices, you should observe the following
precautions when playing VA Voices.
•Some Voices may produce unexpected or unnatural sounds when played outside
(higher or lower than) the recommended note range (pages 32 and 33).
•Pitch change may not be smooth on some Voices when Horizontal Touch is applied.
•Portamento (Lead Slide) effects may not be smooth on some Voices.
•Keep in mind that playing legato or trills may not produce any sound.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Pipe/strings – simulates resonationDriver – generates physical energy
Calculates the
speed of the
resonated air
Mouthpiece
Single-ended pipe
(saxophone)
Double-ended pipe
(flute)
Embouchure
Bow Strings
Reference Page
Voice Edit (page 127)
3
Organ Flutes (ELS-01C/01X)
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
35
Organ Flutes (ELS-01C/01X)
The ELS-01C/01X has an Organ Flutes feature that allows you to create your own organ
Voices, giving you access to an unlimited combination of organ sounds. With this function,
you can recreate all of the classic organ sounds by adjusting the flute footage levels and the
percussive sounds, just like on conventional organs. There are nine flute footage settings,
with three additional footage settings for the attack sound.
Press one of the Organ Flutes buttons (UPPER or LOWER).
The lamp above the button lights and the Flute Footage Levers appear on the
display.
On the ELS-01, [U. ORGAN FLUTES] and [L. ORGAN FLUTES] buttons
are not active (Organ Flutes does not function).
Select the wave type for the Organ Flute Voice.
Selecting [SINE] button produces a clean, clear sound and selecting
[VINTAGE] produces a gritty, slightly distorted sound.
Adjust flute footage settings (over a range of 0 – 8).
The Flute footage levers can be adjusted by directly touching the display.
The Data Control dial cannot be used. Play the keyboard and listen to the
changes in the sound as you adjust the footage levels.
1
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
FOOTAGE Page
2
3
3
3
Organ Flutes (ELS-01C/01X)
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
36
Press the [ATTACK/VOLUME] button in the upper right on the
display to adjust the volume and Rotary Speaker settings.
1 ATTACK
Determines the level of each volume in the percussive portion of the Voice. Footage
settings are 4', 2-2/3' and 2'. The LENGTH lever determines the duration of the
attack sound.
2 RESP. (Response)
Determines the overall speed of the keyboard response. Moving the lever downward
makes the keyboard response slower, creating a pipe organ effect.
3 MODE
Determines which notes in a held group of notes are given an attack sound.
This parameter is common to both Upper and Lower Organ Flute Voices.
FIRST: Only the first note played will have attack. All other notes played while
the first is held have no attack.
EACH: All notes played have an attack sound.
4 REVERB
Reference Page
Reverb (page 43)
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Organ Flute Voice. When the panel
REVERB control is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect.
5 VOLUME
Determines the overall volume of the Organ Flute Voice. The volume balance of the
individual footages is maintained. A minimum setting here produces no Organ Flute
sound.
4
13245
6
ATTACK/VOLUME Page
3
Organ Flutes (ELS-01C/01X)
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
37
6 EFFECT TYPE
Select the Rotary Speaker (tremolo) effect type. Pressing the button for which the effect
type (or “OFF”) is displayed calls up a list of the effect types. Select the desired type
from among the list, then close the list by pressing [CLOSE] button on the display.
Pressing [U. ORGAN FLUTES] or [L. ORGAN FLUTES] button
again turns the Organ Flute Voice off and the lamp above the
button turns off.
Reference Pages
Effect List (page 50)
Rotary Speaker (page 48)
Select the desired effect type
5
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
38
4
Voice Controls and Effects
Voice Controls and Effects
The Electone is equipped with two general kinds of functions that can be used to change the
sound of the Voices: Voice Controls and Effects.
Each Voice has been given certain factory-preset effect settings to best enhance its sound.
However, if you wish, you can change the sound to suit your preferences by using the
controls and effects described in this section. All built-in effects are digital.
The chart below shows the various Voice controls and effects for the individual Voice
sections. Available functions are indicated by circles. The controls and effects are applied
differently according to the different types: independently for each Voice section,
independently for each keyboard or globally for the entire system.
* Priority is applied only for Lead Voice 2.
Controls and Effects Reference
page
for
changing
the settings
Voice sections to which the controls/effects are applied
Upper Keyboard Lead Voice Lower Keyboard Pedalboard
Upper
Keyboard
Voice 1, 2
Organ Flute
Voice
Lead Voice 1, 2
Lower
Keyboard
Voice 1, 2
Organ Flute
Voice
Pedalboard
Voice 1, 2
Selecting from the Voice Condition display
Pan page 39 O—O O—O
Touch Tone page 39 O—O O—O
Pitch page 40 O—OO—O
Feet page 40 O—O O—O
Reverb (send level) page 40 OOOOOO
Volume page 40 OOOOOO
Priority* page 40 ——O*———
Poly (Pedal
polyphonic mode)
page 40
—————O
Vibrato page 41 O—O O—O
Touch Vibrato page 41 O—OO—O
Lead Slide page 42 O—O———
Transpose page 42 O—O O—O
Tune page 42 O—O O—O
Effect (1, 2) page 42 O—O O—O
Selecting from
the panel
Reverb page 43 O
Sustain page 47 O—OO
Brilliance page 47 O—O O—O
Rotary Speaker page 48 O
Contents
1 Selecting from the Voice Condition display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2 Selecting from the panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3 Effect List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
4
4
Voice Controls and Effects
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
39
Choose a Voice on the panel, then press the same button on the panel again (or press
the name of the selected Voice in the display). The Voice Condition display appears.
Voice Condition Display for each Voice has four pages that can be switched by pressing
[1] – [4] buttons at the top right of the display.
In this display, you can adjust the basic Voice controls, including panning, touch tone
and volume. The displays of the various Voice sections have slight differences in their
functions.
1 PAN
Determines the position of the Voice in the stereo image. Seven pan positions are
available.
2 TOUCH TONE
The Touch Tone function gives you expressive control over the volume and timbre of a
Voice. All Voices are provided with this expressive function, making it possible to
perfectly reproduce the subtle dynamic and tonal changes of actual instruments.
Two types of keyboard touch affect this function: Initial Touch and After Touch.
2 -1 INITIAL touch
Controls volume and timbre according to the velocity at which you play the
keys. The harder you play the keys, the greater the volume and the brighter the
timbre will become.
Higher settings make the change wider. Minimum setting produces no effect.
Range: 0 – 14
2 -2 AFTER touch
Controls volume and timbre according to the pressure you apply to the keys
after playing them.
The harder you press down on the keys, the greater the volume and the brighter
the timbre will become.
Higher settings make the change wider. Minimum setting produces no effect.
Range: 0 – 14
1
Selecting from the Voice Condition display
2 -1 2 -2 3 -1 3 -2
32
1
32
1
45
6 7 2 -1 2 -2 3 -2 456 8
Voice Condition [Page 1]
NOTE
Initial Touch may not be
effective on some organ
Voices.
NOTE
After Touch has no effect on
percussive Voices (such as
piano or vibraphone),
percussion sounds, or some
organ Voices.
NOTE
On the ELS-01, After Touch is
not applied to the Pedal
Voices.
4
Voice Controls and Effects
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
40
3 PITCH
Controls pitch according to the play style of Horizontal Touch or After Touch.
On some Voices in the Lead Voice 2 section, not only pitch but also timbre may be
affected.
3 -1 HORIZONTAL touch (ELS-01C/01X)
Controls the pitch by holding down the key and moving it laterally (wiggling
your finger from side to side). The faster you move the key laterally, the faster
and greater the pitch change becomes, within a range of +/- one octave. You can
use this function in combination with Touch Tone described above to add
expressiveness to your performance.
Higher settings result in a wider pitch change. The minimum setting produces
no effect. This function is not available on the Pedalboard.
Range: 0 – 14
3 -2 AFTER touch
Controls the pitch according to the pressure you apply to the keys after playing
them.
The minimum setting produces no effect at all. Higher (positive) settings make
the pitch higher according to the pressure and lower (negative) settings make the
pitch lower. The setting of +14 or -14 results in the widest pitch change.
Range: -14 – +14
4 FEET
Determines the octave setting of the Voice, letting you use the Voice over a wide
register. There are three settings: 4', 8' and 16' (4' is highest and 16' is lowest). A 2'
setting is added to the Pedal Voice sections. PRESET is the original (factory) setting.
5 REVERB
Determines the amount of reverb applied to each Voice section. When the panel
REVERB control is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect.
See page 43 for details.
6 VOLUME
Fine adjustment of the Voice volume. See page 25 for more information.
7 PRIORITY (only for the Lead Voice 2)
Determines the mode of Lead Voice 2, Last or Top.
LAST: Only the last played key is sounded when two or more keys are played
simultaneously.
TOP: Only the highest note is sounded when two or more keys are played
simultaneously. When the Solo mode is on, Lead Voice 2 sounds according to
Last mode, regardless of the setting made here.
8 POLY (only for Pedal Voices)
Allows you to switch the pedal polyphonic mode on or off. Setting POLY to on
switches the normally monophonic pedal Voices to polyphonic play. This makes it
possible to play the Pedalboard in various expressive ways, such as playing legato or
playing intervals and chords.
Keep in mind that you cannot exceed the total maximum polyphony: 14 notes for all
sections, Upper, Lower and Pedal.
NOTE
Parameters that are available
only on the ELS-01C/01X are
indicated by a dark frame
and background in their
display controls.
Reference Page
Solo function (page 27)
4
Voice Controls and Effects
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
41
The items included in this page differ between the Lead Voice sections and the other
sections. SLIDE (
3) only applies to Lead Voice 1 and 2.
1 VIBRATO
The Vibrato function wavers the level of the Voices, making them sound warmer and
more animated. This effect is applied independently to each Voice section. For some
Voices, vibrato may not be effective at all or the effect may not sound as expected.
1 - 1 PRESET/USER
Selecting PRESET calls up the original
(factory) vibrato settings for the Voice.
When PRESET is selected, DELAY,
DEPTH and SPEED parameters cannot
be edited.
Selecting USER lets you adjust the vibrato
settings for yourself.
1 - 2 DELAY
Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a key and
the start of the vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the delay of the vibrato
onset.
Range: 0 – 14
1 - 3 DEPTH
Determines the intensity of the vibrato effect. Higher settings result in a more
pronounced vibrato. The minimum setting cancels the vibrato effect.
Range: 0 – 14
1 - 4 SPEED
Determines the speed of the vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the speed of
the vibrato.
Range: 0 – 14
2 TOUCH VIBRATO
Turns the Touch Vibrato function on or off. Setting Touch Vibrato to on lets you apply
vibrato to individual notes as you play them by after touch. The harder you press down
the key, the greater the vibrato will be. When Touch Vibrato is off, vibrato depth
cannot be controlled, no matter how hard you press the keys.
1 -2 1 -3 1 -4 3 -1 3 -2
3
1
1 -1
2
4 5
Voice Condition [Page 2]
Delay
Speed
Depth
Vibrato Control
NOTE
Touch Vibrato is not applied
to the Pedal Voices of the
ELS-01.
4
Voice Controls and Effects
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
42
3 SLIDE (only for Lead Voices)
Applies a portamento effect to notes played in legato. The Slide function is effective
within a one-octave range for Lead Voices. Slide has no effect when playing notes
beyond a one-octave range.
3 - 1 ON/KNEE/OFF
On/Off switch and knee lever selector for the Slide effect.
3 - 2 TIME
Determines the speed of the slide or portamento effect. Higher settings makes
the slide speed slower.
Range: 0 – 14
4 TRANSPOSE
Changes the pitch in semitones for each Voice section. Range is from -6 to +6.
5 TUNE
Determines the fine pitch settings (detune) for each Voice section, producing a richer
sound. Each step represents a 1-cent change in pitch.
Range: -64 – +63
You can edit the effect parameters from these two displays. Both displays have the same
contents. You can select two effects for each Voice section with these displays (Voice
Condition Pages 3 and 4).
1 EFFECT 1 (Page 3)/EFFECT 2 (Page 4)
Selects the effect category. Pressing the effect button on the display calls up the effect
category list. Select the desired effect category in the list, then press [CLOSE] on the
upper right in the display to close the list.
Reference Page
Controlling Lead Slide (with
Knee Lever); (page 185)
Reference Page
Transpose (for entire
instrument); (page 188)
Reference Page
Pitch (for entire instrument);
(page 188)
3
2
1
Voice Condition [Page 3, 4]
Reference Page
Effect List (page 50)
4
Voice Controls and Effects
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
43
By selecting [PRESET] in the list, the original (factory) effect category for the selected
Voice is automatically set. Selecting [THRU] bypasses the effect (no effect is added to
the selected Voice).
2 TYPE 1 (Page 3)/ TYPE 2 (Page 4)
Determines the type of the effect. Pressing the TYPE button on the display calls up the
effect type list, corresponding to the selected effect category. Select the desired effect
type in the list, then press [CLOSE] on the upper right in the display to close the list.
If you have selected the [PRESET] category, the effect type cannot be edited.
After changing the effect type, the effect parameter below is automatically changed
corresponding to the selected effect type.
3 Effect Parameters
Effect parameters are displayed corresponding to the selected effect type.
The Reverb, Sustain and Rotary Speaker displays are called up by pressing the
respective buttons on the panel.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Reverb
Reverb adds an echo-like effect to the sound, giving the impression of a performance in
a large room or concert hall. You can adjust the reverb volume for each Voice sections,
or adjust the reverb volume for rhythm and accompaniment separately.
To adjust the reverb effect and call up the Reverb
pages:
Press one of the REVERB buttons, located to the left of the panel,
to set the Reverb effect. The Reverb display appears.
The Reverb display consists of four pages.
2
Selecting from the panel
REVERB
MAX
MIN
4
Voice Controls and Effects
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
44
DEPTH:
Fine adjustment of the depth of reverberation or the level of the reflected sounds.
Coarse reverb depth settings are made with the panel REVERB buttons. The REVERB
buttons let you make coarse adjustment in seven settings to the reverb depth while the
slider gives you fine control.
When this parameter or the panel REVERB control is set to the minimum, the settings
in the pages that follow have no effect.
Range: 0 – 24
1 TYPE
Determines the reverb type for each of the Voice sections and the Organ Flute Voice.
Several types can be selected: Room, Hall, Stage, and so on.
Pressing the TYPE button on the display calls up the Reverb Type list.
REVERB [Page 1]
NOTE
Depending on the reverb
depth value (set by the
slider), two adjacent REVERB
button lamps may be lit at the
same time, indicating an
intermediate position.
321
REVERB [Page 2]
Reference Page
Effect List (page 50)
4
Voice Controls and Effects
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
45
The list contains many reverb types, more than can fit on one display page. To change
the display pages, press the appropriate number buttons [1] or [2] in the display. Select
the desired reverb type in the list, then press [CLOSE] on the upper right in the display
to close the list. After changing the reverb type, the TIME parameter below is
automatically changed corresponding to the selected reverb type.
2 TIME
Determines the reverb length for each of the Voice sections and the Organ Flute Voice.
Higher settings increase the reverberance.
Range: 0.3s – 30.0s
3 ORGAN (only for the ELS-01C/01X)
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Organ Flute Voice. This parameter
corresponds to the REVERB slider contained in the ATTACK/VOLUME Page of the
Organ Flute display.
On the ELS-01, this slider is not displayed.
Range: 0 – 24
Determines the amount of reverb effect applied to each Voice section.
Each slider corresponds to the REVERB slider in Voice Condition Page 1 of the
respective Voices.
Range: 0 – 24
Press the number buttons to change the display pages.
Reference Page
Organ Flutes (page 35)
REVERB [Page 3]
4
Voice Controls and Effects
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
46
1 TYPE
Determines the reverb type for rhythm, accompaniment, keyboard percussion, and
microphone signal.
2 TIME
Determines the length of reverb applied to the rhythm, accompaniment, keyboard
percussion, and microphone signal.
Range: 0.3s – 30.0s
3 RHYTHM
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the rhythm (with PERCUSSION slider)
and accompaniment (with ACCOMPANI. slider). Each slider corresponds to the
REVERB slider in the Rhythm Condition display.
Range: 0 – 24
4 KEYBOARD PERCUSSION
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Keyboard Percussion.
Range: 0 – 24
32 41
REVERB [Page 4]
Reference Page
Connecting a Microphone or
Guitar (page 209)
Reference Pages
Changing the rhythm reverb
(page 57)
Keyboard Percussion
(page 65)
4
Voice Controls and Effects
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
47
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Sustain
The sustain effect, selectable for the Upper, Lower and Pedal Voices, causes Voices to
gradually fade out when the keys are released. The sustain on/off and sustain length
settings are independent for each keyboard, providing maximum expressive control.
The Knee Lever can also be used to switch the sustain on/off. Sustain cannot be applied
to the Lead Voices.
To add sustain to the Voices and call up the Sustain
Length page:
Press one of the SUSTAIN buttons, located to the left of the panel,
to set the sustain. The Sustain Length display appears.
The lamp of the button lights up to indicate that sustain is on. Press
the button again to turn sustain off and the lamp turns off. When
the lamp is off, sustain does not affect the corresponding keyboard.
Remember to check whether the sustain button lamps are on or off
before you start to play.
The display shows the current sustain length values for each keyboard. The values here
must be set high enough for the sustain effect to be noticeable.
Range: 0 – 12
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Brilliance
Adjustment of the Voice tone, brighter or mellower.
Press the BRILLIANCE buttons of each Voice section on the panel to set the desired
brilliance for each Voice.
The buttons have seven brilliance settings.
Reference Page
Knee Lever (page 183)
SUSTAIN
UPPER
(KNEE)
LOWER
(KNEE)
PEDAL
SUSTAIN LENGTH Display
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1
BRILLIANCE
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
STRINGS BRASS TUTTI PAD SYNTH
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO ORGAN GUITAR CHOIR WORLD
PERCUS-
SION
1
2
4
Voice Controls and Effects
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
48
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Rotary Speaker
Rotary Speaker recreates the rich, swirling sound of the popular rotating speaker effect.
The Rotary Speaker effect can be switched in real time as you play, with either the front
panel button or the Left Footswitch (when properly set for Footswitch operation). The
Rotary Speaker effect CANNOT be turned on only by turning on the [ROTARY SP
SPEED] button. The following procedure is needed to use the Rotary Speaker effect.
Select the Rotary Speaker effect from the desired Voice.
When you want to set Rotary Speaker to one of the Voice section, you can select the
effect category of Rotary Speaker in the Voice Condition Display Page 3 or 4.
See page 42 for details.
When you want to set Rotary Speaker for the Organ Flute Voice, select the effect
type in the ATTACK/VOLUME Page. See page 37 for details.
Adjust the rotating speed and mode of the Rotary Speaker.
Press the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button on the panel.
The ROTARY SPEAKER display appears. The settings in this display are
common to all Voice sections.
1
Select “Rotary Speaker” here.
Select an effect type other than [OFF].
2
4
Voice Controls and Effects
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
49
1 SPEED
Determines the speed of the speaker rotation.
Range: 2.69Hz – 39.7Hz
2 MODE
Determines the slow/stop mode when [ROTARY SP SPEED] button is off. If [SLOW]
is selected, a slow chorus effect is applied when you turn off the button on the panel.
If [STOP] is selected, the Rotary Speaker effect turns off when you turn off the button
on the panel.
Once the Rotary Speaker effect has been turned on and set, you can control the effect
in real time from the panel or from the Left Footswitch.
Control the Rotary Speaker effect from the panel or from the Left
Footswitch.
You can control Rotary Speaker on/off not only from the panel but also the Left
Footswitch, if the Footswitch has been properly assigned. See page 183 for
details.
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
21
ROTARY SPEAKER Display
3
4
Voice Controls and Effects
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
50
3
Effect List
REVERB
1
HALL 1
HALL 2
HALL 3
HALL M
HALL L
ROOM 1
ROOM 2
ROOM 3
ROOM 4
ROOM S
ROOM M
ROOM L
STAGE 1
STAGE 2
PLATE 1
PLATE 2
WHITE ROOM
TUNNEL
CANYON
BASEMENT
2
XG HALL 1
XG HALL 2
XG ROOM 1
XG ROOM 2
XG ROOM 3
XG STAGE 1
XG STAGE 2
XG PLATE
GM PLATE
DELAY
DELAY LCR
XG DLY LCR
DELAY LR
ECHO
CROSS DELAY
TEMPO DELAY
TEMPO ECHO
TEMPO CROSS
ER/KARAOKE
ER 1
ER 2
GATE REVERB
REVERS GATE
KARAOKE 1
KARAOKE 2
KARAOKE 3
CHORUS
CHORUS 1
CHORUS 2
XG CHORUS 1
XG CHORUS 2
XG CHORUS 3
XG CHORUS 4
GM CHORUS 1
GM CHORUS 2
GM CHORUS 3
GM CHORUS 4
FB CHORUS
CELESTE 1
CELESTE 2
CELESTE 3
CELESTE 4
SYMPHONIC
XG SYMPHONIC
ENS DETUNE
FLANGER
FLANGER 1
FLANGER 2
XG FLANGER 1
XG FLANGER 2
XG FLANGER 3
GM FLANGER
V_FLANGER
TEMP FLANGER
DYNA FLANGER
PHASER
PHASER 1
PHASER 2
EP PHASER 1
EP PHASER 2
EP PHASER 3
TEMPO PHASER
DYNA PHASER
TREMOLO/AUTO PAN
TREMOLO 1
TREMOLO 2
XG TREMOLO
EP TREMOLO
GT TREMOLO 1
GT TREMOLO 2
ORGAN TREMOLO
AUTO PAN
XG AT PAN 1
XG AT PAN 2
EP AUTO PAN
ROTARY SPEAKER
XG ROTARY SP
ROTARY SP 1
ROTARY SP 2
ROTARY SP 3
ROTARY SP 4
ROTARY SP 5
2WAY ROT SP
DUAL ROTSP 1
DUAL ROTSP 2
DIST+ROT SP
ODRV+ROT SP
AMP+ROT SP
DIST+2ROT SP
ODRV+2ROT SP
AMP+2ROT SP
DISTORTION
DIST HARD 1
DIST HARD 2
DIST SOFT 1
DIST SOFT 2
ST DIST HARD
ST DIST SOFT
OVERDRIVE
ST OVERDRIVE
XG DIST
XG ST DIST
V_DIST HARD
V_DIST SOFT
COMP+DIST
XG CMP+DIST
AMP SIM
XG AMP SIM
ST AMP SIM 1
ST AMP SIM 2
XG ST AMP
DISTORTION+
DIST+DELAY
ODRV+DELAY
XG DIST+DLY
XG ODRV+DLY
CMP+DIST+DLY
CMP+ODRV+DLY
XG CMP+DT+DL
XG CMP+OD+DL
V_DIST H+DLY
V_DIST S+DLY
DIST+T DLY
ODRV+T DLY
CMP+DST+TDLY
CMP+OD+TDLY
V_DST H+TDLY
V_DST S+TDLY
WAH
AUTO WAH
XG AUTO WAH
TOUCH WAH 1
TOUCH WAH 2
AT WAH+DIST
XG AT WH+DST
AT WAH+ODRV
XG AT WAH+OD
TC WAH+DIST
XG TC WH+DST
TC WAH+ODRV
XG TC WAH+OD
CLAVI TC WAH
EP TOUCH WAH
WAH+DST+TDLY
WAH+OD+T DLY
WAH+DIST+DLY
XG WH+DST+DL
WAH+ODRV+DLY
XG WH+OD+DLY
DYNAMIC
M BAND COMP
COMPRESSOR
NOISE GATE
EQ/ENHANCER
ST 2BAND EQ
ST 3BAND EQ
XG 3BAND EQ
EQ DISCO
EQ TEL
HM ENHANCER
XG HM ENHNCE
PITCH CHANGE
PITCH CHANGE
XG PCH CHG 1
XG PCH CHG 2
MISCELLANEOUS
AMBIENCE
IMPULSE EXP
RESONATOR
VOICE CANCEL
TALKING MOD
LO-FI
DYNA FILTER
DYNA RINGMOD
RING MOD
ISOLATOR
THRU
THRU
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
51
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
This Electone features 274 different real rhythms featuring actual
drum and percussion sampled sounds. Automatic Accompaniment
functions are used with the rhythms, providing appropriate and
completely automatic accompaniment to match the style of the
selected rhythm. Moreover, the Electone has a Keyboard
Percussion feature that allows you to play drum and percussion
sounds from the Upper, Lower keyboard and Pedalboard.
A total of 274 rhythms can be instantly selected with the ten rhythm buttons on the
front panel.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Selecting a rhythm
In the explanation below, 16Beat 1 in the POPS category is selected as an example.
Press one of the Rhythm buttons in the RHYTHM section on the
front panel (for example, the [POPS] button).
The relevant Rhythm Menu is displayed.
KEYBOARD
PERCUSSION
MARCH
LATIN
WORLD
MUSIC
BALLAD ROCK
DANCE
WALT Z POPS R & B
SWING&
JAZZ
2
1
1
1
2
123
123 ABCD
RHYTHM
VOLUME
SEQ.
2
SEQ.
3
SEQ.
4
SEQ.
MAX
MIN
TEMPO
INTRO
ENDING
MAIN / FILL IN
BAR / BEAT
RHYTHM
CONTROL
START
BREAK
SYNCHRO
START
TEMPO
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Contents
1 Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm buttons . . .51
• Selecting a rhythm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
• Operating the rhythm from the panel . . . . . . . . . .53
• Changing the rhythm volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
• Adjusting the tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
• Changing the rhythm reverb. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
2 Selecting rhythms from the User buttons. . . . . .58
3Rhythm List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
4 Accompaniment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
5Automatic Accompaniment – Auto Bass Chord
(A.B.C.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
6 Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
7 Keyboard Percussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
• Using the Preset Keyboard Percussion . . . . . . . . 65
• Preset Keyboard Percussion List . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
• Assigning sounds to the User Keyboard Percussion
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
• Copying the Keyboard Percussion settings
. . . . . . 72
• Detailed settings for each percussion instrument
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
• Kit Assign List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
1
Selecting rhythms with the Rhythm buttons
1
MARCH
LATIN
WORLD
MUSIC
BALLAD ROCK
DANCE
WALT Z POPS R & B
SWING&
JAZZ
2
1
1
RHYTHM
VOLUME
SEQ.
2
SEQ.
3
SEQ.
4
SEQ.
MAX
MIN
Rhythm buttons
5
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
52
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Select the desired rhythm name from the Rhythm menu.
The Rhythm menu contains many Pops rhythms, more than can fit on the
display page. To change the display pages, press the appropriate number buttons
in the display.
The color of the selected rhythm name changes to orange, indicating that it has
been selected.
Rhythm Structure
Each rhythm is made up of “sections.” Since each section is a rhythmic variation of
the basic rhythm, you can use them to add “spice” to your performance and mix up
the beats while you are playing. You can freely change the section while the rhythm
is played back.
INTRO
This is used for the beginning of the song. There are three Intro sections that can be
selected with INTRO [1] – [3] buttons. When the Intro finishes playing, the
rhythm automatically shifts to the Main section.
MAIN
This is used for playing the main part of the song. There are four Main sections that
can be selected with MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons. The rhythm pattern of
several measures repeats indefinitely.
2
123
INTRO
Selected Intro section’s lamp is lit
ABCD
MAIN / FILL IN
Selected Main section’s lamp is lit
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
53
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Operating the rhythm from the panel
You can turn the rhythm on/off and switch the sections as desired by pressing the
buttons on the panel. Using the Fill Ins and Break patterns let you add dynamic
interest and “spice” to your performance.
To start/stop the rhythm:
START
The rhythm begins as soon as the [START] button is pressed.
To stop the rhythm, press the button again.
SYNCHRO START
The [SYNCHRO START] button puts the rhythm in “standby.”
The rhythm starts when you press a note on the Lower keyboard or
Pedalboard.
When you start the rhythm with the [SYNCHRO START] button,
pressing this button again stops the rhythm.
FILL IN
This is designed for use as a temporary and regular rhythmic pattern to spice up a
repeating rhythm. There are four Fill In sections that can be played by pressing the
selected (lit) MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons as desired. When one measure
pattern of Fill In finishes playing, the rhythm is automatically shifts to the Main
section.
BREAK
This lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm pattern. The Break
section is selected by pressing the [BREAK] button. When the one-measure Break
pattern finishes playing, the rhythm automatically shifts to the Main section.
ENDING
This is used for the ending of the song. There are three Ending sections that can be
selected with the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons. When the ending is finished, the
rhythm automatically stops.
ABCD
MAIN / FILL IN
Selected Fill In section’s lamp flashes
BREAK
START
SYNCHRO
START
The lamp is lit when the Break section is selected
123
ENDING
Selected Ending section’s lamp is lit
START
SYNCHRO
START
START
SYNCHRO
START
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
54
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
INTRO
Pressing one of the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons automatically adds a
short introduction before starting the actual (Main) rhythm.
First press one of the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons, then press the
[START] or [SYNCHRO START] button to actually start the
rhythm.
While the introduction is playing, the BAR/BEAT display
shows the countdown to the first measure of the pattern.
For example, if there is a four-measure lead-in for a pattern
in 4/4 time, the display at right appears:
ENDING
Pressing one of the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons automatically
adds an ending phrase before stopping the rhythm.
When you press the Ending button while rhythm is playing
back, the rhythm will automatically stop after the ending
phrase is played. You can have the ending gradually slow down
(ritardando) by pressing the ENDING button once again,
while the ending is playing.
To switch the rhythm sections:
You can change the rhythm section of the Main phrase by pressing the desired MAIN/
FILL IN [A] – [D] button. The selected section’s lamp (above the button) is lit.
To use the Fill In patterns:
As you play the Electone along with the rhythm, occasionally press the selected MAIN/
FILL button as desired. The Fill In pattern (one measure) will be played and the
selected Fill In section’s lamp (above the button) flashes.
When you use the Auto Fill In function, Fill Ins will be played automatically. The Auto
Fill In function is set in the Rhythm Condition display.
Pressing the selected Rhythm button on the panel again (or pressing the rhythm name
of the selected rhythm in the display) calls up the Rhythm Condition Display.
When Auto Fill is set to ON in the left side of the display, the Fill In pattern is
automatically played whenever you switch the Main sections.
123
INTRO
BAR / BEAT
TEMPO
NOTE
When an Intro or Ending
pattern is playing, the Lower
Keyboard cannot be played.
123
ENDING
NOTE
Pressing the ENDING [1]
button during playback of
the Main section will first call
up the fill in pattern, then the
Ending 1 pattern.
ABCD
MAIN / FILL IN
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
55
To use the Break patterns:
As you play the Electone along with the rhythm, occasionally press the [BREAK]
button.
Moreover, you can start/stop the rhythm and switch the sections by using the
Footswitch. See page 181 for details.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Changing the rhythm volume
There are two ways to set the rhythm volume: using the VOLUME buttons on the
panel and using the volume slider in the display. The volume buttons let you make
coarse adjustments to the volume while the slider gives you fine control.
Using VOLUME buttons on the panel (coarse):
Press one of the VOLUME buttons of the rhythm on the panel to set the desired level.
The buttons have seven volume settings, from a minimum of 0, or no sound, to a
maximum of full volume.
Using VOLUME slider in the display (fine):
Pressing the same rhythm button on the panel again (or pressing the rhythm name of
the selected rhythm in the display) calls up the Rhythm Condition Display.
To set the volume, touch the PERCUSSION VOLUME slider in the display or use the
Data Control Dial. The control range is from 0 (no sound) to 24 (full volume).
BREAK
START
SYNCHRO
START
MARCH
LATIN
WORLD
MUSIC
BALLAD ROCK
DANCE
WALT Z POPS R & B
SWING&
JAZZ
2
1
1
RHYTHM
VOLUME
SEQ.
2
SEQ.
3
SEQ.
4
SEQ.
MAX
MIN
DATA CONTROL
NOTE
Depending on the volume
value (set by the slider), two
adjacent VOLUME button
lamps may be lit at the same
time, indicating an
intermediate position.
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
56
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Adjusting the tempo
Turn the TEMPO dial clockwise to increase the tempo, and counter-clockwise to
decrease it.
TEMPO display shows the current tempo. Displayed values are given in beats per
minute.
The tempo range is 40 to 240 beats per minute.
When the rhythm begins playing, the TEMPO indicator changes function to a BAR/
BEAT indicator.
On the BAR/BEAT indicator, the number on the left indicates the current bar or
measure and the one on the right indicates the number of the beat in each bar.
You can also see the Tempo and Bar/Beat indications in the Voice Display. In the Voice
Display, both Tempo and Bar/Beat can be seen in one display.
BAR / BEAT
TEMPO
TEMPO
Increasing
the tempo
Decreasing
the tempo
TEMPO Indicator
BAR / BEAT
TEMPO
Bar (measure)
Beat
BAR/BEAT Indicator
Reference Page
Voice Display (page 17)
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
57
Each rhythm has its original (preset) tempo. Press [PRESET TEMPO] button in the
display to restore the tempo to the original setting.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Changing the rhythm reverb
You can adjust the amount of reverb applied to the rhythms and the percussion sounds
used in the rhythms in the Rhythm Condition display.
When the panel REVERB control is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no
effect.
Range: 0 – 24
Reference Page
Reverb (page 43)
DATA CONTROL
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
58
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
As with the Voice sections, the Rhythm section also has User buttons (numbered 1 or
2) from which rhythms can be selected. You can select original User rhythms that you
have created with the Rhythm Pattern Program function. This also allows you to assign
two or three rhythms from the same category to be selected from different buttons; one
from the original Rhythm button, and the others from the User buttons.
Press one of the User buttons at the right of the Rhythm buttons.
The Rhythm Menu appears in the display.
Select the desired rhythm category with the category buttons in
the display.
You can also choose the “User” category to select a User rhythm you have
created.
The currently selected rhythm category appears at the top left of the display.
The rhythm name shown below the category name is that of the currently
assigned rhythm and is irrelevant to the rhythm category.
Select a rhythm from the displayed Rhythm Menu.
Pressing the number buttons in the display calls up the other rhythms in the
category.
2
Selecting rhythms from the User buttons
1
MARCH
LATIN
WORLD
MUSIC
BALLAD ROCK
DANCE
WALT Z POPS R & B
SWING&
JAZZ
2
1
1
RHYTHM
VOLUME
SEQ.
2
SEQ.
3
SEQ.
4
SEQ.
MAX
MIN
User buttons
Reference Page
Rhythm Pattern Program
(page 140)
2
Currently selected
rhythm category
Currently selected
rhythm name
3
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
59
3
Rhythm List
MARCH
1
Marching Band 1
Marching Band 2
Marching Band 3
Alpine March
6/8 March 1
6/8 March 2
6/8 Kids
6/8 Organ March
Broadway
SF March
Wild West
Baroque
WALTZ
1
Vienna Waltz
Orchestra Waltz
Simple Waltz
Gentle Waltz
Guitar Serenade
Snow Waltz
Classic Waltz
Mariachi
Alpine Waltz
Musette
2
Jazz Waltz 1
Jazz Waltz 2
Jazz Waltz 3
Jazz Waltz 4
Modern Waltz
Pop Waltz
Country Waltz
SWING&JAZZ
1
Big Band 1
Big Band 2
Big Band 3
Big Band 4
Big Band 5
Big Band 6
Big Band 7
Big Band Bop
Orch. Big Band
Orchestra Swing
Movie Panther
Jungle Drum
2
Jazz Club
Simple Swing
Acoustic Jazz
Medium Jazz
2
Fast Jazz
Combo Swing
Cool Combo
Light Swing
Afro Cuban 1
Afro Cuban 2
Bebop
Five-Four
3
Jazz Ballad 1
Jazz Ballad 2
Movie Swing
Piano Trio
Midnight Swing
Slow Jazz
Moonlight 1
Moonlight 2
Winter Song 1
Winter Song 2
4
Foxtrot
Slowfox
Quickstep
Dixieland 1
Dixieland 2
Dixieland Jazz
Ragtime
Charleston
Guitar Swing
POPS
1
8Beat Light 1
8Beat Light 2
8Beat Light 3
8Beat Light 4
Folk Rock 1
Folk Rock 2
60’s 8Beat
Asian Pops
Unplugged 1
Unplugged 2
Unplugged 3
8Beat Adria
2
Bubblegum Pop
70’s 8Beat
Tijuana
SingerSongWriter
Surfin’ 8Beat
Finger Pickin’
Heart Beat
Guitar Pop
2 British 16Beat
3
16Beat 1
16Beat 2
16Beat 3
16Beat 4
Fusion Shuffle 1
Fusion Shuffle 2
Jazz Pop
16Beat Shuffle 1
16Beat Shuffle 2
4
Pop Shuffle
Eurovision Pop
British Pop
Sing Along
Simple Shuffle 1
Simple Shuffle 2
Simple Shuffle 3
R&B
1
Blues Rock
Motor City
Soul 1
Soul 2
16Beat Soul
Frankly Soul
Gospel Funk
Jazz Funk
Funk Beat 1
Funk Beat 2
Detroit Pop 1
Detroit Pop 2
2
New R&B
Modern R&B
New Gospel
Cool Blues
Gospel Shuffle
Gospel Sisters
Amazing Gospel
6/8 Blues
Slow Blues
6/8 Soul
Blues Shuffle
LATIN
1
Samba
Big Band Samba
Light Samba 1
Light Samba 2
Pop Samba 1
Pop Samba 2
1
Bossa Nova 1
Bossa Nova 2
Bossa Nova 3
Pop Bossa
2
Mambo 1
Mambo 2
Salsa 1
Salsa 2
Montuno
Calypso
Cha Cha Cha
Big Band Cha Cha
Pop Cha Cha
3
Rumba
Pop Rumba
Fast Rumba
Guitar Rumba
Beguine 1
Beguine 2
Cuban Bolero
Tango 1
Tango 2
Tango Orchestra
Tango Milonga
WORLD MUSIC
1
Bolero
Flamenco
Pop Flamenco
Pasodoble
Polka 1
Polka 2
Banda Polka
Irish Dance
Tarantella
Sirtaki
Enka
2
Reggae
Happy Reggae
Sheriff Reggae
Shuffle Reggae
Bluegrass 1
Bluegrass 2
Hoedown
Country 2/4
Country Shuffle
Country Band
Hawaiian
Mexican Dance
This list shows all available rhythms on the Electone. Numbers written at the left side of each column in this list
indicate the numbered buttons displayed in the Rhythm Menu.
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
60
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
•
BALLAD
1
Power Ballad
Dramatic Ballad
Movie Ballad 1
Movie Ballad 2
Secret Service
Carpenters Pop
Romantic Ballad
Love Song
16Beat Ballad 1
16Beat Ballad 2
16Beat Ballad 3
Easy Ballad
2
Guitar Ballad 1
Guitar Ballad 2
Guitar Ballad 3
Organ Ballad
Chart Ballad
Analog Ballad
Pop Ballad
8Beat Modern
Chillout
Slow&Easy
3
6/8 Slow Rock 1
6/8 Slow Rock 2
6/8 Orchestra 1
6/8 Orchestra 2
6/8 Ballad
Acoustic Ballad
ROCK
1
Power Rock
Southern Rock
60’s Rock 1
60’s Rock 2
Hard Rock 1
Hard Rock 2
Rock Shuffle 1
Rock Shuffle 2
Tears Rock 1
Tears Rock 2
Soft Rock
British Rock
2
Country Rock 1
Country Rock 2
New Country
Cowboy Rock
Rock&Roll 1
Rock&Roll 2
Skiffle
Caribbean Rock
R&R Shuffle
Jive
Boogie Woogie
DANCE
1
Ibiza 1
Ibiza 2
Euro Trance
Disco Teens
Techno Party
Club Dance
Dream Dance
Club House
UK Pop
US Disco
Swing House
2
US Pop
US Hip Hop
Classic Hip Hop
Trip Hop
Chart Pop
Ground Beat
Hip Hop Groove
Hip Hop Pop
Hip Hop Light
Euro Hip Hop
3
Latin DJ’s
Club Latin
Latin Disco 1
Latin Disco 2
Garage
6/8 Trance
80’s Dance
Pop Beat 1
Pop Beat 2
Funky Dance
4
Disco Philly 1
Disco Philly 2
70’s Disco 1
70’s Disco 2
Disco Funk
Disco Chocolate
Dance Pop
Table 1:
Certain rhythms created for use with slow, soft
Songs or for Songs that do not use a bass part at the
beginning, may not have drum sections. To use
these rhythms, refer to the following information.
Some sections of the following nine rhythms are
configured with accompaniment only; they do not
contain any drum or percussion.
Some sections of the following five rhythms do not
contain an Auto Bass part. This means that even
though the Auto Bass Chord is turned on, the bass
part will not sound.
•Guitar Serenade in the WALTZ category
•Folk Rock 1 in the POPS category
•Unplugged 1 in the POPS category
•Pop Flamenco in WORLD MUSIC category
•New Country in the ROCK category
Category Rhythm Section
MARCH
6/8 Organ March Main A, Main B
Baroque All sections except Intro 1
WALTZ
Simple Waltz Ending 1
Guitar Serenade All sections except Intro 1
WORLD
MUSIC
Banda Polka Main A, Fill In A
Hoedown Ending 1
Mexican Dance Main A, Fill In A
BALLAD Dramatic Ballad Main A
ROCK R&R Shuffle Ending 1
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
61
The Accompaniment function provides arpeggiated chords and other instrumental
embellishments when rhythms are used.
Accompaniment controls are selected from the Rhythm Menu and Rhythm Condition
display.
Press any one of the RHYTHM buttons once.
At the bottom of the display, there are seven part buttons, such as Chord 1,
Chord 2, Pad, and so on. These parts, with the exception of Main Drum and
Add Drum, are Accompaniment parts.
Turn the desired parts on.
The Accompaniment consists of five parts, Chord 1, Chord 2, Pad, Phrase 1,
and Phrase 2, and each of them can be set to on or off by pressing corresponding
button in the display.
If you turn all the parts off, the Accompaniment does not sound.
CHORD 1/CHORD 2:
These are the rhythmic chord backing parts.
PAD:
This part features sustained chords and commonly uses lush sounds such as
strings and organ.
PHRASE 1/PHRASE 2:
These parts are used for various embellishments and riffs that enhance the song,
such as brass section accents and chord arpeggios.
Not all parts contain accompaniment data. Some parts may be empty depending
on the selected rhythm and rhythm section.
4
Accompaniment
Main Drum and Add Drum contains the drum and percussion rhythm patterns.
When you turn both Main Drum and Add Drum off, the drum and percussion do
not sound. Generally, Main Drum contains the main part of the rhythm and Add
drum has additional percussion sounds, such as tambourine.
1
Accompaniment parts
2
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
62
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Adjust the volume and amount of reverb applied to the
Accompaniment.
Pressing the same rhythm button on the panel again calls up the Rhythm
Condition display.
The two sliders at the right side of the display can control the Accompaniment
volume and reverb. Touch the slider in the display or use the Data Control dial
to adjust the volume/reverb.
The Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) function works with the Rhythm section of the
Electone to automatically produce bass accompaniment as you play. It adds an entirely
new dimension to your performance by effectively putting a full backing band at your
disposal. There are three modes used for producing Automatic Accompaniment
patterns.
Before using the A.B.C. function, turn Pedal Poly off. If Pedal Poly is set to on, the bass
pattern of the A.B.C. will not sound.
To set the A.B.C. function:
Press the [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button.
The A.B.C./M.O.C. display appears. The A.B.C. section is at the left half of this display.
5
Automatic Accompaniment
– Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.)
3
DATA CONTROL
Reference Page
POLY (page 40)
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
12
A.B.C./M.O.C. Display
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
63
1 A.B.C. MODE
OFF:
Cancels the Auto Bass Chord function.
SINGLE FINGER:
The Single Finger mode provides the fastest and easiest means to obtain many different
chord/bass combinations. You can produce major, minor, 7th, and minor 7th chords by
simply using one, or at most, two or three fingers to play the chords. The chord
produced will sound in the same octave regardless of where it is played on the Lower
keyboard.
Key of C
Major chords:
Press the root of the chord (the note that corresponds to the chord’s
name).
Minor chords:
Simultaneously press the root and any one black key to the left of it.
7th chords:
Simultaneously press the root and any one white key to the left of it.
Minor 7th chords:
Simultaneously press the root as well as any black key and any white
key to the left of it.
Playing single finger chords without the use of the rhythm lets you add full continuous
chords to your performance.
FINGERED CHORD:
The Fingered Chord mode automatically produces bass accompaniment for chords
played in the Lower keyboard. It allows you to use a wider range of chord types than in
the Single Finger mode. In the Fingered Chord mode, you play full chords while the
Auto Bass Chord function automatically selects the appropriate bass pattern. If you play
only one or two notes in the Lower keyboard, the appropriate chord will sound on the
basis of the previously played chord.
Key of C
Playing fingered chords without the use of the rhythm lets you add full continuous
chords to your performance.
CUSTOM A.B.C.:
The Custom A.B.C. mode is a slight variation on the Fingered Chord mode. It allows
you to determine what bass notes will be played in the accompaniment by playing a note
on the Pedalboard along with the chords you play in the Lower keyboard.
C
Cm
C7
Cm7
C Cm C7 Cm7 Cmaj7
CaugCm maj7 Cdim Cdim7 Csus4
Cm7-5C7sus4 C6 Cm6 Cadd9
NOTE
When playing certain chords
(aug, dim, dim7, sus4, 6,
and m6), make sure to play
the root of the chord as the
lowest note in that chord.
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
64
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
2 MEMORY
LOWER:
When this is set to on, the Lower keyboard Voices and chord accompaniment keep
playing even after you release your fingers from the Lower keyboard, while the rhythm
plays.
PEDAL:
When this is set to on, the Pedalboard Voices and bass accompaniment keep playing
even after you release your foot from the Pedalboard, while the rhythm plays.
(In the Single Finger and Fingered modes:) When this is set to on, the bass
accompaniment of the Pedalboard Voices keeps playing even after you release your
fingers from the Lower keyboard.
When you start the rhythm with [SYNCHRO START] button, set the Lower/Pedal
Memory to on. When Memory is off, releasing your fingers from Lower keyboard stops
the rhythm.
The Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) feature automatically adds a harmony part to the
melodies you play on the Upper keyboard. The harmony is derived from the chords
you play on the Lower keyboard – or from the chords that are played for you, if you use
Automatic Accompaniment. Melody On Chord has three different modes, each
providing a different set of harmonics to accompany the melody played. Melody On
Chord can also be controlled with the Knee Lever.
To set the M.O.C. function:
Press the [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button.
The A.B.C./M.O.C. display appears. The M.O.C. section is at the right half of this
display.
1 M.O.C. MODE
OFF:
Cancels the Melody On Chord function.
Mode 1:
Produces harmonies of up to two notes in a range close to the melody played.
6
Melody On Chord (M.O.C.)
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
12
A.B.C./M.O.C. Display
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
65
Mode 2:
Produces harmonies of up to three notes in a range close to the melody played.
Mode 3:
Produces harmonies of up to four notes in a range relatively distant from the melody
played.
2
KNEE
On/off switch for Knee Lever control over Melody On Chord operation. To use the
Melody On Chord function with Knee Lever control, first switch the Knee setting to
ON, then select one of the three modes (described above). When the control is on,
pressing the Knee Lever to the right activates the Melody On Chord function.
Melody On Chord can be heard only when the Upper Keyboard Voice section’s volume
is set to the appropriate value. Melody On Chord does not apply to the Lead Voices.
The Keyboard Percussion function features many types of drum and percussion
sounds, playable from the keyboards and Pedalboard.
Keyboard Percussion has two different modes, Preset and User. Preset Keyboard
Percussion lets you play the preset drum kit sounds from the keyboards (assigned
beforehand to the keys), while the User Keyboard Percussion lets you freely assign the
drum sounds to any key or pedal you wish.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Using the Preset Keyboard Percussion
Turn off the Upper, Lower and/or Pedal Voices by setting each
Voice’s volume to MIN.
Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the
KEYBOARD PERCUSSION [1] or [2] button.
The Keyboard Percussion (K.B.P.) Display appears.
Pressing the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION [1] button calls up the Preset 1 kit on
the Upper/Lower keyboards, and pressing [2] button calls up the Preset 2 kit on
the Pedalboard.
Reference Page
Controlling Melody On Chord
(with Knee Lever); (page
184)
7
Keyboard Percussion
1
2
NOTE
In the Voice Display, each
Voice section can be muted
(page 18).
KEYBOARD
PERCUSSION
12
NOTE
Two Keyboard Percussion
sets, [1] and [2], can be
played at the same time by
setting both buttons to on.
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
66
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Select the desired percussion kit.
As a default, EL Kit is assigned to the keyboards but you can change the kit from
a total of 16 different kits. Pressing the Kit button on the display calls up the
Percussion Kit List. Choose the desired Kit within the list, then press the
[CLOSE] button at the top right of the display to close the list.
For details of percussion assignments for each kit, see the Preset Keyboard
Percussion List on page 67.
Adjust the volume and amount of reverb applied to the Keyboard
Percussion.
Two sliders in the K.B.P. display determine the reverb and volume settings.
The settings here determine the reverb/volume for the entire Keyboard
Percussion setup, not for each percussion instrument. You can, however, adjust
each percussion instrument’s reverb/volume (page 74).
Play some notes on the keyboards and/or Pedalboard.
3
The message “Are you sure you want to clear all assignments and setup data?” may
appear when you change the kit. Select [CLEAR] to clear all assignments (made in
the ASSIGN Page) and detailed settings (made in the SETUP Page) and call up the
selected kit on the panel. Select [CANCEL] to call up the selected kit without
erasing the assignments and detailed settings.
4
DATA CONTROL
5
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
67
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Preset Keyboard Percussion List
: Indicates the keys of the ELS-01/01C keyboard.
*The 10 kits, Standard Kit 2 – Symphony Kit, have the same sound assignments as Standard Kit 1.
EL Kit Standard Kit 1*
Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK)
Bass Drum Heavy - Kick -
SD Brush Roll - Side Stick Surdo Mute
Snare Drum Heavy - Snare Surdo Open
SD Brush Shot 1 Claves Hand Clap Hi Q
SD Reverb 1 - Snare Tight Whip Slap
Snare Drum Light - Floor Tom L Scratch H
Tom 3 Synth Tom 3 Hi-Hat Closed Scratch L
Snare Drum Rim 1 Concert BD Floor Tom H Finger Snap
Tom 2 Synth Tom 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Click Noise
Hi-Hat Close Bass Drum Heavy Low Tom Metronome Click
Tom 1 Synth Tom 1 Hi-Hat Open Metronome Bell
Hi-Hat Open Bass Drum Light Mid Tom L Seq Click L
Ride Cymbal 1 Snare Drum Heavy - Mid Tom H Seq Click H -
Synth Tom 3 SD Brush Roll - Crash Cymbal 1 Brush Tap -
Crash Cymbal 1 Snare Drum Heavy - High Tom Brush Swirl -
Synth Tom 2 SD Brush Shot 1 - Ride Cymbal 1 Brush Slap -
Orchestra Cymbal SD Reverb 1 - Chinese Cymbal Brush Tap Swirl -
- Snare Drum Light - Ride Cymbal Cup Snare Roll -
Synth Tom 1 Tom 3 - Ta mbourine Castanet -
- Snare Drum Rim 1 - Splash Cymbal Snare Soft -
Tom 2 - Sticks -
Hi-Hat Close - Kick Soft -
Tom 1 - Open Rim Shot -
Hi-Hat Open - Kick Tight -
Ride Cymbal 1 - Kick Bongo H
Orch Snare Drum - Side Stick Bongo L
Crash Cymbal 1 - Snare Conga H Mute
Snare Drum Roll - Hand Clap Conga H Open
Orchestra Cymbal - Snare Tight Conga L
Orch Cymbal Roll - Floor Tom L Timbale H
Tr iangle Mute - Hi-Hat Closed Timbale L
Tambourine - Floor Tom H Agogo H
Tr iangle Open - Hi-Hat Pedal Agogo L
Castanet - Low Tom Cabasa
Cowbell 1 - Hi-Hat Open Maracas
Timbale 1 Low - Mid Tom L Samba Whistle H
Timbale 1 High - Mid Tom H Samba Whistle L
Wood Block Low - Crash Cymbal 1 Guiro Short
Conga Low - High Tom Guiro Long
Wood Block High - Ride Cymbal 1 Claves
Conga High - Chinese Cymbal Wood Block H
Bongo Low - Ride Cymbal Cup Wood Block L
Agogo Low - Ta mbourine Cuica Mute
Bongo High - Splash Cymbal Cuica Open
Agogo High - Cowbell Tr iangle Mute
Cuica Low - Crash Cymbal 2 Tr iangle Open
Hand Claps - Vibraslap Shaker
Cuica High - Ride Cymbal 2 Jingle Bells
Shaker - - Bell Tree
- -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
C
1
D
1
F
1
G
1
A
1
C
2
D
2
F
2
G
2
A
2
C
3
D
3
F
3
G
3
A
3
C
4
D
4
F
4
G
4
A
4
C
5
D
5
F
5
G
5
A
5
C5
D5
E5
F5
G5
A5
B5
C6
C4
D4
E4
F4
G4
A4
B4
C3
D3
E3
F3
G3
A3
B3
C2
D2
E2
F2
G2
A2
B2
C1
D1
E1
F1
G1
A1
B1
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
68
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2
Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK)
Cutting Noise 1 - Phone Call -
Cutting Noise 2 - Door Squeak -
- - Door Slam -
String Slap - Scratch Cut -
- - Scratch H 3 -
- - Wind Chime -
- - Telephone Ring -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
Flute Key Click - - CarEngnIgnition - -
- - - Car Tires Squeal - -
- - - Car Passing - -
- - - Car Crash - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
Cutting Noise 1 - Phone Call Burst
Cutting Noise 2 - Door Squeak Roller Coaster
- - Door Slam Submarine
String Slap - Scratch Cut -
- - Scratch H 3 -
- - Wind Chime -
- - Telephone Ring -
- - - -
- Shower - Laugh
- Thunder - Scream
- Wind - Punch
- Stream - Heart Beat
- Bubble - Foot Steps
- Feed - -
- - - -
- - - -
Flute Key Click - CarEngnIgnition -
- - Car Tires Squeal -
- - Car Passing -
- - Car Crash -
- - Siren -
- - Tr ain -
- - Jet Plane -
- - Starship -
- Dog - Machine Gun
Horse Laser Gun
Bird Tweet Explosion
- Firework
- -
- -
Ghost -
Maou -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
C
1
D
1
F
1
G
1
A
1
C
2
D
2
F
2
G
2
A
2
C
3
D
3
F
3
G
3
A
3
C
4
D
4
F
4
G
4
A
4
C
5
D
5
F
5
G
5
A
5
C5
D5
E5
F5
G5
A5
B5
C6
C4
D4
E4
F4
G4
A4
B4
C3
D3
E3
F3
G3
A3
B3
C2
D2
E2
F2
G2
A2
B2
C1
D1
E1
F1
G1
A1
B1
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
69
Arabic Kit Pop Latin Kit
Preset 2(PK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK) Preset 2 (PK) Preset 1 (LK) Preset 1 (UK)
Kick Soft - Bongo H Open 1 f -
Side Stick - Bongo H Open 3 f -
Snare Soft - Bongo H Rim -
Arabic Hand Clap - Bongo H Tip -
Snare Drum - Bongo H Heel -
Floor Tom L - Bongo H Slap -
Hi-Hat Closed - Bongo L Open 1 f Hand Clap
Floor Tom H - Bongo L Open 3 f -
Hi-Hat Pedal - Bongo L Rim -
Low Tom - Bongo L Tip -
Hi-Hat Open - Bongo L Heel Conga H Tip
Mid Tom L - Bongo L Slap Conga H Heel
Mid Tom H Nakarazan Dom - Timbale L Open Conga H Open -
Crash Cymbal 1 Cabasa - - Conga H Mute -
High Tom Nakarazan Edge - - Conga H SlapOpen -
Ride Cymbal 1 Hager Dom - - Conga H Slap -
Crash Cymbal 2 Hager Edge - - Conga H SlapMute -
Duhulla Dom Bongo H - Paila L Conga L Tip -
Tambourine Bongo L - Timbale H Open Conga L Heel -
Duhulla Tak Conga H Mute - - Conga L Open -
Conga H Open - Conga L Mute -
Conga L - Conga L SlapOpen -
Zagrouda H - Conga L Slap -
Zagrouda L - Conga L Slide -
Kick Soft Katem Dom Bongo H Open 1 f Cowbell Top
Side Stick Katem Tak Bongo H Open 3 f -
Snare Soft Katem Sak Bongo H Rim -
Arabic Hand Clap Katem Tak Bongo H Tip -
Snare Drum Doff Tak Bongo H Heel Guiro Short
Floor Tom L Ta bla Dom Bongo H Slap Guiro Long
Hi-Hat Closed Ta bla Tak 1 Bongo L Open 1 f -
Floor Tom H Ta bla Tik Bongo L Open 3 f -
Hi-Hat Pedal Ta bla Tak 2 Bongo L Rim Tambourine
Low Tom Ta bla Sak Bongo L Tip -
Hi-Hat Open Tabla Roll Edge Bongo L Heel -
Mid Tom L Ta bla Flam Bongo L Slap -
Mid Tom H Sagat 1 Timbale L Open Maracas
Crash Cymbal 1 Tabel Dom - Shaker
High Tom Sagat 3 - Cabasa
Ride Cymbal 1 Tabel Tak - Cuica Mute
Crash Cymbal 2 Sagat 2 - Cuica Open
Duhulla Dom Rik Dom Paila L -
Tambourine Rik Tak 2 Timbale H Open -
Duhulla Tak Rik Finger 1 - -
Cowbell Rik Tak 1 - -
Duhulla Sak Rik Finger 2 - Tr iangle Mute
Claves Rik BrassTremolo - Tr iangle Open
Doff Dom Rik Sak Paila H -
- Rik Tik - Wind Chime
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
C
1
D
1
F
1
G
1
A
1
C
2
D
2
F
2
G
2
A
2
C
3
D
3
F
3
G
3
A
3
C
4
D
4
F
4
G
4
A
4
C
5
D
5
F
5
G
5
A
5
C5
D5
E5
F5
G5
A5
B5
C6
C4
D4
E4
F4
G4
A4
B4
C3
D3
E3
F3
G3
A3
B3
C2
D2
E2
F2
G2
A2
B2
C1
D1
E1
F1
G1
A1
B1
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
70
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Assigning sounds to the User Keyboard Percussion
You can assign any desired drum and percussion sound to any key or pedal, and your
original setups can be saved to eight memory locations: User 1 through User 8. The
User setting saved in User memory location can be called up by using the KEYBOARD
PERCUSSION [1] or [2] buttons.
In the instructions below, drum sounds are assigned to User 1 and called up with
KEYBOARD PERCUSSION [1] button.
Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the
KEYBOARD PERCUSSION [1] button.
The K.B.P. display appears.
Press [USER 1] on the display.
This procedure assigns User 1 to the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION [1] button.
You can call up the User 1 setting the next time you press the [1] button.
Select the desired percussion kit.
See page 66 for selecting the kit.
Press the [ASSIGN] button at the top right of the display to call
up the ASSIGN Page.
In the ASSIGN Page, you can assign specific drum sounds to any of the keys.
Select the desired drum instrument that you wish to assign to
a key.
Select the desired drum instrument category with the category buttons in the
display. The drum instrument menu of the selected category appears.
1
2
3
4
5
Reference Page
Kit Assign List (page 76)
Drum Instrument Category
Drum Instrument Menu
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
71
Assign an instrument to a particular key or pedal by
simultaneously holding down the desired instrument name in the
display and pressing the key (or pedal) to which the instrument is
to be assigned.
˙
When the assignment is complete, the key name and instrument name is
displayed at the top of the display. The assignments are saved to the User
memory selected in Step 2 (in this example, User 1).
Repeat the operation steps above as necessary to construct your
own User Keyboard Percussion set.
To erase one instrument:
Simultaneously hold down the [CLEAR] button in the display (ASSIGN Page) and
press the key (or pedal) corresponding to the instrument you wish to erase.
6
NOTE
Though eight User Keyboard
Percussion setups can be
created, they cannot be
memorized to Registration
Memory. Only on/off data and
the Keyboard Percussion
Menu are memorized to
Registration Memory.
The Keyboard Percussion setting you have created is automatically saved
when you switch to another display. While data is being saved, the square at
the top left of the display turns light blue for a few seconds. Do not turn the
power off while the Keyboard Percussion settings are being saved.
The key to which the instrument is to be assigned
Instrument Name
Press the key.
Hold down the Instrument name…
7
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
72
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
To erase all instruments:
You can clear all assignments using the [CLEAR] button in the display (ASSIGN Page).
Press, then release the [CLEAR] button. The following display
appears, prompting confirmation of the operation.
Press [CLEAR] in the display to erase all data. When [CLEAR] is
selected, a “Completed” message momentarily appears on the
display.
Press [CANCEL] in the display to abort the operation.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Copying the Keyboard Percussion settings
You can copy the Preset Keyboard Percussion to one of the User locations, or copy from
one User location to another. In the instructions below, Preset 1 is copied to User 1.
Press the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION [1] button to copy Preset 1.
To copy Preset 1, select the [1] button; to copy Preset 2, select the [2] button.
To copy either User location, select button [1] or [2].
Press the [MENU] button at the top right of the display to call up
the MENU Page.
1
2
1
2
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
73
Within the Menu buttons, select the User location as the
destination — for example, User 1.
Press the COPY [FROM] button in the display. A list appears,
letting you select the copy source location.
Select the copy source (Preset 1 here) from the list.
A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation.
Press the [COPY] button in the display to copy Preset 1. When
[COPY] is selected, a “Completed” message momentarily
appears in the display.
Press the [CANCEL] button in the display to abort the operation.
3
4
5
6
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
74
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Detailed settings for each percussion instrument
You can independently adjust the settings of pan, pitch, reverb and volume for each
instrument. The settings here are system settings that cannot be memorized to
Registration memory.
Turn off the volume of the relevant keyboard (the keyboard to
which the instrument to be changed is assigned).
Press the [SETUP] button at the top right of the K.B.P. display to
call up the SETUP Page.
Press the appropriate key (the key to which the instrument to be
changed is assigned).
The selected instrument’s name is shown on the display and you can change its
settings.
1 PAN
Determines the position of the currently selected instrument in the stereo image. Seven
pan positions are available.
2 PITCH COARSE
Adjusts the pitch of the currently selected instrument by 100 cents.
Range: -64 – +63
3 PITCH FINE
Adjusts the pitch of the currently selected instrument by one cent, allowing more
detailed tuning of the instrument than PITCH COARSE (
2).
Range: -64 – +63
4 REVERB
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the currently selected instrument.
Range: 0 – 24
5 VOLUME
Determines the volume of the currently selected instrument.
Range: 0 – 24
1
2
3
1
2345 6
The name of the
selected instrument
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
75
6 RESET
Initializes settings such as pan, pitch, and reverb to their default values.
Pressing the [EXECUTE] button calls up the following display, prompting
confirmation of the operation.
Press the [EXECUTE] button in the display to restore (initialize) the default settings.
When [EXECUTE] is selected, a “Complete” message momentarily appears on the
display.
Press the [CANCEL] button in the display to abort the operation.
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
76
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
EL Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Crash Cym Mute
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Orchestra Cymbal
Orch Cymbal Roll
Orch Cymbal Mute
Cymbal March
Cym Brush Shot
Tam- Tam
HI-HAT
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Close
Hi-Hat Pedal 1
Hi-Hat Pedal 2
Analog HH Open
Analog HH Close
SNARE DRUM
Snare Drum Light
Snare Drum Heavy
Snare Drum Rim 1
Snare Drum Rim 2
SD Accent 1
SD Accent 2
SD Reverb 1
SD Reverb 2
Synth Snare Drum
Orch Snare Drum
Snare Drum Roll
Analog SD
SNARE BRUSH
SD Brush Shot 1
SD Brush Shot 2
SD Brush Roll
TOM
Tom 1
Tom 2
Tom 3
Tom 4
Tom Brush Shot 1
Tom Brush Shot 2
Tom Brush Shot 3
Tom Brush Shot 4
Synth Tom 1
Synth Tom 2
Synth Tom 3
BASS DRUM
Bass Drum Light
Bass Drum Heavy
Bass Drum Attack
Synth Bass Drum
Bass Drum March
Concert BD
Analog BD Short
Analog BD Long
CONGA/BONGO
Conga High
Conga Low
Conga Slap
Conga Muff
Conga Slide
Bongo High
Bongo Low
Bongo Slap
Bongo Mute
CUICA/SURDO
Cuica High
Cuica Middle
Cuica Low
Tamborim Open
Tamborim Mute
Surdo Open
Surdo Mute
Surdo Rim
Surdo Muff
TIMBALES/COWBELL
Timbale 1 High
Timbale 1 Low
Timbale 2 High
Timbale 2 Low
Timbale 3 High
Timbale 3 Low
Timbale 4 High
Timbale 4 Low
Cowbell 1
Cowbell 2
Cowbell 3
Cowbell 4
PERCUSSION 1
Cabasa
Shaker
Maracas High
Maracas Low
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Woodblock High
Woodblock Mid
Woodblock Low
Claves
Castanet
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Agogo High
Agogo Low
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Windbell Down
Windbell Up
Tambourine
Pandeiro
Bells
Hand Claps
Finger Snap
Scratch
Noise Percussion
PERCUSSION 3
Kotsuzumi 1
Kotsuzumi 2
Kotsuzumi 3
Kotsuzumi 4
Ohtsuzumi 1
Ohtsuzumi 2
Taiko 1
Taiko 2
Ohdaiko 1
Ohdaiko 2
Kakegoe 1
Kakegoe 2
Kakegoe 3
Standard Kit 1
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare
Snare Tight
Snare Soft
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
BASS DRUM
Kick
Kick Tight
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Standard Kit 2
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare Short
Snare Tight H
Snare Soft 2
Snare Roll
Side Stick Light
Open Rim Shot H
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
BASS DRUM
Kick Short
Kick Tight
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Hit Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open 2
Hi-Hat Closed 2
Hi-Hat Pedal 2
SNARE DRUM
Snare Ambient
Snare Tight 2
Snare Electro
Snare Roll
Stick Ambient
Snare Pitched
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Hybrid Tom 1
Hybrid Tom 2
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Kit Assign List
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
77
Hybrid Tom 3
Hybrid Tom 4
Hybrid Tom 5
Hybrid Tom 6
BASS DRUM
Kick Tight H
Kick Wet
Kick Tight L
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine Light
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Room Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare Snappy
Snare Tight Snap
Snare Soft
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Tom Room 1
Tom Room 2
Tom Room 3
Tom Room 4
Tom Room 5
Tom Room 6
BASS DRUM
Kick
Kick Tight
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Rock Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare Rock
Snare Rock Tight
Snare Noisy
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Tom Rock 1
Tom Rock 2
Tom Rock 3
Tom Rock 4
Tom Rock 5
Tom Rock 6
BASS DRUM
Kick Gate
Kick 2
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Electro Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare Noisy 2
Snare Noisy 3
Snare Snap Elec
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Reverse Cymbal
TOM
Tom Electro 1
Tom Electro 2
Tom Electro 3
Tom Electro 4
Tom Electro 5
Tom Electro 6
BASS DRUM
Kick Gate Heavy
Kick Gate
Kick 3
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Scratch H 2
Scratch L 2
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Hi Q 2
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Analog Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Analog
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hat Open Analog
Hat Close Analog
Hat Close Anlg 2
SNARE DRUM
Snare Analog
Snare Analog 2
Snare Noisy 4
Snare Roll
Side Stick Anlg
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Reverse Cymbal
TOM
Tom Analog 1
Tom Analog 2
Tom Analog 3
Tom Analog 4
Tom Analog 5
Tom Analog 6
BASS DRUM
Kick Analog
Kick Anlg Short
Kick 3
PERCUSSION 1
Conga Analog M
Conga Analog L
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
78
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
Conga Analog H
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell Analog
Claves 2
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas 2
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Scratch H 2
Scratch L 2
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Hi Q 2
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Dance Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Analog
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Analog
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open 3
Hi-Hat Closed 3
Hat Close Anlg 3
SNARE DRUM
Snare Clap
Snare Dry
Snare Techno
Reverse Dance 2
Side Stick Anlg
Rim Gate
Snare Analog 3
Snare Analog 4
Vinyl Noise
Reverse Cymbal
TOM
Tom Dance 1
Tom Dance 2
Tom Dance 3
Tom Dance 4
Tom Dance 5
Tom Dance 6
BASS DRUM
Kick Techno
Kick Techno L
Kick Techno Q
PERCUSSION 1
Conga Analog M
Conga Analog L
Conga Analog H
Bongo Analog H
Bongo Analog L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell Dance
Claves 2
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas 2
Vibraslap Analog
PERCUSSION 2
Kick Dance 1
Kick Dance 2
Dance Breath 1
Dance Breath 2
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine Anlg
Hi Q 2
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Dance Perc 3
Dance Perc 4
Snare Dance 1
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Dance Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch Dance 1
Scratch Dance 2
Dance Perc 2
Hi Q Dance 1
Dance Perc 1
Reverse Dance 1
Jazz Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Snare Jazz L
Snare Jazz M
Snare Jazz H
Snare Roll
Side Stick Light
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
BASS DRUM
Kick Jazz
Kick Tight
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Brush Kit
CYMBAL
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal 1
Ride Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Brush Slap 3
Brush Tap 2
Brush Slap 2
Snare Roll
Side Stick Light
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Tom Brush 1
Tom Brush 2
Tom Brush 3
Tom Brush 4
Tom Brush 5
Tom Brush 6
BASS DRUM
Kick Jazz
Kick Tight
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Symphony Kit
CYMBAL
Hand Cymbal
Hand Cymbal 2
Splash Cymbal
Chinese Cymbal
Hand Cymbal S
Hand Cymbal 2 S
Ride Cymbal Cup
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
SNARE DRUM
Band Snare
Band Snare 2
Snare Soft
Snare Roll
Side Stick
Open Rim Shot
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap Swirl
TOM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
BASS DRUM
Gran Cassa Mute
Gran Cassa
Kick Soft 2
PERCUSSION 1
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Cowbell
Claves
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Vibraslap
5
Rhythm/Keyboard Percussion
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
79
PERCUSSION 2
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Cabasa
Shaker
Agogo H
Agogo L
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
PERCUSSION 3
Tambourine
Castanet
Jingle Bells
Bell Tree
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Sticks
Whip Slap
Finger Snap
Hand Clap
PERCUSSION 4
Hi Q
Click Noise
Scratch H
Scratch L
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
SFX Kit 1
SFX
Cutting Noise 1
Cutting Noise 2
String Slap
Flute Key Click
Shower
Thunder
Wind
Stream
Bubble
Feed
Ghost
Maou
Dog
Horse
Bird Tweet
SFX Kit 2
SFX 1
Phone Call
Telephone Ring
Wind Chime
Door Squeak
Door Slam
Scratch Cut
Scratch H 3
Laugh
Scream
Punch
Heart Beat
Foot Steps
SFX 2
CarEngnIgnition
Car Tires Squeal
Car Passing
Car Crash
Siren
Train
Jet Plane
Starship
Burst
Roller Coaster
Submarine
Machine Gun
Laser Gun
Explosion
Firework
Arabic Kit
ARABIC 1
Nakarazan Dom
Nakarazan Edge
Hager Dom
Hager Edge
Zagrouda H
Zagrouda L
Arabic Hand Clap
Duhulla Dom
Duhulla Tak
Duhulla Sak
Doff Dom
Doff Tak
ARABIC 2
Katem Dom
Katem Tak
Katem Sak
Tabla Dom
Tabla Tak 1
Tabla Tak 2
Tabla Sak
Tabla Tik
Tabla Roll Edge
Tabla Flam
Tabel Dom
Tabel Tak
ARABIC 3
Sagat 1
Sagat 2
Sagat 3
Rik Dom
Rik Tak 1
Rik Tak 2
Rik Sak
Rik Tik
Rik Finger 1
Rik Finger 2
Rik BrassTremolo
CYMBAL/SNARE DRUM
Crash Cymbal 1
Crash Cymbal 2
Ride Cymbal 1
Hi-Hat Open
Hi-Hat Closed
Hi-Hat Pedal
Snare Drum
Snare Soft
Side Stick
TOM/BASS DRUM
Floor Tom L
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
High Tom
Kick Soft
PERCUSSION
Conga H Open
Conga L
Conga H Mute
Bongo H
Bongo L
Cowbell
Claves
Cabasa
Tambourine
Pop Latin Kit
CONGA
Conga H Tip
Conga H Heel
Conga H Open
Conga H Mute
Conga H SlapOpen
Conga H Slap
Conga H SlapMute
Conga L Tip
Conga L Heel
Conga L Open
Conga L Mute
Conga L SlapOpen
Conga L Slap
Conga L Slide
BONGO
Bongo H Open 1 f
Bongo H Open 3 f
Bongo H Rim
Bongo H Tip
Bongo H Heel
Bongo H Slap
Bongo L Open 1 f
Bongo L Open 3 f
Bongo L Rim
Bongo L Tip
Bongo L Heel
Bongo L Slap
PERCUSSION 1
Timbale H Open
Timbale L Open
Paila H
Paila L
Cowbell Top
Tambourine
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Maracas
Cuica Open
Cuica Mute
Cabasa
Shaker
PERCUSSION 2
Triangle Open
Triangle Mute
Wind Chime
Hand Clap
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
80
6
Registration Memory
Registration Memory
Registration Memory allows you to store virtually all the settings you make on the panel and
LCD, providing a convenient way to instantly change all Voice settings and rhythms while
you’re playing, with the simple touch of a single button on the Registration Memory panel.
The buttons are conveniently located between the Upper and Lower keyboards for easy
access while playing. Moreover, you can also recall the settings using the right footswitch.
All Registrations in Registration Memory can also be saved to a SmartMedia card or other
external media.
Various types of basic Registrations have been programmed to the numbered Registration
Memory buttons, 1 – 16. When you record your own Registration settings to a numbered
button, the preset Registration for that button will be overwritten and erased as a result.
When you initialize the Registration Memory (page 84), the preset settings will be recalled
and your own Registration setting(s) will be erased and replaced with the factory defaults.
Newly created Registrations you make can be stored to the Registration Memory panel
buttons. All Registrations in Registration Memory can also be saved to a SmartMedia
card or other external media for future recall.
Create your original Registration.
While holding down the [M.] (Memory) button in the Registration
Memory section, press the numbered button to which you wish to
save your Registration.
When the Registration is stored, the numbered button flashes momentarily.
13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D
Contents
1 Storing Registrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
2 Selecting Registrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
3Saving the Registration data to SmartMedia card
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
4 Initializing Registration Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
5 Registration Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
• Setting the Registration Shift mode in the Regist Shift
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
• Confirming the Registration Shift setting in the Voice
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
6 Unifying a specific parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
1
Storing Registrations
1
Reference Pages
Selecting a Voice (page 23)
Selecting a Rhythm
(page 51)
Voice Controls and Effects
(page 38)
2
13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D.
2. Press desired numbered button.
1. While holding down [M.] button...
When recording Registration settings, the square at the top left of the
display turns light blue for a few seconds, indicating that the Registration is
currently being saved. Do not turn the power off while the Registration is
being saved.
6
6
Registration Memory
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
81
Functions and settings that cannot be memorized:
The following settings cannot be stored to a Registration Memory number.
• Pitch (page 188)
• MIDI Control settings (fpage 217)
• Mic. Volume (page 210)
• Mic. Reverb (page 210)
• LCD related settings (page 15)
• Internet Direct Connection settings (page 198)
The following settings common to all Registration Memory numbers 1 – 16 and
cannot be stored individually for each number.
• Transpose (page 188)
• Attack mode in Organ Flute Voices (page 36)
• Registration Shift (page 84)
• Auto Fill setting (page 54)
• Reverb type (page 44)
• User Voices (page 137)
• User rhythms (page 163)
• User Keyboard Percussion (page 70)
• Rhythm Sequences (page 170)
• Disable setting (page 82)
Reference Page
Saving Registrations as
Registration Data (File)
(page 107)
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
82
6
Registration Memory
Simply press the numbered button that corresponds to the Registration you wish to
select.
•You can also recall Registrations by using the right footswitch. This function is called
“Registration Shift” (page 84).
•You can also program the Registrations to change automatically at specific points
within the Rhythm Sequence. This function is called “Registration Sequence” (page
175).
2
Selecting Registrations
Using the [D.] (Disable) button:
Rhythm and automatic accompaniment patterns also change when you select
different Registration Memory buttons. Pressing the [D.] (Disable) button allows
you to keep the same rhythm, accompaniment patterns, tempo, and so on
throughout all your Registration changes, or make your own rhythm selections if
you want to.
When the [D.] button is on, the following functions will not change, even when
you change the Registration Memory number.
• Rhythm menu, Rhythm section, Rhythm tempo, Rhythm volume, Rhythm
reverb
• Rhythm reverb time
•Accompaniment volume, Accompaniment reverb, On/Off status of
Accompaniment parts
• A.B.C. mode, A.B.C. memory
• M.O.C. mode, Knee lever control for M.O.C.
•Second expression pedal control for rhythm tempo
7 8 9 10 11 12 D.
Disable Button
6
Registration Memory
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
83
You can save your Registration Memory settings to an external storage device, such as
SmartMedia cards, with sixteen Registrations comprising a single file.
The instructions below explain how to save the Registration data to a SmartMedia card.
For details about using other external storage devices, see chapter 7, Music Data
Recorder (M.D.R.).
Insert a SmartMedia into the card slot on the left side of the
Electone.
Press the [MDR] button on the panel to call up the M.D.R. display.
Select the song to which you want to save the Registration data
(page 96).
Press [REGIST EDIT] button in the display to call up the
Registration Edit display.
Press the [SAVE] button in the display.
A message appears, indicating the Registration data is currently being saved.
When the operation is completed, the message closes.
3
Saving the Registration data to
SmartMedia card
Reference Page
Saving Registrations as
Registration Data (File);
(page 107)
1
2
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
3
4
5
Reference Page
Recalling Recorded
Registrations (page 111)
Reference Page
Changing the Song Name
(page 104)
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
84
6
Registration Memory
Deleting all Registration data in Registration Memory initializes the Registration
Memory. Be careful when using this operation, since it erases all your existing data.
In order to avoid inadvertently losing your important data, save it to an external storage
device.
Press the [UTILITY] button on the panel to call up the GLOBAL
Page in the Utility display.
Press the INITIALIZE [EXECUTE] button on the right side in the
display.
The message “Are you sure you want to initialize Registration data?” appears.
Press [INITIALIZE] to actually initialize the data. When the operation is
complete, the Electone will be restarted.
Press [CANCEL] to cancel the operation.
The Registration Shift function allows you to change Registrations without taking your
hands from the keyboards. By using the Right Footswitch on the expression pedal, you
can “jump” to a specified Registration or step through the panel Registrations in
sequence, either in numeric order or in any order you specify.
Registration Shift has three modes: Shift, Jump and User. These are set in the Regist
Shift display. You can also view and check the Registration Shift mode in the Voice
Display.
4
Initializing Registration Memory
Reference Page
Factory Set (Initializing the
Electone); (page 21)
5
Registration Shift
1
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
2
6
Registration Memory
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
85
Setting the Registration Shift mode in the Regist Shift
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
display
Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button on the panel.
Press the [RIGHT] button at the top right of the display to call up
the RIGHT Page (Regist Shift display).
1 OFF
Turns off the Registration Shift assignment. When you select OFF, you cannot change
Registrations by using the Right Footswitch.
2 SHIFT
In the Shift mode, each press of the Right Footswitch selects the Registration Memory
presets in their numerical order. After the last Registration is reached, the function
‘wraps around’ to select the first preset again. The numbered buttons light up as they
are selected.
3 JUMP
Pressing the Right Footswitch jumps to select the designated panel Registration.
You can set the Jump “destination” with buttons in the display or the Data
Control dial.
1
2
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
1
2
3
4
REGIST SHIFT Display
Registration number of the destination
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
86
6
Registration Memory
4 USER
In the User mode, each press of the Right Footswitch selects Registrations according to
the order you’ve specified.
To set the User Registration order:
1 Press the desired numbered button in the Registration Memory
section.
2 Press the [SET] button in the display.
The Registration number appears in the display, indicating that the Registration is
entered.
3 Repeat the above procedure #1 through #2 to set the Registration
order.
1 POSITION
These are cursor controls used to move the cursor (colored orange) along the Registration
row in the display. Entered Registration numbers are shown in boxes, while the numbers in
the row above indicate the position in the sequence (in other words, the number of
successive presses of the Right Footswitch). Up to 80 steps (Registrations) can be
memorized.
Moves the cursor to the first position.
Moves the cursor one step to the left.
Moves the cursor one step to the right.
Moves the cursor five steps to the right.
2 DATA
These are data controls used to enter and delete Registration numbers in the Registration
row.
SET: For initially entering a Registration number to a blank space in the Registration row,
or for replacing a number at the current cursor position.
To enter a number, press the desired Registration Memory button (the selected button will
light), then press [SET] in the display. The entered Registration number will appear in the
Registration row. After using SET to enter Registrations, the cursor can be moved among
the numbers.
INSERT: For inserting a Registration number just before the current cursor position.
To perform the operation, first move the cursor to a numbered position. Then, press the
desired Registration Memory button (the selected button will light), and press [INSERT]
in the display. The new Registration number is inserted at the cursor position and all other
numbers to the right of the cursor are moved to accommodate the new numbers.
Registration numbers cannot be entered beyond the Registration Shift function’s capacity of
80. If the insert operation exceeds this capacity, a “Data Full” message appears and the
operation cannot be executed.
3
1
2
Registration row
6
Registration Memory
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
87
DELETE: For deleting a Registration number at the current cursor position. To delete the
unnecessary number, move the cursor to a numbered position and press [DELETE] in the
display.
CLEAR: For erasing all current user Registration Shift settings.
After selecting [CLEAR], a message appears prompting confirmation of the operation.
Select [CLEAR] to clear all data. The message “Clear all data” momentarily appears in the
display and returns to the previous display.
Select [CANCEL] to abort the operation.
3 SHIFT END
Determines how to end the Registration shift function.
STOP: Selects the last Registration and quits the operation.
TOP: After the last preset is reached, the first preset is called up again, starting the sequence
over again from the beginning.
NEXT REGIST: After the last preset is reached, the next Registration data in the Song is
called up. This function is available only when two or more Registration data sets are saved
in one Song. This function is handy when you need to play a song with more than sixteen
Registrations.
The Shift End mark ( ) will automatically be put at the end of the Registrations you
entered when Top or Next Regist is selected as the Shift End.
Confirming the Registration Shift setting in the Voice
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Display
You can confirm the Registration Shift mode in the Voice Display, Page 1.
Press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button on the panel to call up the Voice
Display.
The Registration Shift mode is shown at the bottom right of the display.
Reference Page
Saving Two or More
Registration Banks to One
Song (page 107)
NOTE
When you play the song
using Next Regist. function,
always press the [F] (Play)
button in the M.D.R. display
to start the song and activate
these functions.
The [CUSTOM] (Custom
Play) button will not activate
the Next Regist. function.
NOTE
If the next Registration data
contains User voices and/or
VA custom voices, the
Electone may produce no
sound for a few seconds
while loading the
Registration.
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
88
6
Registration Memory
Registration Shift, OFF:
The current Registration number is displayed.
Registration Shift, in “SHIFT” mode:
The current Registration number (left) and the next number (right) are
displayed.
Registration Shift, in “JUMP” mode:
The current Registration number (left) and the destination number (right) will
be displayed. You can change the destination number even in the middle of the
performance by using the buttons in the display or the Data Control
dial.
Registration Shift, in “USER” mode:
Indicates the current position of the Registration Shift. You can change the
Registration by moving the cursor (in orange) right/left, using the displayed
buttons or the Data Control dial. This is handy if you’ve inadvertently advanced
the shift setting in the middle of your performance. The user Registration
settings cannot be edited here.
Moves the cursor to the first position.
Moves the cursor one step to the left and selects the next Registration.
Moves the cursor one step to the right and selects the previous Registration.
Moves the cursor five step to the right and selects the Registration.
Current Registration
Next Registration
Destination number
can be changed.
6
Registration Memory
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
89
In the Voice Display, Page 2, you can conveniently “unify” a specific parameter used in
different Voice groups at one time. This is useful when you are changing, for example,
the Voice Brilliance setting for the Upper Keyboard and want the same setting to be
applied to the entire instrument.
Press the [VOICE DISPLAY] button on the panel.
Press the [2] button at the top right of the display to select
Page 2.
Press the PARAMETER button (indicates the currently selected
parameter) in the display to select the desired parameter for
changing.
The Parameter Select pop-up menu appears, letting you select the desired
parameter.
6
Unifying a specific parameter
Available parameters
• Reverb • Rhythm Reverb • Volume
• Panning • Brilliance • Sustain
1
2
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
3
Parameter
Part
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
90
6
Registration Memory
Select the parameter and part in the Parameter Select pop-up
menu. After selecting the desired parameter, the pop-up menu
automatically closes.
The amount of the selected parameter for each Registration is shown in the
display.
Select the targeted Registration numbers and turn them on.
Press the targeted Registration in the display and turn it on with the SETTINGS
buttons: ALL ON, ALL OFF, ON, OFF, and SELECT.
ALL ON: Selects all Registration memory numbers.
ALL OFF: Cancels all Registration memory numbers.
ON: Sets the currently selected Registration memory number to “ON.”
OFF: Sets the currently selected Registration memory number to “OFF.”
SELECT: Turns on the Registration memory numbers that contain the same Voice as
the one which is currently set in the Registration at the cursor position. The targeted
Registration numbers are underlined.
Parameter value
for each
Registration
Selected
parameter
4
Parameters in Registrations set to ON will be changed.
6
Registration Memory
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
91
Unifies the currently turned-on parameter’s values.
You unify the relevant parameter values in each Registration memory number or
offset them. Keep in mind that you cannot restore the original data once you
change the parameter’s value.
Unifying the currently turned-on parameter’s value:
Pressing [SET] unifies the currently turned-on parameter’s values to the one in
the currently selected Registration (at the cursor position). A message appears
prompting you to confirm the operation.
To continue the operation, select [UNIFY]. Select [CANCEL] to abort the
operation.
Offsetting the currently turned-on parameter’s value.
Pressing the [+]/[-] buttons in the display or using the Data Control dial offsets
the currently turned-on parameter’s value. If you select Pan as the parameter,
[
E]/[F] buttons are shown instead of [+]/[-].
If you change the value, and if parameter values for some Registration memory
number reach the maximum or minimum, the following message appears.
In this case, pressing [OK] continues the operation, ignoring those parameters at
maximum or minimum value. Pressing [CANCEL] aborts the operation.
5
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
92
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
The Music Data Recorder (M.D.R.) is a sophisticated recording system built into the Electone that
lets you record your performances and Registration settings to a SmartMedia card or other
external media. If you install the optional floppy disk drive, the UD-FD01 to the ELS-01, you can
record your performances/settings to floppy disks instead of SmartMedia cards. (The ELS-01C/
01X has a built-in floppy disk drive.)
Press the [MDR] button in the panel to call up the M.D.R. display. All operations related
to the M.D.R., such as recording and playing your performances, can be done in the
M.D.R. display.
The M.D.R. display consists of two display pages: the SONG SELECT Page and the
TOOLS Page. In the SONG SELECT Page, you can select the song that you want to
playback, or to which you want to record your performance, then playback or record. The
TOOLS Page has a variety of song utility operations, such as copy, delete, rename, etc.
Pressing any button other than the [MDR] button while the M.D.R. display is open exits
from the M.D.R. display. If you exit from the function inadvertently, simply press the
[MDR] button again to recall the M.D.R. display.
All the instructions in this chapter are related to the M.D.R. display. To call up the M.D.R.
functions and the M.D.R. display, press the [MDR] button.
Contents
1 Calling Up the M.D.R. Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
• Handling SmartMedia™ memory cards . . . . . . . . . . 93
•
Handling the floppy disk drive (FDD) and floppy disks
94
2 Formatting External Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
3 Selecting a Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
• Song Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
4 Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
• Recording your performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
• Re-recording (Retry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
• Recording each part separately . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
• Punch-in Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
5 Changing the Song Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
6
Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File)
.107
•
Saving Two or More Registration Banks to One Song
. 107
• Replacing Registrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
• Next Regist Settings (Changing the order of the
Registration data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
7 Recalling Recorded Registrations. . . . . . . . . . .111
8 Playing Back a Song. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
• Playing Back the Selected Part(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
• Fast Forward, Rewind and Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
• Changing the Tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
• Repeat Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
• Playing Back XG Songs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
9 Other Functions (Tools) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
• Song Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
• Song Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
• Converting to XG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
• XG Song Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
• XG Song Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
• Converting ELS format to EL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
• Converting EL format to ELS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
• Checking the Remaining Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
1
Calling Up the M.D.R. Display
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
7
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
93
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Handling SmartMedia™* memory cards
*SmartMedia is a trademark of Toshiba Corporation.
This instrument features a built-in SmartMedia card slot. It lets
you save original data you’ve created on the instrument to a
SmartMedia card, and allows you to load data from a card to the
instrument. Be sure to handle SmartMedia cards with care. Follow
the important precautions below.
■Compatible SmartMedia types
• 3.3V (3V) SmartMedia can be used. 5V type SmartMedia is not
compatible with this instrument.
•SmartMedia cards of seven different memory capacities of
(2MB, 4MB, 8MB, 16MB, 32MB, 64MB, and 128MB) can be
used with the instrument. SmartMedia cards greater than
32MB can be used if they conform to the SSFDC Forum
standard.
NOTE
SSFDC is an abbreviation for Solid State Floppy Disk Card
(another name for SmartMedia cards). The SSFDC Forum is a
voluntary organization established for the promotion of
SmartMedia.
■Formatting SmartMedia cards
•If you find that you are unable to use new, blank SmartMedia
cards or cards that have been used with other devices, you may
need to format them. For details on how to format a
SmartMedia card, see page 95. Keep in mind that all data on the
card will be lost after formatting. Make sure to check
beforehand whether or not the card contains important data.
NOTE
SmartMedia cards formatted on this device may or may not
be useable as is on other devices.
■Inserting/removing SmartMedia cards
●Inserting SmartMedia cards
•Insert the SmartMedia card
with the terminal (gold-
plated) side face down into
the card slot, until it clicks
into place.
•Do not insert the SmartMedia
card in the wrong direction.
•Do not insert anything other
than a SmartMedia card in the
slot.
●Removing SmartMedia cards
• After making sure that the instrument is not accessing* the
SmartMedia card, insert the card until it clicks into place and
release it. When the SmartMedia card is ejected, pull it out of
the drive. If the card cannot be removed because it is stuck, do
not try to force it, but instead try re-inserting the card
completely into the slot and attempt to eject it again.
* Accessing includes saving, loading, formatting, deleting and
making directory. Also, be aware that the instrument will
automatically access the SmartMedia to check the media type
when it is inserted while the instrument is turned on.
Never attempt to remove the SmartMedia card or
turn the power off during accessing. Doing so can
damage the data on the instrument or card and
possibly damage the SmartMedia card itself.
■About SmartMedia cards
●Handle SmartMedia cards with care, and
follow these precautions:
• There are times when static electricity affects SmartMedia.
Before you touch a SmartMedia card, touch something metallic
such as a door knob and aluminum sash, to reduce the
possibility of static electricity.
•Be sure to remove the SmartMedia card from the SmartMedia
slot when it is not in use for a long time.
•Do not expose the SmartMedia to direct sunlight, extremely
high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust or liquids.
•Do not place heavy objects on a SmartMedia card or bend or
apply pressure to the card in any way.
•Do not touch the gold-plated terminals of the SmartMedia card
or put any metallic plate onto the terminals.
•Do not expose the SmartMedia card to magnetic fields, such as
those produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since
magnetic fields can partially or completely erase data on the
SmartMedia, rendering it unreadable.
•Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a
SmartMedia. Also make sure that labels are attached in the
proper location.
●To protect your data (write-protect):
•To prevent inadvertent erasure of important data, affix the
write-protect seal (provided in the SmartMedia package) onto
the designated area (within the circle) of the SmartMedia card.
Conversely, to save data on the SmartMedia card, make sure to
remove the write-protect seal from the card.
•Do not reuse a seal that has been peeled off.
●Data Backup
•For maximum data security, Yamaha recommends that you keep
two copies of important data on separate SmartMedia cards.
This gives you a backup if one card is lost or damaged.
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
94
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Handling the floppy disk drive (FDD) and floppy disks
If you have the ELS-01, install the optional UD-FD01 floppy disk
drive to use floppy disks with the Electone. For information on
how to install the UD-FD01, see page 221.
Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with care.
Follow the important precautions below.
■Floppy disk compatibility
• 3.5" 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used.
■Formatting a floppy disk
•If you find that you are unable to use new, blank disks or old
disks that have been used with other devices, you may need to
format them. For details on how to format a disk, see page 95.
Keep in mind that all data on the disk will be lost after
formatting. Make sure to check beforehand whether or not the
disk contains important data.
NOTE
Floppy disks formatted on this device may or may not be
useable as is on other devices.
■Inserting/removing Floppy Disks
●Inserting a floppy disk into the disk drive
•Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing upward and
the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards the disk slot.
Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly pushing it all the
way in until it clicks into place and the eject button pops out.
NOTE
Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk drive.
Other objects may cause damage to the disk drive or floppy
disks.
●Removing a floppy disk
• After checking that the instrument is not accessing* the floppy
disk, firmly press the eject button at the upper right of the disk
slot all the way in. When the floppy disk is ejected, pull it out of
the drive. If the floppy disk cannot be removed because it is
stuck, do not try to force it, but instead try pressing the eject
button again, or try re-inserting the disk and attempt to eject it
again.
*Access of the disk indicates an active operation, such as
recording, playback, or deletion of data. If a floppy disk is
inserted while the power is on, the disk is automatically
accessed, since the instrument checks whether the disk has data.
Do not remove the floppy disk or turn off the
instrument itself while the disk is being accessed.
Doing so may result not only in loss of data on the
disk but also damage to the floppy disk drive.
•Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive before
turning off the power. A floppy disk left in the drive for
extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that can cause
data-read and -write errors.
■Cleaning the disk drive read/write head
• Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument employs a
precision magnetic read/write head which, after an extended
period of use, will pick up a layer of magnetic particles from the
disks used that will eventually cause read and write errors.
•To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order Yamaha
recommends that you use a commercially-available dry-type
head cleaning disk to clean the head about once a month. Ask
your Yamaha dealer about the availability of proper
headcleaning disks.
■About floppy disks
●Handle floppy disks with care, and follow
these precautions:
•Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply pressure
to the disk in any way. Always keep floppy disks in their
protective cases when they are not in use.
•Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely high or low
temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust or liquids.
•Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed surface
of the floppy disk inside.
•Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields, such as those
produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since magnetic
fields can partially or completely erase data on the disk,
rendering it unreadable.
•Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or housing.
•Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a
floppy disk. Also make sure that labels are attached in the
proper location.
●To protect your data (write-protect tab):
•To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the disk's
write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab open). When
saving data, make sure that the disk’s write-protect tab is set to
the “overwrite” position (tab closed).
●Data backup
•For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that you keep
two copies of important data on separate floppy disks. This
gives you a backup if one disk is lost or damaged.
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
95
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
If you find that you are unable to use new, blank external media (such as SmartMedia
cards, floppy disks or USB storage devices) or old ones that have been used with other
devices, you may need to format them.
Formatting erases all the data in the media and makes it ready to record. The data
erased by formatting will be lost permanently. Check whether or not the media
contains any important data you wish to keep before executing the operation.
Insert the media into the card slot or disk drive, or connect the
device to the USB TO DEVICE terminal.
Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up
the TOOLS Page.
Press the [FORMAT] button in the display.
Select the desired media you want to format.
To format a SmartMedia card, select [SmartMedia]. To format a floppy disk,
select [USB-FD1]. To format a USB storage device, select [USB 01].
Press the [EXECUTE] button in the display.
A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. Select [OK] to
format the media, or [CANCEL] to abort the operation.
2
Formatting External Media
1
2
3
4
NOTE
On the ELS-01, “USB-FD01”
appears in the display only
when a floppy disk drive
(UD-FD01) has been
installed to the Electone.
Do not remove the media
while formatting.
5
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
96
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
In the SONG SELECT Page, you can select a blank song to which you want to record
your performance or save the Registration settings, or you can select a desired song for
playback.
To select the desired song:
In the SONG SELECT Page, songs in the currently selected media are displayed. First
call up the desired media (and folder, if necessary) in the display, then select the desired
song.
Check the currently selected media at the top of the display.
For example, if you want to select a song in the SmartMedia card, confirm that
“SmartMedia:/” is displayed at the top of the display.
For information on selecting the desired media, see page 98.
Press desired song button in the display.
Referring to the song name and icons, select the desired song. The selected song
button is highlighted in orange.
3
Selecting a Song
1
Currently selected media/folder
2
Reference Pages
Changing the Song Name
(page 104)
Song Icons (page 99)
Song containing data Blank song (containing no data)
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
97
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
One display contains eight songs, Song 1 – Song 8. To change the display page
and call up other songs, press the appropriate number buttons in the display.
For example, pressing the [2] button calls up Song 9 –16, while the [3] button
calls up Song 17 – 24, and so on.
Song 1
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
Song 2 Song 3 Song 4
Song 5 Song 6 Song 7 Song 8
Song 17 Song 18 Song 19 Song 20
Song 21 Song 22 Song 23 Song 24
Press the number
buttons to change the
displayed songs.
Song 1 – Song 8
When the [1] button is selected
When the [3] button is selected
Song Part Information
Pressing the [PART SETUP] button calls up the Part Setup display of the currently
selected song, letting you confirm which parts are played when playing the song.
When playing back the song (by pressing the [F] button), only those parts that
are set to “PLAY” in the Part Setup display actually play, while parts that are set to
“OFF” are muted. (If the song contains no performance data, all parts are set to
“OFF”.) You can change the status for each part by changing the PLAY/OFF
settings for each part and pressing the [SAVE] button in the display.
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
98
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
To change the media/folder:
Press the [FOLDER SELECT] button in the SONG SELECT Page
to call up the Folder Select display.
1 Current Media/Folder
Displays the currently selected media/folder. For example, if “SmartMedia:/Folder1/” is
shown, the folder named “Folder1” in the SmartMedia card is selected.
2 Media/Folder List
Displays the media or folders. Up to 120 folders can be displayed.
3 Scroll Buttons
If the Media/Folder List contains many folders, more than can fit on the display, you
can scroll the display with these buttons.
4 UP
Selects the upper layer folder or media. For example, when “SmartMedia:/Folder1/”
(Folder1 in the SmartMedia) is selected, pressing the [UP] button selects
“SmartMedia:/”.
5 CREATE FOLDER
Creates a new folder in the Media/Folder List.
Up to 120 folders can exist in one media or within a single upper folder. Pressing this
button calls up the New Folder display in which you can enter the desired name. Enter
the name and press the [OK] button to create a new folder. The method for entering
the folder name is the same as that of the song name. See page 104 for more
information.
6 RENAME FOLDER
Calls up the Rename Folder display. You can change the folder name of the currently
selected folder in the Media/Folder List. See page 104 for more information.
7 DELETE FOLDER
Deletes the folder that is selected in the Media/Folder List.
1
4
5
6
7
3
2
1
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
99
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Select the desired media and/or folder in the Media/Folder List.
To call up the folder in the media in the display, press the selected media button
in the Media/Folder List again.
Press the [EXECUTE] button.
To abort the operation, press the [CLOSE] button.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Song Icons
These icons are shown when you select a media, folder, and song.
Indicates media such as a SmartMedia card or floppy disk. This icon is
displayed in the Media/Folder List.
Indicates a folder.
Indicates that write-protect or copy-protect is effective for the media.
Indicates a song that has been created with the ELS-01.
Indicates a song that has been created with the ELS-01C or ELS-01X.
Indicates a song that has been created with an EL-series Electone, such as
the EL-900.
Indicates that performance data is contained in the song.
Indicates a Protected Original Song. See page 121 for more information.
Indicates a Protected Edit Song. See page 121 for more information.
2
3
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
100
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Media Contents: Folders, Songs, and Files
Folders:
A folder is a storage location in the media, used to organize multiple songs in
groups. If you’ve saved hundreds of songs to a SmartMedia card or USB storage
device, it may be difficult to find the desired song quickly. Organizing your songs in
folders, with similar songs grouped together (for example, according to genre or
tempo), makes it easier to find the songs you want.
Songs:
A song is the Electone data for a piece of music, recorded to external media. A single
song can contain a variety of data, including the recorded performance,
Registrations, and so on.
Files:
A file is an element of data in a song. For example, a single song consists of various
files, such as Registration files and performance files. The following files are created
with the M.D.R. (The extension will not appear in the Electone display. They will,
however, be displayed on a computer.)
In addition, one file (extension: .nam) is automatically created in each folder for
organization/maintenance of the folder contents. It does not appear on the Electone
display.
Song
1
Song
2
Song
3
Song
4
Song
5
Song
6
3
Song 2
Song 1
Song Song Song
Folder A
Song 4
Folder B
5
6
Creating folders...
SmartMedia
SmartMedia
Files in the song
File Explanation Extension
Performance data This file contains performance data, played on the
keyboards and pedals of the Electone.
.mid
Registration data This file contains Registration settings, User Voices,
User rhythms, and Rhythm Sequences.
.b00
XG-converted data This file contains XG song data, for which Electone
performance data is converted to XG-compatible
format.
.mid
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
101
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Recording your performance
Set the desired Registrations on the Electone. Make all the Electone settings necessary
for the song you will record. This means entering the all Registrations you will need for
the entire performance in the Registration Memory. Make sure also to select the
Registration that you will use at the beginning of the song.
Insert a media to the media slot.
Select a blank song for recording your performance.
For details on selecting a song, see page 96.
If you want to overwrite an existing song already containing performance data,
you will need to delete it beforehand.
Press the [RECORD] button in the display.
The following display appears, indicating that you can record your performance.
Press the [F] (Play) button.
An hourglass icon appears, indicating that Registration data is currently being
read.
After the hourglass disappears, begin playing.
When you finish playing, press the [
J
] (Stop) button in the
display.
The recording is finished and the LCD returns to the SONG SELECT Page.
The song to which your performance is recorded is automatically named
“SONG XX” (xx indicates song number). You can change the song name as
desired. (For details, see page 104.)
4
Recording
Never attempt to eject the
media or turn the power off
during recording, reading
and playing back.
1
2
3
NOTE
You cannot record to a folder
which contains songs for the
EL-series Electone, such as
EL-900.
4
5
6
Do not remove the media
from the instrument while
data is being recorded
(while the hourglass icon
or other message is
shown).
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
102
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Re-recording (Retry)
If you make a mistake during recording, you can re-record the song from the
beginning.
Press the [RETRY] button while the song is still running.
This automatically stops recording and returns you to the starting point of the
song.
Press the [F] (Play) or [CUSTOM] button to begin re-recording
the song.
Re-recording starts from the beginning of the song and replaces the previously
recorded performance with the newly recorded performance.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Recording each part separately
You can also record the parts of your performance independently. This function lets
you record Keyboard Percussion and performance control data, such as Registration
changes and expression pedal operation, separately from the other parts of the song.
Even Keyboard Percussion and Lead Voice 1 Voices can be recorded separately, though,
the Lead Voice 2 Voices will be included in the performance data of the Upper
Keyboard. The following instruction is an example: First, record the chords and bass to
the song using the Lower and Pedalboard, and then record the melody using the Upper
Keyboard.
Follow steps 1 – 3 on page 101 to call up the Rec Standby display.
Select the parts for recording.
Each pressing of a part button switches the status: PLAY, OFF, and REC.
PLAY: Playback the parts that have been recorded.
OFF: Recording or playback is not active.
REC: Records the part.
If you set the Upper part to “REC,” the performance on the Upper Keyboard
(including Lead Voice 1 Voices) is recorded. Setting Lead to “REC,” however,
records only the Lead Voice 1 Voices. You cannot set both Upper and Lead to
“REC” at the same time; neither can the Lower and Keyboard Percussion parts
be recorded at the same time.
1
2
1
2
NOTE
When you record the
Keyboard Percussion, make
sure that the KEYBOARD
PERCUSSION [1] and/or [2]
button is set to on.
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
103
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
The following setting lets you record only Lower Keyboard and Pedalboard
parts.
Press the [F] (Play) button, and start playing after the
hourglass icon disappears.
Press the [J] (Stop) button when you are finished with your
performance to stop recording.
Now you’ve recorded the first parts of your performance.
Press the [RECORD] button to set up recording of the next part —
Upper part in this case.
A message appears prompting confirmation of operation. Select [OK] to
overwrite and the Rec Standby display appears.
Select the parts for recording.
Set the next parts you want to record (in this case, the Upper part) to “REC.”
Also set the part already recorded (in this case Lower and Pedal parts) to “PLAY,”
so you can hear the previously recorded parts as you record new ones.
Press the [CUSTOM] button to start recording of the new part or
parts (Upper part).
Playback of the previously recorded parts starts immediately. The [CUSTOM]
button is used here to record only the parts that have been selected for recording,
and plays back only those parts that have been selected for playback. While you
listen to the parts being played back, start playing the melody on the Upper
keyboard.
When the end of the recorded performance is reached, playback is automatically
stopped. The length of a subsequently recorded part cannot exceed the length of
the previously recorded parts.
3
4
5
6
7
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
104
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Punch-in Recording
This lets you re-record a specific phrase or section which you don’t want to use, either
that of a specific part(s) or all parts.
Select the song which contains the phrase you want to change.
For details on selecting a song, see page 96.
Press the [F] (Play) button to start playback of the song.
Press the [K] (Pause) button at the point you want to execute
punch-in recording.
Press the [RECORD] button.
The recording display appears, indicating that the Music Data Recorder is ready
to record.
Set the parts which you want to change to “REC” status and
other parts to “PLAY.”
Press the [F] (Play) button to start punch-in recording. Play the
new phrase, as you want it to be changed.
Press the [J] (Stop) button to quit the punch-in recording as
soon as you reach the end of the phrase.
You can name the song, such as giving it a title or indicating the date on which it was
recorded. However, song names of the EL-series Electone, such as the EL-900, cannot
be changed.
Select the song whose name you want to change.
For details on selecting a song, see page 96.
Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up
the TOOLS Page.
NOTE
This function is best used
when the phrase to be
re-recorded has definite
beginning and end points,
with slight pauses before and
after.
5
Changing the Song Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
NOTE
When you change the name
of an XG song, the extension
(.mid) cannot be changed.
1
2
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
105
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Press the [CHANGE SONG NAME] button.
The following display appears.
Move the cursor to the desired point by using the [E][F]
buttons in the display or the Data Control dial.
Select the desired character type: alphabet, upper or lowercase,
or symbol.
Select the desired character for entry.
A song name can contain up to 50 characters.
After finished, select [OK] to actually enter the name.
The LCD will return to the TOOLS Page display.
3
4
DATA CONTROL
Cursor
or
5
NOTE
If you select Japanese as the
Language in the Utility
display (page 15), you can
also select Japanese
language characters
(hiragana and kanji, normal
size katakana, half size
katakana, full size alphabet,
and full size symbols).
NOTE
An XG song name can
contain up to 46 characters.
6
7
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
106
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
To delete the entered character:
Move the cursor to the character you want to delete.
Press the [DELETE] button at the bottom right in the display.
The character is deleted.
To convert into kanji (Japanese language):
This applies only if you are using the (Kana-Kan) button in Japanese.
When the input “Hiragana” characters are shown in the reverse
display (highlighted), press the (kanji-conversion) button
one or several times to convert to the characters into the
appropriate kanji.
• The reversed area can be changed by the [E][F] buttons in the display or
the Data Control dial.
• The converted area can be cleared at once by pressing the (cancel)
button.
To actually enter the change, press the [OK] button or enter the
next character. To enter the hiragana character itself (without
converting it), press the (delete) button.
1
DATA CONTROL
Cursor
or
A “name is not available” message may appear when you press the [OK] button to
finish entering the name. If this message appears, the name is invalid and you
should enter another name.
The following names cannot be used. (“xx” indicates numbers.)
MDR_xx.EVT ELS_SONG.NAM MDR_xxx.TMP TMP
MDR_xx.MID MDR_xxx.MID REG_xxx.TMP TMP.E02
MDR_xx.Bxx REG_xxx.B00 ELS_SONG.TMP
MDR_xx.Vxx SONG_xxx.C02
SONG.NAM
2
1
2
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
107
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
You can also record Registrations by themselves, without recording a performance.
Bulk data, including Registration Memory and Registration Shift settings, Rhythm
Patterns (User rhythms) Rhythm Sequence data, and User Voices, are also saved in the
operation.
First create your original settings you want to save then select
the destination (blank song).
For details on selecting a song, see page 96.
Press the [REGIST EDIT] button in the SONG SELECT Page to
call up the Regist Edit display.
Press the [SAVE] button.
A message appears, indicating that the Registration is being recorded. After the
message disappears, exit from the Regist Edit display by pressing the [CLOSE]
button and return to the SONG SELECT Page. The song to which the
Registration is recorded is automatically named “SONG XX” (xx indicates song
number).
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Saving Two or More Registration Banks to One Song
When you want to use more than 16 Registration numbers, you can save additional
Registration banks to a single song, with the following procedure.
First create the original settings you want to save, then select the
destination song.
For details on selecting a song, see page 96.
Press the [REGIST EDIT] button in the SONG SELECT Page to
call up the Regist Edit display.
The Registration data which has previously been saved to the song is shown.
6
Saving Registrations as Registration Data (File)
1
2
3
Reference Page
Next Regist. (page 87)
Programming a Registration
Sequence (page 175)
1
2
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
108
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Press the lowest blank (empty) Registration button.
Press the [SAVE] button.
The Registration data will be added.
When you play back this song, the top Registration in this display will be loaded
to the Electone. You can also change the order of the Registration data. See page
109.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Replacing Registrations
The M.D.R. also lets you change the Registrations of an existing song without
changing the performance data. In advance, you need to create the original Registration
that will replace the old one.
Select the song for which you wish to replace the Registrations.
For details on selecting a song, see page 96.
Press the [REGIST EDIT] button in the SONG SELECT Page to
call up the Regist Edit display.
The Registration data which has been saved to the song is shown.
Select the Registration data you wish to replace.
Press the [SAVE] button.
A message appears, prompting confirmation of overwriting the Registration
data. Select [OK] to overwrite (replace), or select [CANCEL] to abort the
operation.
3
4
1
2
3
4
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
109
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Next Regist Settings (Changing the order of the
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Registration data)
When playing back a song which uses more than 16 Registration numbers, you can use
two or more Registration banks saved in a single song and recall them one by one as
you play the song. This function is called Next Regist.
If you want to use the Next Regist function, you'll have to make one of the following
settings in advance:
• Set the Registration Shift mode to User, and select Next Regist as the Shift End
(page 84).
• Enter the Next Regist data in the Registration Sequence (page 176).
Save the desired Registrations to a song.
For instructions on saving two or more Registration banks to a song, see page 107.
Select the song containing the Registrations for which you want
to change the order.
For details on selecting a song, see page 96.
Press the [REGIST EDIT] button in the SONG SELECT Page to
call up the Regist Edit display.
Change the Registration order, in the order you want to recall.
First select the specific Registration bank you want to edit, then move, copy or
delete the selected data as needed to change the order.
NOTE
If the next Registration data
contains User voices and/or
VA custom voices, the
Electone may produce no
sound for a few seconds
while loading the
Registration.
M1
REG_001
M16 M1 M16
REG_002
1
2
3
4
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
110
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
1 Registration Data List
From this list, select the Registration you want to move, copy or delete. The selected
Registration is highlighted in orange. When more than five Registration banks are
saved in the song, a scroll button is available for scrolling through the
Registration Data List.
2 MOVE
Moves the selected Registration bank up or down.
3 DATA TO BE LOADED
When loading the Registration bank to the panel, select the desired data you want to
load. For more information, see page 111.
4 LOAD
Loads the selected Registration bank to the panel/keyboards. After loading, you can
check the Registration by playing the keyboards.
5 SAVE
Saves the current panel settings as a Registration bank in the song. The currently
selected Registration in the Registration Data List (
1) will become the destination
location.
6 COPY
Copies the currently selected Registration to the lowest blank location in the
Registration Data List.
7 DELETE
Deletes the currently selected Registration bank in the Registration Data List.
Exit from the Regist Edit display by pressing the [CLOSE] button
at the top right of the display.
2
1
4
3
7
6
5
5
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
111
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Registrations (and bulk data) recorded to song numbers can be easily loaded back to
the Electone by the following procedure.
The M.D.R. independently records the following five types of data:
• REGIST
• USER VOICE
• K.B.P.
• USER RHYTHM
• SEQUENCE
You can select and recall the desired data independently.
Insert the appropriate media and select the song you want to load
back to the Electone.
For details on selecting a song, see page 96.
Press the [REGIST EDIT] button in the SONG SELECT Page to
call up the Regist Edit display.
Select the Registration you want to load to the Electone.
Using the five “DATA TO BE LOADED” buttons, select the desired
data you want to load.
Press the [LOAD] button to load the selected data in the
Registration.
Exit from the Regist Edit display by pressing the [CLOSE] button
at the top right of the display.
7
Recalling Recorded Registrations
1
2
3
4
NOTE
When you load the
Registration data by using
the Next Regist function, all
data will be loaded no matter
which buttons you select
here.
5
6
NOTE
If you are loading a
Registration while a rhythm is
playing, the sequence data
and User rhythms in the
Registration data cannot be
loaded.
When you select the protected song, the buttons (DATA TO BE LOADED) may
be unavailable (grayed out). For example, combining a part of one protcted song
with another protected song is not allowed.
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
112
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Select the song to be played back.
For details on selecting a song, see page 96.
Press the [F] (Play) button in the display to load the
Registration data.
An hourglass icon appears, indicating the Registration data is loading.
If the song contains more than two Registration banks, the first one will be
loaded. You can check the Registration order in the Regist. Edit display.
If the song contains no performance data, after loading the Registration data, the
LCD returns to the SONG SELECT Page.
Playback starts automatically after reading the Registration data
(the elapsed time is shown).
In general, all parts recorded to the song are played back; however, you can mute
specific parts and playback only selected parts. For more information, see page
113.
When the end of the recorded performance is reached, playback automatically
stops. You can, however, stop playback in the middle of the song by pressing the
[
J
] (Stop) button in the display.
8
Playing Back a Song
1
2
Reference Page
Next Regist Settings
(page 109)
3
Reference Page
Song Part Information
(page 97)
Custom Play
If you want to play back the song without resetting the Registrations, press the
[CUSTOM] button instead of the [F] (Play) button. This displays the song time
and starts playback immediately.
When you play the song using the Next Regist function, always press the [F]
(Play) button to start the song, not the [CUSTOM] button.
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
113
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Playing Back the Selected Part(s)
You can also play back selected parts of your recorded performance, while other parts
are temporarily turned off. This function is especially useful for playing a single part,
such as the melody, over previously recorded accompaniment parts.
To play back the selected part(s):
During playback, press each part button to turn the part you want to playback to
“PLAY” and the part you want to mute to “OFF.”
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Fast Forward, Rewind and Pause
Fast Forward and Rewind:
During playback, press the [H] (Fast forward) button or [G] (Rewind) button and
hold it down until the time reaches the desired position.
Even when the button is released, playback is paused. To resume playback from the
point you’ve advanced or reversed to, press the [F] (Play) button or [CUSTOM]
button.
Pause:
If you want to temporarily stop playback of the song or songs, press the [K] (Pause)
button.
To resume playback from the point at which the song was paused, press the [K]
(Pause) button again or press the [F] (Play) or [CUSTOM] button.
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
114
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Changing the Tempo
You can change the tempo of the song as the song is playing in the M.D.R. display,
either while the song is stopped or while it is playing.
To Change the Tempo:
Use the TEMPO buttons in the display or Data Control dial to change the
tempo. (The TEMPO dial on the panel cannot be used to change the tempo for the
Music Data Recorder.) The range is 50 – 200%. The original recorded tempo is 100%
and values less than 100% indicate slower tempo; values greater than 100% indicate
faster tempo.
To reset the changed tempo:
Use the [TEMPO RESET] button in the display to reset the tempo to its original value
(100%).
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
115
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Repeat Playback
This feature allows you to repeatedly play back either all songs on a folder or only one
specific song.
Select the song you wish to play back.
If you wish to play back all songs on a folder, select the first song that will be
played back. For details on selecting a song, see page 96.
Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up
the TOOLS Page.
Press the [REPEAT SETTING] button to call up the Repeat Setting
display.
Select the repeat mode.
1 ALL
Repeats all songs in the currently selected folder in order.
2 SINGLE
Repeats the currently selected song again and again.
3 RANDOM
Repeats all songs in the currently selected folder randomly.
4 OFF
Cancels repeat playback.
1
2
3
4
3
4
2
1
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
116
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Exit from the Repeat Setting display by pressing the [CLOSE]
button at the top right of the display.
Press the [F] (Play) button in the SONG SELECT Page to begin
playback.
When you stop playback, the repeat setting is automatically cancelled.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Playing Back XG Songs
The Electone allows you to playback XG song data, created on the computer or
converted from Electone song format to XG format. The fast forward, rewind and
pause controls are available, just as with songs (performances) recorded on the
Electone.
Insert the media containing XG song data into the media slot.
Select the media that contains the desired XG song in the SONG
SELECT Page.
For details on selecting media, see page 98.
Press the [XG] button in the SONG SELECT Page to call up the
XG songs in the display.
When the [EL] button is selected, the Electone songs are shown in the SONG
SELECT Page; when the [XG] button is selected, the XG songs are shown.
5
6
Reference Page
Converting to XG (page 122)
1
2
3
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
117
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Select the desired song for playback.
Press the [F] (Play) button in the display to start song
playback.
The following display appears, letting you set the volume or mute settings for
each part.
1 PART buttons
Sets the each part for playback or mute (off). Each press of the button toggles between
PLAY and OFF.
2 XG VOLUME
Adjusts the volume of the XG song within a range of 0 – 100. To set the volume, touch
the slider in the display directly or use the Data Control dial.
3 PART SETUP
Determines the volume balance of the parts. Pressing this button calls up the following
display.
You can adjust the volume of each part within a range of 0 – 100. Use the ALL slider to
adjust the volume of the XG song (the same function as XG VOLUME above).
Each channel button below each slider (for example, the [CH1] button) lets you set the
part to mute or play (the same function as the PART buttons above).
4
5
123
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
118
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
The TOOLS Page in the M.D.R. display has many functions, such as song copy, song
delete, etc.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Song Copy
This function lets you copy data recorded in one song to another song. You can copy
and exchange the data even between two different media. (Only songs created with the
ELS-01/01C/01X can be copied. Songs created with the EL-series, such as the EL-900,
cannot be copied.) Make sure to check the remaining memory of the destination media
in advance. If memory space is insufficient, or if the folder already contains 100 songs,
Song Copy is not available. Copying of XG songs is done with a different method from
Song Copy here. Refer to “XG Song Copy,” page 123.
To copy within one media or between a SmartMedia card and
floppy disk:
Select the song to be copied.
For details on selecting a song, see page 96.
Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up
the TOOLS Page.
Press the [SONG COPY] button to call up the Song Copy display.
9
Other Functions (Tools)
Moving a Protected Song
A protected song can be copied within a folder, but it cannot be copied to another
folder or media. If you specify another folder or media as the copy destination, a
message appears prompting moving of the song — not copying. When the
[EXECUTE] button is pressed, the protected original song and all protected edited
songs which come from the same protected original song will be moved together.
1
2
3
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
119
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Confirm that the desired song to be copied is displayed in the upper half of the
display. If you want to change the song, press the COPY FROM [CHANGE]
button to call up the Song Select display and select another song.
Press the COPY TO [CHANGE] button to call up the Song Select
display, then select the destination song.
Press the [EXECUTE] button to execute Song Copy.
If you have not selected a blank song, a message appears prompting
confirmation whether to overwrite or not.
Select [OVERWRITE] to execute or [CANCEL] to abort the operation.
The song name of the destination is the same as the one of the source song, but
“*” is attached at the beginning.
If you want to change the song name, see page 104.
To copy a song from one SmartMedia card to another:
Follow the step #1 – #3 on page 118.
Press the COPY TO [CHANGE] button to call up the Song Select
display.
Press the [FOLDER SELECT] button in the Song Select display
and select “MEMORY” as the destination.
Press the [EXECUTE] button.
Folder select display will close and “MEMORY:/” is selected as the COPY TO
(destination).
Press the [EXECUTE] button to execute the Song Copy.
The song to be copied is copied to the internal memory of the Electone.
The message “Eject the source media” will appear on the display.
4
5
1
2
3
NOTE
If you cannot find the
[MEMORY] button on the
display, press the [UP]
button repeatedly to call up
the [MEMORY] button.
4
5
NOTE
If you want to abort the
operation, press the
[CANCEL] button.
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
120
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Eject the source media.
After ejecting the source media, the message “Insert the destination media” will
appear on the display.
Insert the destination media to which you want to copy.
The Song Copy display appears. “MEMORY:/” (the internal memory to which
the song has been copied in step #5) is displayed in the SONG FROM.
Press the COPY TO [CHANGE] button to call up the Song Select
display, then select the destination song.
Only a blank song can be selected here.
Press the [EXECUTE] button to execute the Song Copy. Select
[CANCEL] or [CLOSE] to abort the operation.
The song name of the destination is the same as the one of the source song, but
“*” is attached at the beginning.
If you want to change the song name, see page 104.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Song Delete
You can delete data in one song; only Registration data, only performance data, or both
of them (entire song) can be deleted. Only the songs created with the ELS-01/01C/
01X can be deleted. The songs created with the EL series such as EL-900 cannot be
deleted.
To delete the XG song, the method is different from the song delete. Refer to “XG
Song Delete,” page 124.
Select the song to be deleted.
For details on selecting a song, see page 96.
Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up
the TOOLS Page.
Press the [SONG DELETE] button to call up the Song Delete
display.
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
121
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Confirm that the desired song to be deleted is displayed in upper half of the
display. If you want to change the song, press the [CHANGE] button to call up
the song select display and select the desired song.
Select the desired data you want to delete, “REGIST” and/or
“SONG.”
When you want to delete the entire song, select both REGIST and SONG.
If only “REGIST” is selected, the Registration data in the song will be deleted.
If only “SONG” is selected, the performance data in the song will be deleted.
If the song does not contain Registration (or performance) data, you cannot
select “REGIST” (or “SONG”) in the display.
Press the [EXECUTE] button.
A message will appear prompting confirmation of the operation. Select
[DELETE] to delete the song, or [CANCEL] to abort the operation.
About Protected Songs
If you buy or download the song data, it may be protected so that you cannot delete
or copy, in order to prevent accidental erasure or protect copyright. This is
“Protected Song.” Protected songs can be saved to a SmartMedia card with ID or
USB flash memory.
The protected song can be played back as same as the song you created, but it
cannot be converted to XG format, or EL format. It is not possible to edit the
Registration data in the protected song, nor to overwrite the performance data.
If you want to edit the protected song, first copy it within one media/folder, then
edit the copy. (You cannot copy to another media/folder.) The copy song (called
“protected edit song”) is available only when the original song (called “protected
original song”) exists in the same folder. Be careful not to delete the protected
original song.
To move the protected song in a SmartMedia card with a computer,
you’ll need to use the Musicsoft Downloader application. If you
move the song without Musicsoft Downloader, the song cannot be
played back.
Musicsoft Downloader can be obtained at the following Internet
address:
http://music.yamaha.com/download/
4
5
Folder
Protected
Original
Song
Protected
Edit Song
Copy
You cannot edit this song
You can edit this song, only when this is in the folder
that contains protected original song.
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
122
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Converting to XG
This function allows you to convert the ELS-01/01C/01X song data to XG format
data. You can playback the data using XG devices. The converted XG song data may
sound differently from the original data.
Confirm that the media should contain enough amount of available memory before
the conversion. The protected songs cannot be converted to XG format.
Selects a song to be converted to XG.
For details on selecting a song, see page 96.
Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up
the TOOLS Page.
Press the [CONVERT TO XG] button.
A message will appear, prompting confirmation of the converted data.
Press the [EXECUTE] to convert.
The M.D.R. starts playback of the selected song for you to decide whether you
convert it to the XG data, or not. After finishing playback the following message
appears.
(If necessary) Press the [RENAME] to give a name to the
converted XG song.
For details of the method to edit the song name, see page 104.
1
2
3
4
5
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
123
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Press the [CONVERT] button.
After the process of the conversion the LCD returns to the original display.
To call up the XG song in the display, press [XG] button in the SONG SELECT
Page of the M.D.R. display. For more information, see page 116.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
XG Song Copy
Select the XG song to be copied.
For details to select an XG song, see page 116.
Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up
the TOOLS Page.
Press the [XG SONG COPY] button to call up the XG Song Copy
display.
Confirm that the desired song to be copied is displayed in upper half of the
display. If you want to change the song, press the COPY FROM [CHANGE]
button to call up the Song Select display and select the desired song.
Press the COPY TO [CHANGE] button to call up the folder select
display, then select the destination media.
Press the [EXECUTE] button to execute the XG Song Copy.
Select [CANCEL] or [CLOSE] to abort the operation.
If the remaining memory of the destination media is insufficient, XG Song
Copy cannot be executed. (An error message will appear and the operation is
cancelled.) Up to 120 XG songs can be saved in one folder.
6
1
2
3
4
5
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
124
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
XG Song Delete
Select the XG song to be deleted.
For details on selecting an XG song, see page 116.
Press the [TOOLS] button at the top right of the display to call up
the TOOLS Page, then select the [XG SONG DELETE] button.
The XG Song Delete display appears.
Confirm that the desired song to be deleted is shown in the upper
half of the display, then press the [EXECUTE].
If you want to change the song, press the [CHANGE] button to call up the
Song Select display and select the desired song. After pressing the [EXECUTE]
button, a message appears prompting confirmation of the operation. Select
[DELETE] to delete the selected XG song, or select [CANCEL] to abort the
operation.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Converting ELS format to EL
You can convert songs created on the ELS-01/01C/01X to EL-series format, and save
them to a floppy disk. The converted data can be used with EL-series Electones, such as
the EL-900. This function is not available for protected songs.
If you are using the ELS-01, you’ll need to install the optional UD-FD01 floppy disk
drive.
Select the song to be converted to EL-series format.
For details on selecting a song, see page 96.
In the TOOLS Page, press the [CONVERT ELS ➞ EL] button to call
up the Convert display.
1
2
3
Reference Pages
About Protected Songs
(page 121)
Installing the Floppy Disk
Drive (page 221)
NOTE
User rhythms cannot be
converted to EL format.
1
2
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
125
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Confirm that the desired song to be converted is displayed in the upper half of
the display. If you want to change the song, press the [CHANGE] button of the
Change From section to call up the Song Select display and select the desired
song.
Press the [CHANGE] button of the Change To section in the
display, then select the destination.
If the source song contains two or more Registration banks, you’ll need to make
ready the same number of destination songs to save the converted data.
Press the [EXECUTE] button in the display to start conversion.
A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. Select
[CONVERT] to convert to EL format, or [CANCEL] to abort the operation.
If the remaining memory of the floppy disk is insufficient, conversion cannot be
executed. (An error message appears and the operation is cancelled.)
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Converting EL format to ELS
You can convert the songs in the floppy disk created with an EL-series Electone, such as
the EL-900, to the ELS-01/01C/01X format, and save it to a SmartMedia card or USB
flash memory. If you are using the ELS-01, you’ll need to install the optional UD-
FD01 floppy disk drive. Depending on the original song, the sound or tempo of the
converted song may differ from the original data, or the Next Song function of the
original song may not be effective.
Insert the floppy disk that contains the song you want to convert
to ELS format, then select the source song.
For details on selecting a song, see page 96.
In the TOOLS Page, press the [CONVERT EL ➞ ELS] button to call
up the Convert display.
NOTE
If the source song’s name
contains full size characters
or Japanese characters, the
converted song name will be
shown with question marks
(such as “????”).
3
4
Reference Page
Installing the Floppy Disk
Drive (page 221)
NOTE
When you convert the
protected EL data to ELS
format, set the write-protect
tab of the EL disk to the
“overwrite” position (tab
closed).
1
2
NOTE
When converting a protected
EL song to the ELS-01/01C/
01X format, make sure to use
a SmartMedia card with ID or
USB flash memory.
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
126
Music Data Recorder (MDR)
7
Confirm that the desired song to be converted is shown in upper
half of the display.
If you want to change the song, press the [CHANGE] button of the Change
From section to call up the Song Select display and select the desired song.
Press the [CHANGE] button of the Change To section in the
display, then select the destination.
The specified destination location must be within the range of Song 1 - 100 in
the SmartMedia card or USB flash memory. If a destination is not selected, an
empty song is automatically set as the destination.
Press the [EXECUTE] button in the display to start conversion.
A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. Select
[CONVERT] to convert to EL format, or [CANCEL] to abort the operation.
If the remaining memory of the SmartMedia is insufficient, conversion cannot
be executed. (An error message appears and the operation is cancelled.)
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Checking the Remaining Memory
In the TOOLS Page, press the [REMAINING MEMORY] button. This allows you to
check the remaining memory in the media and the song data capacity of the currently
selected song.
3
4
5
8
Voice Edit
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
127
Voice Edit
This Electone has a Voice Edit feature that allows you to create your own Voices.
We suggest that you read through the Voice Structure below at first to get a firmer
understanding of the Voices. Then go through the editing steps, reading Editing a Voice on
page 130 for editing of an AWM Voice, or page 135 for editing of a VA Voice.
The internal structure of the Voices of this Electone is explained below. Refer also to
“AWM Voices and VA Voices” (page 34).
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
AWM Voice structure
AWM Voices consist of up to four recorded samples of a real instrument.
Each waveform, referred to as an “Element,” can be edited, by changing the level
(volume), filter settings, and so on. A single Voice contains four boxes (AWM1 –
AWM4) in which the Elements are put. If a Voice consists of less than three Elements,
some boxes are empty. For example, Strings 1 consists of two Elements (as shown).
You can add Elements from other Voices – Brass, for example – if a box (AWM3 and/or
AWM4) is empty. This allows you to create your own original ensemble sounds. In the
Voice Edit function, you can edit not only each Element, but also assemble some
Elements from other Voices.
Contents
1 Voice Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
• AWM Voice structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
• VA Voice structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
2 Editing a Voice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
• Selecting a Voice for editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
• Editing an AWM Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
• Editing a VA Voice (only for ELS-01C/01X). . . . .135
3Saving the edited Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
4 Quitting Voice Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
5 Recalling an Edited Voice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
1
Voice Structure
Element 1 Element 2
Strings 1
AWM1 AWM2 AWM3 AWM4
8
8
Voice Edit
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
128
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
VA Voice structure
VA Voices are made by simulating the characteristic behavior of acoustic instruments.
You can edit the Voice’s volume and timbre. Moreover, you can also add AWM
Elements to a VA Voice to create your own original Voice.
VA Voices are available only on the Lead Voice 2 section of the ELS-01C/01X. All
Voices in the other Voice sections are AWM Voices.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Selecting a Voice for editing
Select the Voice you want to edit from the Voice Menu.
For example, if you want to edit Accordion 1, select [Accordion 1] in the Voice
Menu of the [ORGAN] button in any Voice section.
Mute all other Voice sections except for the targeted Voice section.
2
Editing a Voice
1
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1
BRILLIANCE
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
STRINGS BRASS TUTTI PAD SYNTH
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO ORGAN GUITAR CHOIR WORLD
PERCUS-
SION
1
2
8
Voice Edit
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
129
While holding down the [VOICE EDIT] button, press the Voice
button corresponding to the Voice you wish to edit.
If you press [VOICE EDIT] without selecting a Voice, the following display will
prompt you to complete the step. While this display appears, press the desired
Voice button.
After you have selected the Voice button, the AWM Page (first page of the Voice
Edit display) will appear if the selected Voice is an AWM Voice. If you have
selected a VA Voice, the VA Page will appear.
If you release the [VOICE EDIT] button before pressing a Voice button, the
Voice Edit function will not be called up, and the normal Voice Display will
appear.
2
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
UPPER KEYB
STRINGS BRASS T
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO ORGAN G
PERCUS-
SION
While holding down…
Press the Voice button.
The message “Voice data is too large to edit” may appear when you press the Voice
button while holding down the [VOICE EDIT]. If this message appears, select
another Voice.
8
Voice Edit
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
130
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Editing an AWM Voice
You can edit an AWM Voice on the AWM Page and LAYER Page in the Voice Edit
display. In the AWM Page, the tonal balance of the entire Voice can be corrected by
some EQ parameters. In the LAYER Page, you can make detailed edits to each
Element.
1 Element On/Off switches
The [AWM1] – [AWM4] buttons indicate the Elements which make up the selected
Voice, and the [VA] button indicates the VA tone generator (the VA button is grayed
out when you are editing an AWM Voice). You can mute any of the Elements by simply
pressing the corresponding button. Pressing the button again cancels the mute.
2 EQ LOW FREQ./EQ LOW GAIN
Sets the frequency and gain (level) of the low frequency band. The EQ LOW FREQ.
slider sets the desired frequency band over a range of 32 Hz – 2.0 kHz. The EQ LOW
GAIN slider sets the level for the frequency band (specified by the EQ LOW FREQ.
slider) over a range of -12 dB – +12 dB.
3 EQ HIGH FREQ./EQ HIGH GAIN
Sets the frequency and gain (level) of the high frequency band. The EQ HIGH FREQ.
slider sets the desired frequency band over a range of 500 Hz – 16.0 kHz. The EQ
HIGH GAIN slider sets the level for the frequency band (specified by the EQ HIGH
FREQ. slider) over a range of -12 dB – +12 dB.
EQ (Equalizer)
Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from amps or speakers to
match the special character of the room. The sound is divided into several frequency
bands, then by raising or lowering the level for each band, the correction is made.
This Electone has a two-band (high and low) digital equalizer that lets you adjust
the overall sound according to the type of music you play — classical music being
more refined and soft, pop music more crisp, and rock music more dynamic.
23
1
AWM Page
8
Voice Edit
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
131
1 Element select buttons
Select the Element you wish to edit.
2 Element On/Off switches
The [AWM1] – [AWM4] buttons indicate the Elements which make up the selected
Voice, and the [VA] button indicates the VA tone generator (the [VA] button is grayed
out when you are editing an AWM Voice). You can mute any of the Elements by simply
pressing the corresponding button. Pressing the button again cancels the mute. Muting
all other Elements except for the one you are editing lets you clearly hear that single
Element for ease in editing. Note that when some Elements are muted, playing the
keyboard in certain key areas or with certain velocities may result in no sound.
3 Display switch buttons
The LAYER Page contains three pages. The buttons are used to switch among
them.
1 VOICE/ELEMENT
Indicates the Voice/Element currently being edited. For example, the screen above
shows that Element 1 of Accordion 1 is being edited.
You can also call up another Element from another Voice and replace the currently
selected Element with it. Pressing the VOICE or ELEMENT button in the display
calls up the Voice or Element menu, from which you can select the desired Voice/
Element.
3
2
1
LAYER Page
LAYER Page 1
2
1
3 4
These buttons
switch the
display.
8
Voice Edit
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
132
2 LEVEL
Determines the output level of the Element.
Range: 0 – 127
3 NOTE LIMIT
Determines the lowest and highest notes in the range for which the Element sounds.
The setting of the HIGH slider cannot be set lower than that of the LOW slider. Some
Elements are not affected by this parameter.
Range: C-2 – G8
4 PAN
Determines the position of the Element in the stereo image.
Range: L64 – R63
1 NOTE SHIFT
Determines the pitch settings in semitones.
Range: -64 – +63
2 TUNE FINE
Determines the fine tuning.
Range: -64 – +63
3 ATTACK RATE
Determines how quickly the Element will reach its maximum level after the key is
played. Higher values produce a faster attack.
Range: 0 – 127
4 RELEASE RATE
Determines how much time it takes for the level to reach 0 after the key is released.
Higher values make the time shorter.
Range: 1 – 127
LAYER Page 2
3 45612
Reference Page
Envelope Parameters
(page 136)
8
Voice Edit
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
133
5 CUTOFF FREQ.
Determines the cutoff frequency of the filter.
Range: 9600 – 24000 cent
6 RESONANCE
Determines the amount of resonance (harmonic emphasis) applied to the signal at the
cutoff frequency. Some Elements are not affected by this parameter.
Range: 16 – 140
Filter — Cutoff frequency and Resonance
Filter modifies the tone by cutting the output of a specific frequency portion of the
sound. This Electone is equipped with a low pass filter, which passes only those
signals below the cutoff frequency and cuts signals above the cutoff frequency.
You can produce a relatively bright or darker sound by setting the cutoff frequency.
Resonance is a parameter that boosts the level of the signal in the area of the cutoff
frequency. By emphasizing the overtones in this area, this can produce a distinctive
“peaky” tone.
Level
Level
Cutoff Frequency
Cutoff Frequency
Frequency
Frequency
Resonance
These frequencies are passed by the filter.
8
Voice Edit
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
134
1 LFO WAVE
Determines the LFO waveform used to vary the sound. For details, see page 135.
2 LFO SPEED
Determines the speed of the LFO waveform. Higher values make the speed faster.
Range: 2 – 93
3 LFO PMD (Pitch Modulation Depth)
Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform varies the pitch of the sound.
Higher values result in a greater amount of pitch change. For the minimum setting, the
pitch does not change.
Range: 0 – 400
4 LFO FMD (Frequency Modulation Depth)
Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform varies the filter cutoff frequency.
Higher values result in a greater amount of frequency change. For the minimum
setting, the frequency does not change.
Range: 0 – 4800 cent
5 LFO AMD (Amplitude Modulation Depth)
Determines the amount by which the LFO waveform varies the amplitude of the
sound. Higher values result in a greater amount of amplitude change. For the
minimum setting, the amplitude does not change.
Range: 0 – 128
When playing a User Voice you have created using the LFO parameters (above), set the
Vibrato setting in the Voice Condition display to “Preset,” not “User.” If Vibrato is set
to “User” and the Vibrato parameters (depth and/or speed) are set fairly high, you may
not be able to hear the effect of the LFO.
LAYER Page 3
3 4 51 2
Reference Page
Vibrato (page 41)
8
Voice Edit
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
135
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Editing a VA Voice (only for ELS-01C/01X)
You can edit a VA Voice in the VA Page of the Voice Edit display. If you are using the
ELS-01, the VA Page cannot be selected.
1 Element On/Off switches
The [AWM1] – [AWM4] buttons indicate the Elements which make up the selected
Voice, and the [VA] button indicates the VA tone generator. You can mute any of the
Elements by simply pressing the corresponding button. Pressing the button again
cancels the mute. AWM buttons are grayed out when you are editing a VA Voice since
VA Voices do not contain Elements. However, you can add AWM Elements to a VA
sound in the LAYER Page if you want. See page 131.
2 LEVEL
Determines the level of the VA sound.
Range: 0 – 127
LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator)
As its name suggests, the LFO creates waveforms of a low frequency.
These waveforms can be used to vary the pitch, filter or amplitude to create effects
such as vibrato, wah and tremolo.
The following five waveforms are available.
tri
squ
rnd sine
saw
VA Page
3 4 5 6 72
1
8
Voice Edit
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
136
3 ATTACK RATE
Determines how quickly the sound will reach its maximum level after the key is played.
Lower values produce a slower attack.
Range: -64 – +63
4 DECAY RATE
Determines how much time it takes to reach its second level from the first (maximum)
level.
Range: -64 – +63
5 RELEASE RATE
Determines how much time it takes for the level to reach 0 after the key is released.
Positive value makes the time shorter and negative value makes it longer.
Range: -64 – +63
6 EQ LOW
Determines the level (volume) of the low range frequencies. Positive values boost or
increase the level, while negative values decrease or cut it.
Range: -64 – +63
7 EQ HIGH
Determines the level (volume) of the high range frequencies. Positive values boost or
increase the level, while negative values decrease or cut it.
Range: -64 – +63
Reference Page
EQ (Equalizer); (page 130)
Envelope Parameters
The level envelope lets you control the transition in volume from the moment a
note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment the sound stops. The parameters
2 – 5 above are envelope-related parameters.
2
Level
4
Decay
Rate
Level
(volume)
5
Release
Rate
Time
Pressing the key
Releasing the key
3
Attack
Rate
8
Voice Edit
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
137
Edited AWM Voices can be saved as User Voices (up to sixteen), and edited VA Voices
can be saved as VA Custom Voices (up to six).
Press the [SAVE] button at the top right of the display to call up
the SAVE Page.
Select the User Voice number or VA Custom Voice number you
wish to save to.
The message appears to prompt confirmation of the operation. (Saving a new
Voice automatically erases the Voice previously stored to the selected User
number.)
(If necessary) Press the [RENAME] button to give a name to your
original Voice.
The method for editing the name is the same as the one for the song name in the
M.D.R. section. (See page 104 for more information.) Up to sixteen characters
can be entered.
Press the [SAVE] button to save the Voice, or press [CANCEL] to
abort the operation.
After saving the Voice, be sure to quit the Voice Edit function (page 138) before
turning the power off. Turning off the Electone without quitting Voice Edit erases the
User Voice you have edited.
3
Saving the edited Voice
1
When saving User Voices (AWM) When saving VA Custom Voices (VA)
This operation automatically erases any Voice that had been previously
saved to the selected User Voice number or VA Custom Voice number. Be
careful not to erase any important data. Always save your important data in
advance to a SmartMedia card or other external media using the M.D.R.
function.
2
3
4
8
Voice Edit
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
138
You can quit the Voice Edit function from any of its display pages.
Press the [VOICE EDIT] button on the panel.
If your original Voice has already been saved, the Voice Edit function quits
automatically. If the edited Voice has not been saved, a message appears
prompting confirmation of the operation.
Select [EXIT] to quit the Voice Edit function, or [CANCEL] to
about the operation and return to the previous display.
Once your original AWM Voice has been saved, it can be selected from the User button
in each Voice section. Refer to chapter 2, “Selecting Voices from the User buttons”
(page 28).
Once your original VA Voice has been saved, it can be selected from the
[VA CUSTOM] button in LEAD VOICE 2. Refer to chapter 2, “Selecting Voices with
the Voice buttons” (page 23).
4
Quitting Voice Edit
When quitting Voice Edit, the square at the top left of the display turns light
blue for a few seconds, indicating that the Voice you have created is
currently being saved. Do not turn the power off while the Voice is being
saved.
5
Recalling an Edited Voice
1
2
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 1
BRILLIANCE
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
VOLUME
MAX
MIN
STRINGS BRASS TUTTI PAD SYNTH
WOOD-
WIND
PIANO ORGAN GUITAR CHOIR WORLD
PERCUS-
SION
1
2
BRILLIANT
MELLOW
MAX
MIN
BRILLIANCE VOLUME
LEAD VOICE 2
VA VA
ACOUS-
TIC
VIRTUAL
VA VA
ELEC-
TRONIC
SOLO
(KNEE)
CUSTOM
1
9
Rhythm Program
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
139
Rhythm Program
The Electone includes powerful rhythm programming functions: Rhythm Pattern Program
and Rhythm Sequence Program. Rhythm Pattern Program allows you to record your own
original rhythms and save them as user rhythms. Rhythm Sequence Program lets you
connect the existing rhythms or your original rhythms to create complete rhythm tracks,
which you can automatically play back during your performance. Moreover, Rhythm
Sequence Program includes an automatic Registration Shift feature — called Registration
Sequence.
Contents
1 Outline of the Rhythm Programming Operation. 139
2Rhythm Pattern Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
• Entering the Rhythm Pattern Program . . . . . . . . . . 140
• Basic settings for the Rhythm Pattern . . . . . . . . . . 142
• Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern
– Step Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
• Editing Entered Percussion Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
• Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern
– Real Time Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
• Creating Backing Patterns (Rhythmic Chord Function)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
• Changing the Voices for Accompaniment Parts. . . 157
• Adjusting Volume and Panning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
• Effect Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
• Detailed settings for each percussion instrument . 162
• Saving Rhythm Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
• Quitting the Rhythm Pattern Program . . . . . . . . . . . 165
• Recalling User Rhythm Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
• Selecting Rhythm from an External Media . . . . . . . 166
• Percussion Kit List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
3Rhythm Sequence Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
• Selecting a Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
• Programming a Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
• Auditioning a Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
• Editing an Existing Rhythm Sequence . . . . . . . . . . 173
• Programming a Registration Sequence . . . . . . . . . 175
• Editing an Existing Registration Sequence. . . . . . . 176
• Quitting the Rhythm Sequence Program . . . . . . . . 177
• Playing Rhythm Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
• Playing All Sequences in Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
4Saving Rhythm Pattern and Rhythm Sequence
Data to external media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
1
Outline of the Rhythm Programming Operation
Entering percussion sounds and/or editing them
Creating the backing (Rhythmic Chord) patterns and/or editing them
Effect settings and detailed settings for each percussion Voice (Panning, Tuning, and so on)
Saving your rhythm patterns as User rhythms
Selecting the destination of the sequence
Entering a rhythm pattern one by one
Programming the Registration Sequence
Rhythm Pattern Program (pages 140 – 164)
You can create your original rhythm patterns by entering percussion sounds or editing preset
rhythm patterns.
Rhythm Sequence Program (pages 170 – 177)
You can connect any of the rhythms together to make complete rhythm compositions. Moreover,
you can also program Registration Shift events at any point in the composition so that the
Registration Memory settings automatically change as the rhythm sequence plays back.
9
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
140
9
Rhythm Program
Rhythm Pattern Program lets you use any of the different instrument sounds (drum
and percussion) assigned to each key on the Upper and Lower keyboards in creating
your own rhythms. Up to 48 of your original rhythms can be saved as User Rhythms.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Entering the Rhythm Pattern Program
There are two ways to program a User pattern: copying a preset rhythm that is similar
to the rhythm you want to create, and creating your own rhythm from scratch.
To copy a preset rhythm:
Copying a preset rhythm lets you make changes to an existing rhythm, saving you time
if you want to program a rhythm that is similar to an existing preset pattern.
Select the rhythm you want to copy from the Rhythm Menu.
While holding down the [PATTERN] button in the panel (the
display prompts you to select a rhythm), select the Rhythm
button that contains the preset rhythm to be copied to the
Rhythm Pattern Program.
2
Rhythm Pattern Program
1
2
NOTE
Pressing the [PATTERN]
button while the rhythm is
running automatically stops
the rhythm.
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
MARCH
LATIN
WORLD
MUSIC
BALLAD ROCK
DANCE
WALT Z POPS R & B
SWING&
JAZZ
2
1
1
RHYTHM
VOLUME
SEQ.
2
SEQ.
3
SEQ.
4
SEQ.
MAX
MIN
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
141
9
Rhythm Program
To create your own rhythm from scratch:
Press the [PATTERN] button and release it without selecting a Rhythm button.
A blank pattern is loaded to the Rhythm Pattern Program.
A Rhythm consists of 15 sections: Intro 1 – 3, Main A – D, Fill In A – D, Ending 1 – 3, and Break.
In Rhythm Pattern Program, you can enter or edit percussion notes one by one, or assemble each part from
other different rhythms to create your own new User Rhythm.
Case 1: Creating your own rhythm by changing a preset rhythm
Case 2: Creating your own rhythm by assembling parts from other different
rhythms
Case 3: Creating your own rhythm from scratch
Intro 1
2
3
Main A
B
C
D
Fill In A
B
C
D
Ending 1
2
3
Break
Intro 1'
2
3
Main A
B
C
D
Fill In A
B
C
D
Ending 1
2
3
Break
Preset Rhythm User Rhythm
Changing Intro 1
to Intro 1'
Save as
a User Rhythm
All Rhythm sections, including any which have not
been edited, are saved as one User Rhythm.
Intro 1
2
3
Main A
B
C
D
Fill In A
B
C
D
Ending 1
2
3
Break
Intro 1
2
3'
Main A
B
C'
D'
Fill In A
B
C'
D'
Ending 1
2
3
Break'
Preset Rhythm
Intro 1'
2'
3'
Main A'
B'
C'
D'
Fill In A'
B'
C'
D'
Ending 1'
2'
3'
Break'
Preset Rhythm
Save as
a User Rhythm
User Rhythm
Assemble some
sections or parts
Intro 1
2
3
Main A
B
C
D
Fill In A
B
C
D
Ending 1
2
3
Break
Intro 1
2
3
Main A
B
C
D
Fill In A
B
C
D
Ending 1
2
3
Break
Blank Rhythm User Rhythm
Entering percussion
sounds into
each section
Save as
a User Rhythm
These are blank sections (no percussion sounds);
if you press ENDING [2] or [3] button, no sound is played.
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
142
9
Rhythm Program
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Basic settings for the Rhythm Pattern
In the SETTING Page of the display, set the conditions of the rhythm, such as time
signature, measure length, and so on. You can also customize the part settings in this
SETTING Page — deleting any part or copying a part from another rhythm to the
currently selected rhythm.
Press the [SETTING] button in the display to call up the SETTING
Page.
Determines the time signature used for the rhythm.
You can select the time signature with the BEAT buttons.
If you start the Rhythm Pattern Program from a preset rhythm, pressing a BEAT
button that is not the same as the currently selected rhythm calls up the
following message.
Selecting [CLEAR] deletes all data in the rhythm and changes the time
signature.
Select [CANCEL] to abort the operation.
1
2
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
143
9
Rhythm Program
Select a section to which you want to enter or edit the rhythm
pattern.
Pressing the SECTION button on the display calls up the Section Select pop-up
menu. After selecting the desired section, the pop-up menu automatically closes.
You can play the selected section by pressing the Rhythm [START] button on
the panel. You can also change the section while the rhythm is playing. For
details on muting the accompaniment part, refer to page 158.
Sets the measure length of the rhythm pattern.
Pressing the MEASURE button on the display calls up the Measure Select pop-
up menu. Select the desired measure in the pop-up menu. If you select Break or
Fill In as the section, the measure cannot be changed.
(If necessary) Set the Metronome, Part Assemble, and Part Clear
parameters.
1 METRONOME
Turns the metronome click on or off. When set to ON, the metronome sounds on each
beat of the measure (for example, three times per measure in 3/4 time) to serve as a
rhythmic guide when programming patterns. Set to On here with Real Time Write.
3
4
5
1
2
3
Reference Pages
Step Write and Real Time
Write (page 145)
Entering Percussion Sounds
to a Rhythm Pattern – Real
Time Write (page 153)
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
144
9
Rhythm Program
2 ASSEMBLE
Copies the part from another rhythm to the currently selected rhythm. You can
assemble various sections from multiple rhythms to create your original rhythm.
Pressing the [ASSEMBLE] button calls up the following display.
Select the copy source: Rhythm, Section and Part. Then select the destination. You can
copy only one part, or all parts of a rhythm.
After setting the source and destination, press [EXECUTE]. Copy is executed and
returning to the previous display.
3 CLEAR PART
Clears a specific part or parts from the currently selected rhythm. Pressing this button
calls up the following display.
Select the part you want to delete from the displayed parts. You cannot select a part
that contains no data (the button is grayed out). If you select [ALL] here, the
percussion and all accompaniment parts are cleared.
When selecting the desired part, a display prompting confirmation of the operation
appears. Select [CLEAR] to execute the operation, or select [CANCEL] to abort the
operation.
Select copy source
(Rhythm, Section,
and Part)
Select the part for
the copy destination
Press here to execute the copy
Reference Page
Accompaniment (page 61)
NOTE
If you select BASS here, the
bass phrase in the A.B.C. will
be cleared.
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
145
9
Rhythm Program
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern – Step Write
You can enter percussion sounds in the INPUT Page of the display. Before entering
percussion sounds, turn off the Upper and Lower keyboard Voices by setting each
Voice’s volume to MIN.
Press the [INPUT] button at the top of the display to call up the
INPUT Page.
Select the part, MAIN DRUM or ADD DRUM, to which you want to
enter the percussion.
In general, main (or basic) drum/percussion instruments (such as Bass Drum,
Snare Drum, and so on) are entered in Main Drum part and others (such as
Tambourine, Triangle) are entered in Add Drum part.
Step Write and Real Time Write
There are two different methods you can use to program rhythms: Step Write and Real
Time Write.
Step Write allows you to enter percussion sounds as individual note values. As a
method, it is very similar to writing down the notes on a sheet of music paper; each note
is entered one at a time, and though you can hear each individual note entered, you
cannot actually hear the pattern playing as you create it. Step Write is good for precision
and for entering percussion sounds whose note placement and rhythmic value has been
determined, such as a bass drum that plays every beat in a measure.
Real Time Write on the other hand, is similar to using a multi-track tape recorder; you
can hear previously recorded parts of the pattern as you record new parts on top. Real
Time Write is best for capturing the “feel” of a rhythm, because it allows you to actually
play the pattern as you are creating it.
Each method has its own advantages and uses. Which method you use depends partly
on the type of rhythm you intend to create and partly on your own personal preference.
You can switch between the two methods in editing to create a single rhythm by the use
of both methods. This would come handy, for example, in programming the basic beats
of a rhythm with Step Write, then using Real Time Write to add percussion accents and
embellishments.
Which mode of the operation is selected depends on the play status of the rhythm. If
the rhythm is stopped, Step Write is automatically selected. If the rhythm is playing,
Real Time Write is selected. See the instructions below for Step Write, and page 153 for
Real Time Write.
NOTE
The volume of the percussion
and accompaniment sound
during use of Rhythm Pattern
Program can be controlled
with the VOLUME button of
the RHYTHM section. When
you quit Rhythm Pattern
Program, the VOLUME of the
RHYTHM section will return
to the previous selected
level.
1
2
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
146
9
Rhythm Program
Select the desired Drum Kit.
You can select a kit from 20 Drum kits and 5 SFX kits. For details on each kit,
see page 167. Pressing the button indicating the currently selected kit calls up
the kit Select the pop-up menu, then select the desired kit from the pop-up
menu. The selected kit is called up on the Upper and Lower keyboards.
You can select only one kit for each part (Main Drum or Add Drum). When you
want to create a rhythm pattern including two different drum kits, select one kit
for Main Drum and another for Add Drum.
Select the percussion sound you wish to enter by pressing the
key on the Upper or Lower keyboard that corresponds to the
sound.
The selected instrument’s name appears on the display.
Set the appropriate Quantize value.
For details on Quantize, refer to page 152.
3
Drum kit SFX kit
4
Instrument name
Selected key
5
NOTE
The Quantize setting can be
changed in the middle of
Step Write.
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
147
9
Rhythm Program
Set the Gate Time. (This is optional, and only necessary when
you want to enter a sustaining sound, such as a whistle.)
For a list of instruments that require a Gate Time setting, refer to the Percussion
Kit List on page 167. For details on Gate Time, refer to page 156.
Use the ACCENT buttons to enter the sound to the selected point.
Press each ACCENT button to actually enter the percussion
sounds.
You can change the rhythm clock to which the percussion sound is entered by
pressing the QUANTIZE [E][F] buttons.
1 Rhythm Clock box
Displays the current position in the pattern according to measure, beat, and number of
clicks.
A click is the smallest division of a pattern, and one beat is made up of 480 clicks.
The rhythm clock advances up to the measures set in the SETTING Page and loops
back to the beginning of the rhythm (01:01:000).
2 ACCENT buttons
Records the instrument and determines its volume or Accent level. Press one of the
ACCENT buttons you wish to set (“ppp” is softer and “fff ” is louder; “REST” is no
sound). The instrument is automatically inserted at the Accent level to the selected
position in the pattern. Selection of an Accent level automatically advances the rhythm
clock by one step, according to the current Quantize resolution value.
3 QUANTIZE [E][F] controls
Each press of the buttons advances or reverses the rhythm clock by one step. The size of
a single step is determined by the Quantize value.
Repeat steps #4 through #7 above to layer each instrument and
complete your own rhythm.
6
7
1
32
Reference Page
Basic settings for the Rhythm
Pattern (page 142)
8
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
148
9
Rhythm Program
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Editing Entered Percussion Notes
You can change the accent level, position, or gate time of the entered sound, or delete
the entered sound.
To change the accent level of an entered note:
Select the desired note for changing the accent level.
1 NEXT INSTRUMENT
Selects the entered instruments one by one, from left key to right.
2 NOTE [E][F] controls
Selects the previous/next position’s note of the currently selected instrument. In the
above notes for example, you can select notes 1, 3 and 4 one by one. Rests (2 and
5) are ignored.
3 QUANTIZE [E][F] controls
Advances or reverses the rhythm clock by one step. The size of a single step is
determined by the Quantize value.
1
213
123 4 5
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
149
9
Rhythm Program
Change the accent level by using the ACCENT buttons or Accent
box.
The Accent box allows for finer changes.
1 Accent box
Touch on the box to enable the Accent box.
Turning the Data Control dial changes the accent level over a range of 0 – 127.
The minimum setting results in no sound.
2 ACCENT buttons
Determines the coarse accent level. Eight accent levels (from “ppp” to “fff”) are
available.
Press the desired Accent button to change the currently selected note to the selected
level.
To move an entered note:
Select the note you want to move (as in Step 1 on page 148).
Press the Rhythm Clock box to enable the box.
Turn the Data Control dial to change the position by one clock.
2
1
2
1
2
3
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
150
9
Rhythm Program
To change the length of an entered note:
The length of sustaining sounds such as Snare Roll and Whistle can be changed by
adjusting the Gate Time. See page 157 for more information.
To erase an entered note:
Select the note you want to erase (as in Step 1 on page 148).
Press the [REST] button in the ACCENT section of the display.
The selected note is deleted and replaced with a rest.
You can also erase all notes of a single instrument, or all notes entered.
To erase one instrument:
Select the key to which the instrument that you want to erase is
assigned.
The key name you have selected and its instrument name are displayed.
Press [CLEAR] in the display.
The following display appears, prompting confirmation of the operation.
1
2
1
Instrument name
Selected key
2
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
151
9
Rhythm Program
Select [CLEAR] to erase the selected instrument.
A bell sound indicates that the instrument has been erased.
The following method can also be used to erase one instrument.
While holding down the [CLEAR] button, press the key on the
keyboard corresponding to the instrument you wish to erase.
A bell sound indicates that the instrument has been erased.
To erase all instruments:
Press [CLEAR] in the display.
The following display appears, prompting confirmation of the operation.
Select [CLEAR ALL] to erase all instruments.
All instruments are instantly erased.
When you want to replace the instrument you have already entered with another
instrument, it’s not necessary to delete and re-enter. You can quickly replace the sound
with the following procedure.
To replace the instrument:
Before the operation, stop the rhythm.
Select the key to which the instrument you want to replace is
assigned.
The key name you have selected and its instrument name are displayed.
Simultaneously hold down the [CHANGE] button in the display
and press the key on the Upper or Lower keyboard that
corresponds to the instrument you want to use.
The instrument is instantly erased and replaced with the newly selected one.
3
1
2
1
Instrument name
Selected key
2
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
152
9
Rhythm Program
About Quantize
The Quantize function is a process of rounding off timing or duration values, so
that each note plays with precise timing. You can select nine types of Quantize
value.
With Step Write
It allows you to automatically correct the length (duration) and timing of each note
you enter.
Steps Depending on the Quantize Values
With Real Time Write
It allows you to automatically correct the timing of the notes you play, according to
the specified Quantize resolution. No correction occurs when you select FREE.
Generally, you should set Quantize to be the same as the shortest note you intend to
play.
1234 5
6789 5
With this button,
change the displayed
Quantize buttons
0 120 240 360 480
(1 beat)
Clock
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
40
80
160
120
60
240
320
Setting Quantize to FREE (5) results in the finest, least amount of quantization (1/480 beat).
Original data (you play)
After applying a “ ” quantize value to the original data
Quarter note length
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
153
9
Rhythm Program
Entering Percussion Sounds to a Rhythm Pattern –
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Real Time Write
While you listen to the entered rhythm or metronome click, play the Upper/Lower
keyboards to enter the desired percussion sounds.
Select the desired part to which the percussion sounds are
entered, and the desired drum kit, by following Steps 1 – 3 on
page 145.
Set the appropriate Quantize value.
The positions at which the sounds are input will be corrected according to the
predetermined Quantize value in the Real Time Write operation. For details,
refer to page 152.
Press the rhythm [START] button in the panel.
The rhythm (or Metronome) starts playing, enabling the Real Time Write
operation.
While the rhythm is running, play the percussion sounds from the
Upper and/or Lower keyboards.
If you have started the Rhythm Pattern Program by copying a preset rhythm,
you can listen the selected rhythm as you play the sound. If you have started
from scratch, set the Metronome to “on” in the SETTING Page and listen to the
metronome click. The pattern will automatically repeat (or “loop”) for a certain
number of measures as set in the SETTING Page.
Repeat steps #2 through #4 above to layer each instrument and
complete your own rhythm.
1
2
3
4
Reference Page
Metronome (page 143)
5
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
154
9
Rhythm Program
You can erase an instrument while rhythm is played.
To erase an instrument/key assignment:
While holding down the [CLEAR] button, press the key on the keyboard
corresponding to the instrument you wish to erase. All instances of the selected
instrument will be erased from the pattern.
When you want to erase all instruments, or edit entered percussion notes, you need to
stop the rhythm then edit. See page 148, “Editing Entered Percussion Notes.”
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Creating Backing Patterns (Rhythmic Chord Function)
The Rhythm Pattern Program allows you to use one of the Electone’s Accompaniment
patterns with your original rhythm. You can select and save the Accompaniment
pattern that best matches the rhythm that you have created. Moreover, Rhythm Pattern
Program features a Rhythmic Chord function that lets you add your own backing
patterns to the rhythms you create.
To select an appropriate Accompaniment pattern for your newly
created rhythm:
Press the [SETTING] button at the top of the display to call up the
SETTING Page.
Press the [ASSEMBLE] button.
A pop-up menu appears, letting you select the copy source and destination part.
Using the COPY FROM [RHYTHM] and [SECTION] buttons, select
the rhythm and the section which has the accompaniment you
wish to use.
Using the COPY TO [PART] button, select the desired
accompaniment part (CHORD 1 or CHORD 2) to be used for the
Rhythmic Chord pattern.
Using the COPY FROM [PART] button, select the accompaniment
part you want to copy.
1
2
3
Reference Page
Basic settings for the Rhythm
Pattern (page 142)
4
5
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
155
9
Rhythm Program
Press the [EXECUTE] button to execute the copy.
The desired accompaniment part (Rhythmic Chord pattern) has been copied.
To create your own backing patterns with the Rhythmic Chord
function:
The Rhythmic Chord pattern can be entered by the same methods as the rhythm: Step
Write and/or Real Time Write.
Press the [INPUT] button at the top of the display to call up the
INPUT Page.
Select the part, CHORD 1 or CHORD 2, which you want to create
for the Rhythmic Chord pattern.
If the part you have select contains a preset accompaniment pattern, a message
appears prompting you to confirm whether you want to clear the existing data or
not. To create your own Rhythmic Chord pattern, select [CLEAR].
Select the desired Voice.
Pressing the button showing the Voice name calls up the relevant Voice Menu.
Select the desired Voice category with the instrument icon buttons, then select
the desired Voice from the Voice Menu. The selected Voice is called up for both
the Upper and Lower keyboards.
Voices can also be changed even after entering the Rhythmic Chord pattern.
You can select only one Voice for one part (Chord 1 or Chord 2). When you
want to create a Rhythmic Chord pattern including two different Voices, select
one Voice for Chord 1 and another for Chord 2.
6
1
2
3
NOTE
The Voice menu that appears
here is not the same as the
one for the Voice Sections.
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
156
9
Rhythm Program
Set the appropriate Quantize value.
For details on the Quantize function, refer to page 152.
Set the Gate Time.
You can adjust the Gate Time setting by using GATE TIME buttons
in the display, or Data Control dial.
Enter the Rhythmic Chord pattern.
The methods for entering the Rhythmic Chord pattern are the same as those for
entering the rhythm pattern. Any key you press sounds a C major triad chord
(C, E, and G). For information on Step Write, see page 147; for information on
Real Time Write, see page 153.
You can also edit the entered Rhythmic Chord pattern using the same method as in
“Editing Entered Percussion Notes” (page 148). To change the gate time of the notes of
the Rhythmic Chord pattern, follow the instructions below.
Gate time determines the actual length of time a note sounds. For example, a
quarter note is sometimes played as tenuto (long length) and sometimes played as
staccato (short length).
Since 1 beat is made up of 480 clocks, a quarter note played tenuto may have a gate
time between 450 – 470, and a staccato quarter note may be about 240.
4
5
DATA CONTROL
6
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
157
9
Rhythm Program
To change the Gate Time:
Select the note for which you want to change the gate time (see
Step 1 on page 148).
Press the Gate Time box to enable the box.
Turn the Data Control dial to change the Gate Time.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Changing the Voices for Accompaniment Parts
In Rhythm Pattern Program, you can create your original drum patterns using Main
Drum and Add Drum, and original backing patterns using Chord 1 and Chord 2.
Moreover, you can change the Voices for all accompaniment parts, including Pad,
Phrase 1 and Phrase 2.
Voices can be changed in the VOICE/EFFECT Page.
Press the [VOICE/EFFECT] button at the top of the display to call
up the VOICE/EFFECT Page.
Press the [VOICE] button in the display.
The following display will appear.
1
2
3
1
2
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
158
9
Rhythm Program
Select the desired part for which you wish to change the Voice.
The Voice menu appears.
Select the desired Voice, and the Voice menu automatically
closes.
After selecting the desired Voice, customize the accompaniment to your personal
preference by adjusting the volume and pan, and setting the desired effects below.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Adjusting Volume and Panning
Volume and Pan are set in VOICE/EFFECT Page.
1 ON/OFF
Determines the on/off status of each accompaniment part. When this is set to OFF, the
part is muted.
2 Volume sliders
Determines the volume of each accompaniment part.
Range: 0 – 127
3
4
NOTE
The Voice menu that appears
here is not the same as the
one for the Voice Sections.
1
2
VOLUME Display
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
159
9
Rhythm Program
Determines the position of each accompaniment part in the stereo image.
Range: L64 – R63
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Effect Settings
You can set Reverb, Chorus, and Variation effects as desired for your original rhythm.
Reverb adds a warm ambience to the sound, simulating the complex reflections of
actual performance spaces, such as a concert hall or a small club. Chorus provides a
wide variety of sound transformations and enhancements. Variation includes many
kinds of special effects for changing the sound, both subtly and radically. These effects
are set in the VOICE/EFFECT Page.
Determines the amount of reverb applied to each accompaniment part.
Range: 0 – 127
PAN Display
REVERB Display
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
160
9
Rhythm Program
1 CHORUS TYPE
Determines the type of the chorus effect. Pressing the CHORUS TYPE button calls up
the chorus type list.
Select the desired chorus type, and the list automatically closes.
2 Chorus sliders
Determines the amount of chorus effect applied to each accompaniment part.
Range: 0 – 127
1
2
CHORUS Display
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
161
9
Rhythm Program
1 VARIATION (Variation Effect Category)
Selects the effect category of the variation effect. Pressing the VARIATION button calls
up the effect category list.
Select the desired effect category, and the list automatically closes.
After changing the category, the variation type below automatically changes
corresponding to the selected category.
2 TYPE (Variation Type)
Determines the type of the variation effect. Pressing the TYPE button calls up the effect
type list.
Select the desired type, and the list automatically closes.
3 Variation sliders
Determines the amount of Variation effect applied to each accompaniment part.
Range: 0 – 127
1 2
3
VARIATION Display
Reference Page
Effect List (page 50)
LCD
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
162
9
Rhythm Program
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Detailed settings for each percussion instrument
You can independently adjust the settings of pan, pitch, reverb and volume for each
instrument.
Press the [DRUM SETUP] button at the top of the display to call
up the DRUM SETUP Page.
Select the desired part, Main Drum or Add Drum.
Press the appropriate key (the key to which the instrument to be
changed is assigned).
The selected instrument’s name is shown on the display and you can change its
settings.
Adjust the parameters: Pan, Volume, Reverb and Pitch.
1
2
3
4
2
3 4 5 6
1
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
163
9
Rhythm Program
1 Percussion Kit Name
Indicates the currently selected kit. Pressing this button calls up the Percussion Kit list,
letting you select the desired kit. When you change the kit, the instruments you have
already entered are replaced with the instruments of the newly selected kit.
2 PAN
Determines the position of the currently selected instrument in the stereo image.
Range: L63 – R63
3 VOLUME
Determines the volume of the currently selected instrument.
Range: 0 – 127
4 REVERB
Determines the amount of reverb applied to the currently selected instrument.
Range: 0 – 127
5 PITCH COARSE
Determines the pitch of the currently selected instrument, adjustable in semitone
(100-cent) steps.
Range: -64 – +63
6 PITCH FINE
Determines the pitch of the currently selected instrument, adjustable in 1-cent steps,
allowing more detailed tuning of the instrument than in PITCH COARSE (
5) above.
Range: -64 – +63
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Saving Rhythm Patterns
You can save your newly created rhythm pattern as a User Rhythm, up to a maximum
of 48 patterns.
If necessary, confirm the contents of the rhythm you want to
save.
For details, see page 164.
Press the [SAVE] button at the top right of the display to call up
the SAVE Page.
If the rhythm is playing, it will automatically be stopped.
Select the User Rhythm number to which you wish to save.
The following display appears, prompting confirmation of the operation.
Reference Page
Percussion Kit List
(page 167)
1
2
3
LCD
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
164
9
Rhythm Program
Press the [SAVE] button to save the pattern, or press [CANCEL]
to abort the operation.
After saving the Rhythm, be sure to quit Rhythm Pattern Program (page 165) before
turning the power off. Turning off the Electone without quitting Rhythm Pattern
Program erases the User Rhythm you have created.
Remaining Memory (amount of memory available for storing rhythms) is shown on
the display as a percentage.
When the pattern cannot be saved because of lack of available memory space, a
“Data full” message appears. Return to the previous page by pressing [OK] in this
case.
You should periodically save your rhythm as you are creating it and check the
amount of remaining memory. If the rhythm currently being edited cannot be saved
because of a lack of memory space, erase some of the less necessary percussion
sounds with the [CLEAR] button in the INPUT Page, and try saving the pattern
again.
Confirming rhythm patterns before saving
The rhythm pattern you have created will be saved with 15 sections collectively into
one rhythm. Before saving, we recommend that you confirm the contents of each
section.
Example: When saving the Main A and Main B sections you have created
into one user rhythm
First select “Main A” by using the [SECTION] button on the SETTING Page,
then press the [START] button on the panel. This lets you hear the Main A pattern
you have created. Confirm that the rhythm pattern is what you want to save as
Main A. Next, select “Main B” by using the [SECTION] button, then play it back
and confirm that this is what you want to save as Main B.
If the Main A and/or Main B patterns contain undesired data or no data, create the
desired data by using the Assemble function (page 144).
After confirming the desired section (Main A and Main B here), we recommend
that you confirm that all other sections contain no data. If unnecessary data is
contained in some sections which you don’t want to save, delete that unnecessary
data. This can reduce the data size of the user rhythm.
4
Remaining Memory
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
165
9
Rhythm Program
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Quitting the Rhythm Pattern Program
You can quit the Rhythm Pattern Program from any of its display pages.
Press the [PATTERN] button.
If a rhythm is playing, it will automatically be stopped.
If you leave Rhythm Pattern Program without having edited any patterns, this
simply quits the Rhythm Pattern Program.
If you have not saved the edited pattern, a message appears, prompting
confirmation of the operation.
Select [EXIT] to leave Rhythm Pattern Program, or [CANCEL] to
abort the operation and return to the previous display.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Recalling User Rhythm Patterns
The User rhythms you have created in the Rhythm Pattern Program can be selected
and played from the User buttons in the panel Rhythm section. Refer to Chapter 5,
“Selecting rhythms from the User buttons” (page 58).
When you leave the Rhythm Pattern Program, the square at the top left in the
display turns light blue for a few seconds, indicating that data is currently
being saved. Do not turn the power off while the data is being saved.
1
2
MARCH
LATIN
WORLD
MUSIC
BALLAD ROCK
DANCE
WALT Z POPS R & B
SWING&
JAZZ
2
1
1
RHYTHM
VOLUME
SEQ.
2
SEQ.
3
SEQ.
4
SEQ.
MAX
MIN
User Buttons
Select “USER”
category here.
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
166
9
Rhythm Program
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Selecting Rhythm from an External Media
You can load rhythms from a SmartMedia card, floppy disk or other external media
and edit and save them as User Rhythms. Data that can be loaded includes not only
that of the Electone, but also all Style File Format files.
Insert the media which contains the desired pattern into the card
slot or disk drive, or connect the appropriate device to the USB
TO DEVICE terminal.
Press the [PATTERN] button on the panel.
Press [FILE] at the top right in the display.
If you open the FILE Page while the rhythm is playing, the rhythm will
automatically be stopped.
Press the [SELECT] button to select the desired pattern file.
The method for selecting a file is the same as that in the M.D.R. section.
See page 96 for more information.
Press [EXECUTE] or press the highlighted, selected button again
to load the pattern.
To edit the loaded pattern, go to the INPUT Page (page 148), then save your
created pattern(s) as a User Rhythm (page 163).
1
2
3
4
About file types that can be loaded to the Electone
This Electone is compatible with Style File Format data.
The Style File Format (SFF) is Yamaha’s original style data
format, which uses a unique conversion system to provide
high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide
range of chord types. In this format, each rhythm pattern (called a “style”) is made
up of fifteen sections (Intro 1 – 3, Main A – D, Fill In A – D, Break, Ending 1 – 3)
as rhythm pattern variations. Each of these fifteen sections in turn has eight
different parts, made up of MIDI sequence data.
You can load any patterns (styles) which have been created by an SFF-compatible
instrument. Instruments compatible with SFF have the Style File Logo on the
panel.
5
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
167
9
Rhythm Program
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Percussion Kit List
*: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting.
Standard Kit 1
Live!Std Kit
Live!Std+P Kit
Standard Kit 2
Live!Funk Kit
Live!Funk+P Kit
Hit Kit Room Kit Rock Kit Electro Kit
Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute
Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open
Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q
Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap
Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H
Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L
Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap
Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise
Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click
Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell
Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L
Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H
Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap
Brush Swirl* Brush Swirl* Brush Swirl* Brush Swirl* Brush Swirl* Brush Swirl*
Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap
Brush Tap Swirl* Brush Tap Swirl* Brush Tap Swirl* Brush Tap Swirl* Brush Tap Swirl* Reverse Cymbal*
Snare Roll* Snare Roll* Snare Roll* Snare Roll* Snare Roll* Snare Roll*
Castanet Castanet Castanet Castanet Castanet Hi Q 2
Snare Soft Snare Soft 2 Snare Electro Snare Soft Snare Noisy Snare Snap Elec
Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks
Kick Soft Kick Soft Kick Tight L Kick Soft Kick Soft Kick 3
Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot H Snare Pitched Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot
Kick Tight Kick Tight Kick Wet Kick Tight Kick 2 Kick Gate
Kick Kick Short Kick Tight H Kick Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy
Side Stick Side Stick Light Stick Ambient Side Stick Side Stick Side Stick
Snare Snare Short Snare Ambient Snare Snappy Snare Rock Snare Noisy 2
Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap
Snare Tight Snare Tight H Snare Tight 2 Snare Tight Snap Snare Rock Tight Snare Noisy 3
Floor Tom L Floor Tom L Hybrid Tom 1 Tom Room 1 Tom Rock 1 To m Electro 1
Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed 2 Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H Floor Tom H Hybrid Tom 2 Tom Room 2 Tom Rock 2 Tom Electro 2
Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom Low Tom Hybrid Tom 3 Tom Room 3 Tom Rock 3 Tom Electro 3
Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open 2 Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L Mid Tom L Hybrid Tom 4 Tom Room 4 Tom Rock 4 Tom Electro 4
Mid Tom H Mid Tom H Hybrid Tom 5 Tom Room 5 Tom Rock 5 Tom Electro 5
Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom High Tom Hybrid Tom 6 Tom Room 6 Tom Rock 6 Tom Electro 6
Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Light Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine
Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal
Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2
Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H
Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L
Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute
Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open
Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L
Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H
Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L
Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H
Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L
Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa
Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas
Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H*
Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L*
Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short
Guiro Long* Guiro Long* Guiro Long* Guiro Long* Guiro Long* Guiro Long*
Claves Claves Claves Claves Claves Claves
Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H
Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L
Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Scratch H 2
Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Scratch L 2
Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute
Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open
Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker
Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells
Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree
C-1
D-1
E-1
F-1
G-1
A-1
B-1
C
-1
D
-1
F
-1
G
-1
A
-1
C0
D0
E0
F0
G0
A0
B0
C
0
D
0
F
0
G
0
A
0
C1
D1
E1
F1
G1
A1
B1
C
1
D
1
F
1
G
1
A
1
C2
D2
E2
F2
G2
A2
B2
C
2
D
2
F
2
G
2
A
2
C3
D3
E3
F3
G3
A3
B3
C
3
D
3
F
3
G
3
A
3
C4
D4
E4
F4
G4
A4
B4
C
4
D
4
F
4
G
4
A
4
C5
D5
E5
F5
G5
C
5
D
5
F
5
Upper KeyboardLower Keyboard
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
168
9
Rhythm Program
*: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting.
Analog Kit Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit
Live!Brush Kit
Live!Brush+P Kit
Symphony Kit EL Kit 1
Surdo Mute Kick Dance 1 Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Scratch
Surdo Open Kick Dance 2 Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Concert BD
Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Noise Percussion
Whip Slap Whip Slap* Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Bass Drum March
Scratch H Scratch Dance 1* Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Analog BD Short
Scratch L Scratch Dance 2* Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Synth Tom 3
Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Analog BD Long
Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Synth Tom 2
Metronome Click Dance Perc 1 Metronome Click Metronome Click Metronome Click Synth Bass Drum
Metronome Bell Reverse Dance 1 Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Metronome Bell Synth Tom 1
Seq Click L Dance Perc 2 Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Bass Drum Attack
Seq Click H Hi Q Dance 1 Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Bass Drum Heavy
Brush Tap Snare Analog 3 Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Tom 4
Brush Swirl* Vinyl Noise* Brush Swirl* Brush Swirl* Brush Swirl* Bass Drum Light
Brush Slap Snare Analog 4 Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap To m 3
Reverse Cymbal* Reverse Cymbal* Brush Tap Swirl* Brush Tap Swirl* Brush Tap Swirl* Orchestra Cymbal
Snare Roll* Reverse Dance 2* Snare Roll* Snare Roll* Snare Roll* Snare Drum Roll*
Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2 Castanet Castanet Castanet To m 2
Snare Noisy 4 Snare Techno Snare Jazz H Brush Slap 2 Snare Soft SD Brush Roll
Sticks Snare Dance 1 Sticks Sticks Sticks Tom 1
Kick 3 Kick Techno Q Kick Soft Kick Soft Kick Soft 2 SD Brush Shot 2
Open Rim Shot Rim Gate Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot To m Brush Shot 4
Kick Anlg Short Kick Techno L Kick Tight Kick Tight Gran Cassa SD Brush Shot 1
Kick Analog Kick Techno Kick Jazz Kick Jazz Gran Cassa Mute Snare Drum Heavy
Side Stick Anlg Side Stick Anlg Side Stick Light Side Stick Light Side Stick To m Brush Shot 3
Snare Analog Snare Clap Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3 Band Snare Snare Drum Light
Hand Clap Dance Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap To m Brush Shot 2
Snare Analog 2 Snare Dry Snare Jazz M Brush Tap 2 Band Snare 2 SD Accent 2
Tom Analog 1 Tom Dance 1 Floor Tom L Tom Brush 1 Floor Tom L SD Accent 1
Hat Close Analog Hi-Hat Closed 3 Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Tom Brush Shot 1
Tom Analog 2 Tom Dance 2 Floor Tom H Tom Brush 2 Floor Tom H SD Reverb 2
Hat Close Anlg 2 Hat Close Anlg 3 Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Snare Drum Rim 2
Tom Analog 3 Tom Dance 3 Low Tom Tom Brush 3 Low Tom SD Reverb 1
Hat Open Analog Hi-Hat Open 3 Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Snare Drum Rim 1
Tom Analog 4 Tom Dance 4 Mid Tom L Tom Brush 4 Mid Tom L Synth Snare Drum
Tom Analog 5 Tom Dance 5 Mid Tom H Tom Brush 5 Mid Tom H Analog SD
Crash Analog Crash Analog Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Hand Cymbal Triangle Mute
Tom Analog 6 Tom Dance 6 High Tom Tom Brush 6 High Tom Tambourine
Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Hand Cymbal S Triangle Open
Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Castanet
Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Claves
Tambourine Tambourine Anlg Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine
Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Cabasa
Cowbell Analog Cowbell Dance Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Hand Cymbal 2 Finger Snap
Vibraslap Vibraslap Analog Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Analog Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Hand Cymbal 2 S Hand Claps
Bongo H Bongo Analog H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Crash Cymbal 2
Bongo L Bongo Analog L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Hi-Hat Close
Conga Analog H Conga Analog H Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Crash Cymbal 1
Conga Analog M Conga Analog M Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Hi-Hat Open
Conga Analog L Conga Analog L Conga L Conga L Conga L Crash Cym Mute
Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Ride Cymbal 2
Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Hi-Hat Pedal 2
Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Ride Cymbal 1
Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Hi-Hat Pedal 1
Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Ride Cymbal Cup
Maracas 2 Maracas 2 Maracas Maracas Maracas
Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H* Samba Whistle H* Cym Brush Shot
Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L* Samba Whistle L* Cymbal March
Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Analog HH Close
Guiro Long* Guiro Long* Guiro Long* Guiro Long* Guiro Long* Orch Cymbal Roll
Claves 2 Claves 2 Claves Claves Claves Analog HH Open
Wood Block H Dance Perc 3 Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Orch Cymbal
Wood Block L Dance Perc 4* Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Orch Cymbal Mute
Scratch H 2 Dance Breath 1 Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute
Scratch L 2 Dance Breath 2* Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Ta m- Tam
Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Triangle Mute
Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open Triangle Open
Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker
Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells
Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree
C-1
D-1
E-1
F-1
G-1
A-1
B-1
C
-1
D
-1
F
-1
G
-1
A
-1
C0
D0
E0
F0
G0
A0
B0
C
0
D
0
F
0
G
0
A
0
C1
D1
E1
F1
G1
A1
B1
C
1
D
1
F
1
G
1
A
1
C2
D2
E2
F2
G2
A2
B2
C
2
D
2
F
2
G
2
A
2
C3
D3
E3
F3
G3
A3
B3
C
3
D
3
F
3
G
3
A
3
C4
D4
E4
F4
G4
A4
B4
C
4
D
4
F
4
G
4
A
4
C5
D5
E5
F5
G5
C
5
D
5
F
5
Upper KeyboardLower Keyboard
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
169
9
Rhythm Program
*: Indicates an instrument which requires the Gate Time setting.
EL Kit 2 Live!Studio Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 Arabic Kit Cuban Kit Pop Latin Kit
Maracas High Surdo Mute
Surdo Mute Surdo Open
Maracas Low Hi Q
Surdo Muff Whip Slap
Surdo Rim Scratch H
Cuica High Scratch L Hand Clap
Surdo Open Finger Snap
Cuica Middle Click Noise
Tamborim Mute Metronome Click
Cuica Low Metronome Bell Conga H Tip Conga H Tip
Tamborim Open Seq Click L Conga H Heel Conga H Heel
Pandeiro Seq Click H Nakarazan Dom Conga H Open Conga H Open
Bongo High Brush Tap Cabasa Conga H Mute Conga H Mute
Conga Slide Brush Swirl* Nakarazan Edge Conga H SlapOpen Conga H SlapOpen
Bongo Low Brush Slap Hager Dom Conga H Slap Conga H Slap
Conga Slap Brush Tap Swirl* Hager Edge Conga H SlapMute Conga H SlapMute
Conga Muff Snare Roll* Bongo H Conga L Tip Conga L Tip
Bongo Mute Castanet Bongo L Conga L Heel Conga L Heel
Conga High Snare Studio L Conga H Mute Conga L Open Conga L Open
Bongo Slap Sticks Conga H Open Conga L Mute Conga L Mute
Conga Low Kick Ambience H Conga L Conga L SlapOpen Conga L SlapOpen
Open Rim Shot Zagrouda H Conga L Slap Conga L Slap
Timbale 1 High Kick Ambience L Zagrouda L* Conga L Slide* Conga L Slide*
Timbale 1 Low Kick Studio Cutting Noise 1* Phone Call* Kick Soft Bongo H Open 1 f Bongo H Open 1 f
Side Stick Cutting Noise 2* Door Squeak* Side Stick Bongo H Open 3 f Bongo H Open 3 f
Timbale 2 High Snare Studio M Door Slam* Snare Soft Bongo H Rim Bongo H Rim
Hand Clap String Slap* Scratch Cut* Arabic Hand Clap Bongo H Tip Bongo H Tip
Timbale 2 Low Snare Studio L Scratch H 3* Snare Drum Bongo H Heel Bongo H Heel
Timbale 3 High Floor Tom L Wind Chime* Floor Tom L Bongo H Slap Bongo H Slap
Woodblock High Hi-Hat Closed Telephone Ring* Hi-Hat Closed Bongo L Open 1 f Bongo L Open 1 f
Timbale 3 Low Floor Tom H Floor Tom H Bongo L Open 3 f Bongo L Open 3 f
Woodblock Mid Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Bongo L Rim Bongo L Rim
Timbale 4 High Low Tom Low Tom Bongo L Tip Bongo L Tip
Woodblock Low Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Bongo L Heel Bongo L Heel
Timbale 4 Low Mid Tom L Mid Tom L Bongo L Slap Bongo L Slap
Vibraslap Mid Tom H Mid Tom H Timbale L Open Timbale L Open
Triangle Mute Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1
Tambourine High Tom High Tom
Triangle Open Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1
Castanet Chinese Cymbal Flute Key Click* CarEngnIgnition* Crash Cymbal 2
Claves Ride Cymbal Cup Car Tires Squeal* Duhulla Dom Paila L Paila L
Tambourine Car Passing* Tambourine Timbale H Open Timbale H Open
Cabasa Splash Cymbal Car Crash* Duhulla Tak
Cowbell Siren* Cowbell
Finger Snap Crash Cymbal 2 Train* Duhulla Sak
Vibraslap Jet Plane* Claves
Ride Cymbal 2 Starship* Doff Dom Paila H Paila H
Wind Bell Down Bongo H Burst* Katem Dom Cowbell Top Cowbell Top
Agogo High Bongo L Roller Coaster* Katem Tak
Wind Bell Up Conga H Mute Submarine* Katem Sak
Agogo Low Conga H Open Katem Tak
Bells Conga L Doff Tak Guiro Short Guiro Short
Cowbell 4 Timbale H Tabla Dom Guiro Long* Guiro Long*
Shaker Timbale L Tabla Tak 1
Cowbell 3 Agogo H Tabla Tik
Guiro Short Agogo L Shower* Laugh* Tabla Tak 2 Tambourine Ta mbourine
Cowbell 2 Cabasa Thunder* Scream* Tabla Sak
Guiro Long Maracas Wind* Punch* Tabla Roll Edge*
Cowbell 1 Samba Whistle H* Stream* Heart Beat* Tabla Flam
Taiko 2 Samba Whistle L* Bubble* Foot Steps* Sagat 1 Maracas Maracas
Ohdaiko 2 Guiro Short Feed* Tabel Dom Shaker Shaker
Taiko 1 Guiro Long* Sagat 3 Cabasa Cabasa
Ohdaiko 1 Claves Tabel Tak Cuica Mute
Ohtsuzumi 2 Wood Block H Sagat 2 Cuica Open
Ohtsuzumi 1 Wood Block L Rik Dom
Kakegoe 3 Cuica Mute Rik Tak 2
Kotsuzumi 4 Cuica Open Rik Finger 1
Kakegoe 2 Triangle Mute Rik Tak 1
Kotsuzumi 3 Triangle Open Rik Finger 2 Triangle Mute
Kakegoe 1 Shaker Rik BrassTremolo* Triangle Open
Kotsuzumi 2 Jingle Bells Rik Sak
Kotsuzumi 1 Bell Tree Dog* Machine Gun* Rik Tik Wind Chime
Horse* Laser Gun*
Bird Tweet* Explosion*
Firework*
Ghost*
Maou*
C-1
D-1
E-1
F-1
G-1
A-1
B-1
C
-1
D
-1
F
-1
G
-1
A
-1
C0
D0
E0
F0
G0
A0
B0
C
0
D
0
F
0
G
0
A
0
C1
D1
E1
F1
G1
A1
B1
C
1
D
1
F
1
G
1
A
1
C2
D2
E2
F2
G2
A2
B2
C
2
D
2
F
2
G
2
A
2
C3
D3
E3
F3
G3
A3
B3
C
3
D
3
F
3
G
3
A
3
C4
D4
E4
F4
G4
A4
B4
C
4
D
4
F
4
G
4
A
4
C5
D5
E5
F5
G5
C
5
D
5
F
5
Upper KeyboardLower Keyboard
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
170
9
Rhythm Program
With the Rhythm Sequence Program function, you can string together any of the
Electone’s existing rhythms and the rhythms of your own creation together to make
complete rhythm compositions.
You can save four rhythm compositions (each can contain up to 140 bars) to the
Sequence buttons on the panel for future recall. Two or more rhythm compositions can
be played back in succession, letting you divide a song into parts and play back the
rhythm data as desired. Here are a couple of example applications:
• When you want to play more than two songs in a medley, save the rhythm
composition for each song to a separate sequence button. You can then recall each
desired song by simply pressing the corresponding sequence button to which the
song is saved.
• When you want to practice a song in separate sections (for example, separately
practicing the verse, chorus and bridge), divide the song into the relevant parts.
For example, save the intro part to the [SEQ. 1] button, the main chorus part to the
[SEQ. 2] button, the ending to the [SEQ. 3] button, and so on. Then, recall the
desired part simply by pressing the appropriate sequence button. You can also play
through a song by recalling all the parts in sequence.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Selecting a Sequence
There are two ways to program a rhythm sequence: copying an existing sequence that is
similar to the sequence you want to create, or creating your own sequence from scratch.
Press the [SEQUENCE] button in the DISPLAY SELECT section.
The MENU Page of the Sequence display appears.
Any rhythm currently playing will automatically be stopped when you call up
the Rhythm Sequence Program function.
3
Rhythm Sequence Program
1
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
171
9
Rhythm Program
Press one of the Sequence buttons ([SEQ. 1] – [SEQ. 4]) on the
left half in the display to select the rhythm sequence number you
want to edit.
The lamp of the selected numbered sequence button in the Rhythm section
lights.
Instead of pressing the Sequence button on the display, you can
press one of the sequence buttons in the Rhythm section on the
panel to select the sequence number.
This selects the Sequence number, to which a rhythm composition can be saved.
If you want to copy a rhythm composition from another Sequence number, go
on to the next step.
Press the Sequence button ([SEQ. 1] – [SEQ. 4]) of the copy
source on the right half in the display.
A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation.
Press [COPY] to execute the operation, or select [CANCEL] to
abort the operation.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Programming a Sequence
Press the [RHYTHM] button at the top right of the display to call
up the RHYTHM Page.
Press the rhythm button corresponding to the rhythm you want
to enter to the sequence. If you press User button [1] or [2], you
can select a rhythm of your own creation (User rhythm).
The rhythm menu of the selected rhythm button is displayed.
2
MARCH
LATIN
WORLD
MUSIC
BALLAD
WALTZ
SWING&
JAZZ
1
RHYTHM
SEQ.
2
SEQ.
3
SEQ.
4
SEQ.
3
4
1
2
MARCH
LATIN
WORLD
MUSIC
BALLAD ROCK
DANCE
WALT Z POPS R & B
SWING&
JAZZ
2
1
1
RHYTHM
VOLUME
SEQ.
2
SEQ.
3
SEQ.
4
SEQ.
MAX
MIN
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
172
9
Rhythm Program
Select the desired rhythm from the displayed rhythm menu.
Select a rhythm section (Main A – D, Fill in A – D, Intro 1 – 3,
Ending 1 – 3, or Break) by pressing one of the rhythm control
buttons on the panel.
The selected rhythm and section appears at the top of the display.
Press the [SET] button in the display.
One bar of the selected rhythm is entered and its name is displayed as a box in
the rhythm row on the display. When the rhythm is entered, the cursor (colored
orange) will automatically move to one step right. A maximum of 140 bars can
be entered to a single sequence. When you select an ending pattern and press the
[SET] button, an entire ending pattern (more than one bar) is entered.
You cannot enter a rhythm after an ending pattern.
Repeat steps #2 through #5 above to enter the rhythm and create
your own rhythm composition.
Turning the power off before quitting or closing the Rhythm Sequence Program erases
any sequences you have made. Before turning the power off, quit the Rhythm Sequence
Program (page 177).
3
4
NOTE
When entering an Intro
section, check the number of
bars at the top of the display.
5
6
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
173
9
Rhythm Program
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Auditioning a Sequence
You can play a sequence you are editing at any time to audition the changes.
Move the cursor to the desired position for playback.
Move the cursor by using the Data Control dial, or the POSITION buttons on
the display.
Press the rhythm [START] button on the panel.
The Sequence plays back. Pressing the [START] button again stops playback.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Editing an Existing Rhythm Sequence
You can insert a new rhythm between the rhythms you have already entered, or delete
the entered rhythm from the sequence.
1 POSITION
These are cursor controls for moving the cursor (colored orange) along the rhythm row
in the display.
1
DATA CONTROL
2
START
BREAK
SYNCHRO
START
12
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
174
9
Rhythm Program
Moves the cursor to the first position.
Moves the cursor one step to the left.
Moves the cursor one step to the right.
Moves the cursor five steps to the right.
2 DATA
These are data controls for entering rhythms and deleting existing rhythms in the
rhythm row.
SET
For initially entering a rhythm to an empty position in the rhythm row, or for
replacing a pattern at the cursor position. Pressing the [SET] button enters the
rhythm selected from the rhythm menu to the cursor position.
This operation is not available between measures of an ending pattern.
INSERT
For inserting a rhythm before the current cursor position. The new rhythm is
entered just before the cursor position and all other rhythms to the right of the
cursor are moved to accommodate the new number. This operation is not
available between measures of an ending pattern.
Additional rhythms cannot be entered beyond the Rhythm sequence function’s
capacity of 140. If the Insert operation results in the rhythm number going over
the capacity, a “Data Full” message appears and the operation cannot be
executed.
DELETE
For deleting a rhythm at the current cursor position. When the ending pattern is
selected, pressing the [DELETE] button deletes the entire ending pattern (more
than one bar).
CLEAR
For erasing all patterns entered to the selected sequence.
After selecting [CLEAR], a message appears prompting confirmation of the
operation.
Select [CLEAR] to clear the currently selected rhythm sequence, or select
[CANCEL] to abort the operation and return to the previous display.
When you insert an ending
pattern into the editing
sequence, any existing
rhythm data that follows an
Ending pattern is
automatically deleted.
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
175
9
Rhythm Program
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Programming a Registration Sequence
The Registration Sequence feature allows you to have desired Registrations
automatically called up in sequence, when playing a Rhythm Sequence. It lets you
program the timing (bar/beat/clock) at which the Registration is changed. You can also
program the Next Regist function in Registration Sequence.
A Registration Sequence is saved as a part of the corresponding Rhythm Sequence.
With this feature, you can have the sounds of the instrument change as desired
automatically to match the Rhythm Sequence playback.
Press the [REGIST] button at the top right in the display to call up
the Registration Sequence display.
The Registration Sequence is programmed from this display. The entered
Registration number is shown along the Registration row in the middle of the
display.
Press the desired numbered button in the Registration Memory
section.
Using the buttons in the display or the Data Control dial,
set the Bar/Beat/Clock position at which you want to change the
Registration (1 beat = 96 Clock).
When using the Data Control dial, first press the number you wish to change in
the display, then turn the dial.
NOTE
If you are loading a
Registration while a rhythm is
playing, the sequence data
and User rhythms in the
Registration data cannot be
loaded.
1
2
13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 D.
3
DATA CONTROL
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
176
9
Rhythm Program
Press the DATA [SET] button in the display.
The Registration number appears in the display (in the timing order), indicating
that the Registration is entered. Up to 140 Registrations can be entered.
If some Registration numbers are entered to the same Bar/Beat/Clock, the last
entered one takes priority.
Repeat steps #2 through #4 above to set the Registration
Sequence.
Entering Next Regist:
When you program the Next Regist function in Registration Sequence, the next
registration data in current song can be loaded automatically just by playing the
rhythm sequence.
Using the buttons in the display or the Data Control
dial, set the Bar/Beat/Clock position at which you want to enter
the Next Regist (1 beat = 96 clock).
Press the NEXT REGIST [INSERT] button in the display.
The Next Regist mark appears at the timing point you set in step #1,
indicating that the Next Regist is entered.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Editing an Existing Registration Sequence
You can move or delete the entered Registration Sequence (Registration number or
Next Regist data) from the sequence.
To move an entry:
Using the POSITION buttons, move the cursor and select the data
(Registration number or Next Regist) you want to move.
Change the position by pressing the Bar/Beat/Clock buttons in
the display.
Next Regist Loading Time
• Loading Next Regist may take a few seconds (the time may differ depending on
the size of the data to be loaded).
• When using a floppy disk instead of SmartMedia card, the loading time will be
longer than when using SmartMedia.
•Next Registration data can be loaded by two ways: using right footswitch and
programming Next Regist in the Registration Sequence. Loading time is the same
regardless of which way you load the Next Registration data.
4
5
1
2
1
2
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
177
9
Rhythm Program
To move the Registration number timing, press the DATA [SET]
button. To move the Next Regist timing, press the NEXT REGIST
[SET] button.
The position of the Registration number or Next Regist is changed and
displayed in the proper order.
To erase an entry:
Using the POSITION buttons, move the cursor and select the data
(Registration number or Next Regist) you want to delete.
Press the [DELETE] button to delete the data.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Quitting the Rhythm Sequence Program
You can quit the Rhythm Sequence Program from any of its display pages. When you
quit, the sequence you have made will be automatically saved.
To quit the Rhythm Sequence Program:
Press the [SEQUENCE] button on the panel.
The Voice Display appears, indicating that the Rhythm Sequence Program is closed.
When quitting the Rhythm Sequence Program, the square at the top left of
the display turns light blue for a few seconds, indicating that the sequence is
currently being saved. Do not turn the power off while the sequence is being
saved.
3
1
2
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
178
9
Rhythm Program
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Playing Rhythm Sequences
To play any of the rhythm sequences you have created:
Press the appropriate Sequence button ([SEQ. 1] – [SEQ. 4]) on
the panel.
The SEQ button’s lamp lights.
Press the rhythm [START] button.
The rhythm in the selected sequence starts playback.
When one of the four rhythm sequences is playing, each programmed rhythm
that plays is indicated by the lit LED of the Rhythm buttons.
The Registration Memory also changes with the Rhythm Sequence playback,
if the sequence includes a Registration Sequence.
Rhythm playback automatically stops when the sequence reaches its end.
If you’ve stopped rhythm playback in the middle of the sequence, press the
[START] button again to resume playback.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Playing All Sequences in Order
You can also have up to all four rhythm sequences automatically play in order, one after
another.
Press the desired Sequence buttons, making sure that all their
LEDs are lit.
Press the rhythm [START] button.
The rhythm sequences start from the lowest number and play in order
automatically to the highest number. (For example, if you press Sequence
buttons 4, 2 and 1 in that order, the sequences will be played back not in the
order you pressed them, but in their numeric order: 1, 2, then 4.) This function
effectively allows you to make a long rhythm sequence that exceeds the 140-
pattern memory limit of a single sequence.
Pressing one of the SEQ. buttons while a Rhythm Sequence is playing back
automatically cancels the pressed sequence, and its LED turns off. You cannot
cancel a sequence that is currently playing. The SEQ. lamp goes out when the
sequence assigned to it is finished playing.
1
MARCH
LATIN
WORLD
MUSIC
BALLAD ROCK
DANCE
WALT Z POPS R & B
SWING&
JAZZ
2
1
1
RHYTHM
VOLUME
SEQ.
2
SEQ.
3
SEQ.
4
SEQ.
MAX
MIN
2
1
2
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
179
9
Rhythm Program
To start a sequence using the Left Footswitch:
You can start or stop the Rhythm Sequence playback using the left footswitch.
Press the desired Sequence buttons, making sure that all their
LEDs are lit.
Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button on the panel to call up the
Footswitch display, LEFT Page.
Set the control mode of the Footswitch to RHYTHM STOP.
(See page 180 for information about the Footswitch settings.)
Press the Left Footswitch with your right foot to turn the
sequence on.
Pressing the Left Footswitch again in the middle of the sequence playback
cancels the Rhythm Sequence.
When you are playing a Rhythm Sequence that is made up of several sequences
(SEQ. buttons), pressing the Left footswitch turns off the currently playing
Rhythm Sequence, and pressing it again starts the next sequence.
You can save your own rhythm patterns (created in the Rhythm Pattern Program) and
Rhythm Sequence (created in the Rhythm Sequence Program) to external media, such
as SmartMedia cards. Refer to the section “Saving Registrations as Registration Data
(File)” on page 107 for instructions.
When loading your original Rhythm data from external media back to the Electone, be
sure to stop the rhythm if it is playing. Loading cannot be executed when a rhythm is
running.
4
Saving Rhythm Pattern and Rhythm
Sequence Data to external media
1
2
3
4
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
180
10
Footswitches, Knee Lever
and Expression Pedals
Footswitches, Knee Lever
and Expression Pedals
These leg- and foot-operated controls allow you to execute various performance functions
and switch the effect on/off, without taking your hands from the keyboard.
The Electone has two Footswitches on the main expression pedal. The Right
Footswitch is used for the Registration Shift function. The Left Footswitch can be set
to control one of the following functions: Rhythm, Glide, and Rotary speaker.
See page 84 for the details of the Registration Shift function or Right Footswitch.
The explanation on the Left Footswitch is given here.
Press the [FOOT SWITCH] button.
Press the [LEFT] button at the top right of the display to call up
the LEFT Page.
Contents
1 Footswitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
• Controlling the Rhythm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
• Controlling Glide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
• Controlling Rotary Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
2 Knee Lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
• Controlling Sustain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
• Controlling Melody On Chord . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
• Controlling Lead Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
• Controlling the Solo Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
3 Expression Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
• Controlling Pitch Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
• Controlling the Rhythm Tempo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
1
Footswitches
Right Footswitch
Left Footswitch
Expression Pedal
1
2
10
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
181
10
Footswitches, Knee Lever
and Expression Pedals
In this display, you can assign the control function to the Left Footswitch: Rhythm,
Glide, and Rotary Speaker.
If you choose OFF here, the Left Footswitch will not control any function.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Controlling the Rhythm
You can control the rhythm start/stop or switch the rhythm sections by using the Left
Footswitch.
1 STOP
Switches the rhythm on/off whenever you press the Footswitch.
2 BREAK
When you press the Footswitch, the Break section turns on. This function corresponds
to the [BREAK] button on the panel.
3 MAIN A – MAIN D
These functions correspond to the MAIN/FILL IN [A] – [D] buttons on the panel.
For example, when the [MAIN A] button is selected in this display and you press the
Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Main A or Fill In A.
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
1 2
3
4 5
Reference Page
Rhythm Structure (page 52)
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
182
10
Footswitches, Knee Lever
and Expression Pedals
4 INTRO 1 – INTRO 3
These functions correspond to the INTRO [1] – [3] buttons on the panel. For
example, when the INTRO [1] button is selected in this display and you press the
Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Intro 1.
5 ENDING 1 – ENDING 3
These functions correspond to the ENDING [1] – [3] buttons on the panel. For
example, when the ENDING [1] button is selected in this display and you press the
Footswitch, the rhythm section is switched to Ending 1. After the ending pattern is
played, the rhythm stops.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Controlling Glide
You can control the Glide effect by using the Left Footswitch.
Pressing the Footswitch immediately lowers the pitch of the selected Voice or Voices by
a half-step and releasing it slowly returns the pitch to the original.
1 Voice Selections (UPPER1/UPPER2/LEAD1/LEAD2/LOWER1/
LOWER2)
Select the desired Voice section(s) to which the Glide function is to be applied.
2 TIME
Determines the speed of the Glide function, or in other words, how gradually the pitch
returns when the Footswitch is released. Higher values make the speed slower.
Range: 1 – 5
1 2
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
183
10
Footswitches, Knee Lever
and Expression Pedals
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Controlling Rotary Speaker
You can control the Rotary Speaker effect (on/off) by using the Left Footswitch.
When the [Rotary Speaker] button is selected in this display and you press the
Footswitch, the Rotary Speaker effect is switched on or off. This function corresponds
to the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button on the panel. To use this function, you’ll need to
make the appropriate Rotary Speaker settings for each Voice section or Organ Flute
Voice. For details, see page 48.
The Knee Lever, located on the underside of the keyboard panel, can be used to turn
one of the following on and off: Sustain effect, Melody On Chord function, Lead Slide
effect, or Solo function.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Controlling Sustain
You can control on/off status of sustain for the Upper and Lower keyboards by using
the Knee Lever. Sustain for the Pedalboard cannot be controlled.
Make sure that the Upper and/or Lower Sustain
buttons have been turned on.
Fold the Knee Lever down.
Sustain is off when the Knee Lever is folded down.
Reference Page
Rotary Speaker (page 48)
2
Knee Lever
Reference Page
Sustain (page 47)
SUSTAIN
UPPER
(KNEE)
LOWER
(KNEE)
PEDAL
1
2
Folding down
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
184
10
Footswitches, Knee Lever
and Expression Pedals
To apply sustain, press the Knee Lever to the right.
Sustain is constantly applied as long as the Knee Lever is pressed. Releasing the
Knee Lever turns sustain off.
1 When the Knee Lever is folded up:
Sustain is applied constantly, as long as the front panel Sustain buttons are on.
2 When the Knee Lever is vertical:
Sustain is cancelled.
3 When the Knee Lever is continuously pressed to the right:
Sustain is on.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Controlling Melody On Chord
Press the [A.B.C./M.O.C.] button on the front panel.
The Melody On Chord section appears in the right half of the display.
Set the KNEE control to “ON,” and select one of the modes.
Press the Knee Lever to the right with your knee when you want
to apply the M.O.C. effect.
The M.O.C. effect is applied constantly, as long as the Knee Lever is pressed.
When you release the Knee Lever, the M.O.C. effect is cancelled.
3
1
23
Pressing to the right
On
Off
On
1
2
Reference Page
Melody On Chord (page 64)
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
3
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
185
10
Footswitches, Knee Lever
and Expression Pedals
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Controlling Lead Slide
Call up the Voice Condition display Page 2 of the Lead Voice
section to which you want to apply the Lead Slide effect.
Press the [KNEE] button of the Slide section on the display.
Press the Knee Lever to the right with your knee when you want
to apply the Slide effect.
The Slide effect is applied as long as the Knee Lever is pressed. Releasing the
Knee Lever, cancels the Lead Slide effect.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Controlling the Solo Function
You can turn the Solo function on/off by using the Knee Lever. See page 27 for more
information.
The Expression pedal can be used to control the volume with your foot as you play.
Moreover, the ELS-01C/01X has another Expression Pedal, the 2nd Expression Pedal.
The 2nd Expression Pedal can be used to control the Pitch Bend and the Tempo of the
Rhythm. The explanation on the 2nd Expression Pedal is given here.
Reference Page
Voice Condition Display
(page 39)
3
Expression Pedals
1
2
3
Reference Page
Getting Started (page 11)
Expression Pedal
2nd Expression Pedal
(ELS-01C/01X)
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
186
10
Footswitches, Knee Lever
and Expression Pedals
Press the [UTILITY] button on the front panel.
The Utility display appears.
Press the [EXP.] button in the upper right of the display to call up
the EXP. (Expression) Page.
In this display, you can assign the Pitch Bend control or Tempo control to the
2nd Expression Pedal. If both Pitch Bend and Rhythm Tempo controls are set to
ON, both functions are applied when you press the 2nd Expression Pedal.
Generally one of them is assigned to the 2nd Expression Pedal.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Controlling Pitch Bend
1 MODE
Determines the range of the Pitch Bend control. Each step changes the pitch range
by a semitone.
Range: 1 – 12
The setting 2 (NARROW) results in a small amount of pitch variation (over +/- two
semitones); the setting 12 (WIDE) results in a large amount of pitch variation (over
+/- one octave).
2 Voice Sections (PITCH BEND)
Selects the Voice sections to which the Pitch Bend function will be applied, and turns
the function ON. Pitch Bend can be selected independently or together for Upper
Voices 1 and 2, Lead Voice 1 and 2, Pedal Voices 1 and 2.
1
2
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
21
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
187
10
Footswitches, Knee Lever
and Expression Pedals
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Controlling the Rhythm Tempo
1 MODE
Determines the range of tempo change.
Range: 1 – 12
The setting 2 (NARROW) results in a small amount of tempo change (70% – 140%);
the setting 12 (WIDE) results in a large amount of tempo change (50% – 200%).
2 TEMPO
When you want to control the tempo with the 2nd Expression Pedal, set this to “ON.”
When set to on, pressing the pedal down with your toe speeds up the tempo and
pressing it back with your heel slows it down.
21
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
188
11
Transpose and Pitch Controls
Transpose and Pitch Controls
There are two pitch-related controls on the Electone: Transpose and Pitch. Transpose allows
you to change the key of the instrument and Pitch lets you finely adjust the tuning.
Transpose and Pitch can be adjusted in the Utility display. (The settings here cannot be
recorded to the Music Data Recorder.)
Press the [UTILITY] button.
The Utility display appears.
Press the [PITCH] button at the top right of the display to call up
the PITCH Page.
In this display, you can change the Transpose and Pitch settings by using the
buttons on the display or the Data Control Dial.
1 TRANSPOSE
Determines the coarse pitch setting of all the Voices, and is adjustable in half-steps
(semitones).
Range: -6 – +6
2 PITCH
Determines the fine pitch setting of all the Voices. Each step changes the pitch by
0.2 Hz. The default Pitch is 440.0 Hz (corresponding to key A3).
Range: 427.2 Hz – 452.6 Hz
You can also change the Transpose and Pitch for each Voice section, in the Voice
Condition display. For more information, see page 42.
1
2
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
21
NOTE
The Transpose setting here is
not applied to an XG Song
(page 116).
11
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
189
Internet Direct Connection
12
Internet Direct Connection
This convenient, powerful feature lets you directly connect your Electone to the Internet. In
this section, you may come across some unfamiliar terms and phrases related to computers
and online communications. To look up the meaning of these terms, refer to the Internet
Glossary (page 202).
You can connect the instrument to a full-time online connection (ADSL, optical fiber,
cable Internet, etc.) via a router or a modem equipped with a router.
To use the Internet connection, you will first need to subscribe to an Internet service or
provider.
Contents
1 Connecting the Instrument to the Internet . . . .189
2 Accessing the Website from the Electone . . . .190
• Scrolling the Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
• Following Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
• Refreshing a Web Page/Canceling Loading of a
Web Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
• Return to the Previous Web Page . . . . . . . . . . .193
• Saving Bookmarks of Your Favorite Pages. . . . .194
• Editing Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
• Changing the Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
3 About the Internet Settings Display . . . . . . . . .198
• Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
• LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
• Wireless LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
• Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
4 Exiting from the Internet Display. . . . . . . . . . . .201
5 Initializing Internet Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
6 Glossary of Internet Terms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
1
Connecting the Instrument to the Internet
Use a computer to connect to the Internet and get online before connecting
the instrument, since no modem or router settings can be made from the
instrument itself.
NOTE
Depending on the Internet
connection, you may not be
able to connect to two or
more devices (for example, a
computer and the
instrument), depending on
the contract with the
provider. This means you
cannot connect with the
Electone. If in doubt, check
your contract or contact your
provider.
Reference Page
Connecting USB storage
devices or USB-LAN adapter
(page 211)
Modem*
No router capability
* Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem,
optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem.
Router
Cable type
LAN cable
LAN cable
USB-LAN adapter
Connection example 1:
Connecting by cable (using a modem without router)
12
Internet Direct Connection
12
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
190
To access the website, press the [INTERNET] button while the instrument is
connected to the Internet.
ADSL modem
Router capability
LAN cable
LAN cable
USB-LAN adapter
Connection example 2:
Connecting by cable (using a modem with router)
NOTE
Some types of modems
require an optional hub
network for simultaneously
connecting to several
devices (such as computer,
musical instrument, etc.).
2
Accessing the Website from the Electone
USB wireless LAN adapter
* Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem,
optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem.
Access pointModem* Router
Connection example 3:
Wireless connection
DISPLAY SELECT
VOICE
DISPLAY
FOOT
SWITCH
RHYTHM
PROGRAM
UTILITY INTERNET
A.B.C.
M.O.C.
MDR
VOICE EDIT PATTERN SEQUENCE
U.ORGAN
FLUTES
L.ORGAN
FLUTES
ROTARY SP
SPEED
Control Menu Browser
Internet Direct Connection
12
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
191
In the Control Menu located in the left part of the display, you can control the
displayed website and set various settings. The browser display, to the right of the
control menu, is the area in which the website is displayed.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Scrolling the Display
When the size of the web page is too large to be shown at one time in the browser
display of the instrument, a scroll bar appears at the right side or bottom of the display.
Touch and move the scroll bar to view those parts of the page that are not shown.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Following Links
When there is a link in the page, it is shown as a button or in colored text, etc. To select
the link, press it (the button or text) directly on the display.
The touch panel will not sound when you press a link, even if the touch panel sound is
set to ON in the Utility Display (page 16).
The first page shown when opening a browser and connecting to the Internet is
called the “home page.” If you want to return to the home page from another
website, press the [HOME] button in the Control Menu.
Reference Page
Changing the Home Page
(page 197)
Internet Direct Connection
12
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
192
Monitoring the Internet Connection Status
The four icons and a message indicate the current Internet connection status.
1 Offline indicator ( )
This is shown when the instrument is not connected to the Internet. When this
appears, you cannot view any web pages.
2 Communication Status indicator ( )
This flashes when the web page is being loaded, indicating that communication
with the site is in progress. The indicator lights continuously when loading is
finished (communication is established).
3 SSL indicator ( )
This is shown when the opened website uses SSL, and it indicates that data is
encrypted before transmission.
4 Wireless LAN indicator
When you connect the Electone to Internet using wireless LAN, an icon indicating
the condition of the connection is displayed. If the signal to the Electone becomes
weak or there is no signal from the access point, move the Electone nearer to the
access point.
:Strong
:Normal
:Weak (not connected to Internet)
:No signal (not connected to Internet)
1
5
23
4
Internet Direct Connection
12
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
193
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Refreshing a Web Page/Canceling Loading of a Web Page
To refresh a web page (to make sure you have the latest version of the
page, or to try reloading), press the [REFRESH] button.
To cancel loading of a page (if the page is taking too long to open), press
the [STOP] button.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Return to the Previous Web Page
To return to a previously selected web page, press the [BACK] button.
To return to the page selected before pressing the [BACK] button, press
the [FORWARD] button.
5 Communication status indicator
The following three messages will be shown depending on the status of accessing
web site.
Now opening web page ...
Indicates loading of the web page.
Web page has been displayed.
Indicates the web page has been loaded
and the web page is completely displayed.
Disconnected.
Indicates the Electone is offline (not
connected to Internet).
Internet Direct Connection
12
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
194
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Saving Bookmarks of Your Favorite Pages
You can “bookmark” the page you’re viewing, and set up a custom link so the page can
be instantly called up in the future.
With the desired page currently selected, press the
[BOOKMARK] button in the control menu.
The Bookmark display appears, showing a list of the currently saved bookmarks.
The title of the web page registered to the selected bookmark is shown below the
list.
Call up the display for registering bookmarks by pressing the
[ADD] button.
1
2
Page title
Internet Direct Connection
12
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
195
Select the position of the new bookmark by pressing the desired
position directly, or using the [UP]/[DOWN] button or the Data
Control Dial.
To save the bookmark, press the [EXECUTE] button, or press the
[CANCEL] button to cancel.
To return to the browser, press the [EXIT] button.
Opening a Bookmarked Page:
Press the [BOOKMARK] button in the control menu to call up the
Bookmark display, then select the desired bookmark.
Press the [JUMP] button to open the page of the selected
bookmark.
3
DATA CONTROL
4
5
1
2
Internet Direct Connection
12
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
196
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Editing Bookmarks
From the Bookmark display, you can change the names and rearrange the order of your
bookmarks, as well as delete unnecessary bookmarks from the list.
1 UP/DOWN
Moves the selection position in the Bookmark list.
2 JUMP
Opens the web page of the selected bookmark.
3 ADD
Used when saving a bookmark (page 194).
4 CHANGE
Changes the name of the selected bookmark. Pressing this button calls up the display
for entering characters. For details on entering characters, see page 104.
5 DELETE
Deletes the selected bookmark from the Bookmark list.
6 MOVE
Changes the order of the bookmarks.
1 Select the bookmark you wish to move, then press the [MOVE]
button.
The left part of the display changes, letting you select the new position for the
bookmark.
2 Select the intended position by pressing the desired position in
the display, or by using the [UP]/[DOWN] buttons or Data Control
dial.
3 Move the bookmark to the selected position by pressing the
[EXECUTE] button.
7 CLOSE
This closes the Bookmark display and returns to the browser display.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Internet Direct Connection
12
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
197
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Changing the Home Page
You can specify any desired page on the site to be the home page. In advance, open the
page you wish to set as your new home page.
Press the [SETTING] button in the control menu to call up the
Internet Setting display.
Press the [Browser] button to call up the Browser Page.
Press the [Register] button of the “Set this page as Home.”
To return to the browser, press the [EXECUTE] button in the
control menu.
A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. Select [YES] to
return to the browser.
1
2
3
4
Internet Direct Connection
12
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
198
From the Internet Settings display, you can make various settings related to the Internet
connection, including preferences for the menus and displays. The Internet Settings
display has four sub-displays: Browser, LAN, Wireless LAN, and Others.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Browser
1 Encode
Selects the character code encoding for the browser.
2 Home page
Shows and allows editing of the web page which is set as the home page.
3 Set this page as Home
For details, refer to “Changing the Home Page” on page 197.
4 Restore default Home
Restores the home page setting.
5 Show images
Image data and pictures in the web page are shown in the browser when this is set to
on. Image data is not shown when this is set to off.
6 Character entry keys
This setting lets you select the character order of the virtual keyboard for entering
characters. When this is set to “Alphabetical,” the keys are in alphabetical order. When
this is set to “ASCII,” the keys are arranged as a conventional “QWERTY” keyboard.
7 Time zone
This determines the time setting for the browser.
3
About the Internet Settings Display
1
3
4
5
6
7
2
Internet Direct Connection
12
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
199
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
LAN
In this display page, you can make settings for the LAN connection. These settings are
needed for not only wired LAN connection but also wireless LAN connection.
1 Use DHCP
Determines whether or not DHCP is used. If your router is compatible with DHCP,
select “ON (set DNS automatically)” here.
2 DNS server 1 / DNS server 2
These determine the addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers. These
settings must be made when “Use DHCP” above is set to “ON (set DNS manually)” or
“OFF.”
3 IP address / Subnet mask / Gateway
These settings are available only when DHCP is not used. The settings here are: IP
address, subnet mask, and gateway server address. These settings must be made when
“Use DHCP” above is set to “OFF.”
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Wireless LAN
In this display page, you can make settings for the wireless LAN connection. These
settings must be the same as the settings on the Access Point.
1
2
3
Make a written note of these settings, in case you
have to enter the settings again.
Use DHCP
DNS server 1
DNS server 2
IP address
Subnet mask
Gateway
1
2
3
5
4
Make a written note of these settings, in case you
have to enter the settings again.
SSID
Channel Ch
Encryption On Off
WEP key type ASCII Hexadecimal
WEP key length 64 bit 128 bit
WEP key
Internet Direct Connection
12
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
200
1 Access Point
Pressing the [Display Information] button calls up the access point list. It shows the
access points near the Electone.
Once you select the desired access point and press the [OK] button, a message appears
prompting confirmation of whether to transfer the access point settings to the Electone
or not. When you select [YES], the SSID, Channel and Encryption settings are
transferred to the Electone.
2 SSID
Determines the SSID setting.
3 Channel
Determines the channel.
4 Encryption
Determines whether or not the data is encrypted.
5 WEP key type / WEP key length / WEP key
These settings are available only when Encryption above is enabled. These set the type
and length of the encryption key.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Others
1 Proxy server / Proxy port / Non-proxy server
Determines the proxy server name, port number and the host name for a main, non-
proxy server. The settings here are only necessary when using a proxy server.
2 Delete cookies
Deletes the contents of all saved cookies.
3 Delete all bookmarks
Deletes all saved bookmarks.
4 Initialize setup
Restores all settings in the Internet Settings displays to their defaults. See “Initializing
Internet Settings” on page 201.
NOTE
An access point that is
encrypted in a non-WEP
format cannot be used.
NOTE
If no signal from the access
point is received, the access
point cannot be listed.
NOTE
The WEP key type, length
and WEP key are not entered
automatically. You have to
enter them by yourself if you
want to use an access point
that is encrypted.
2
3
4
5
1
NOTE
When using two or more non-
proxy servers, separate each
server name with a comma.
Internet Direct Connection
12
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
201
5 Connection information
Shows detailed information on the current connection.
Pressing any button other than [INTERNET] button quits the Internet Direct
Connection and closes the website display. Pressing the [INTERNET] button again
automatically opens the previously opened website.
The settings of the Internet function are not initialized when using the Initialize
operation of the Electone (page 21); Internet settings must be initialized separately, as
explained here. Initializing will reset to the default values not only the settings of the
browser, but also all settings you have made in the Internet Settings displays, including
those related to Internet connection.
Press the [SETTING] button in the control menu to call up the
Internet Settings display.
Press the [Others] button at the top right of the display.
Press the [Initialize] button to initialize the Internet settings.
A message appears, prompting confirmation of the operation.
Select [YES] to initialize the Internet settings, or select [NO] to
abort the operation.
4
Exiting from the Internet Display
5
Initializing Internet Settings
1
2
3
4
Internet Direct Connection
12
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
202
6
Glossary of Internet Terms
Broadband An Internet connection technology/service (such as ADSL and optical fiber) that allows for high-speed, high-
volume data communication.
Browser The software used to search for, access, and view web pages. For this instrument, this refers to the display
that shows the contents of the web pages.
Cookie A system that records certain information that the user transfers when visiting a website and using the
Internet. The function is similar to a preference file in a conventional computer program, in that it “remembers”
certain information such as your user name and password, so you don’t have to re-enter the information each
time you visit the site.
DHCP This is a standard or protocol by which IP addresses and other low-level network configuration information
can be dynamically and automatically assigned each time connection is made to the Internet.
DNS A system that translates names of computers connected to a network to their corresponding IP addresses.
Download Transferring data over a network, from a larger “host” system to a smaller “client” system’s hard drive or other
local storage device — much like copying files from your hard disk drive to a floppy disk. For this instrument,
this refers to the process of transferring Song and other data from a website to the instrument.
Gateway A system which links different networks or systems, and makes possible data transfer and conversion despite
differing communications standards.
Home page The first page shown when opening a browser and connecting to the Internet. This phrase is also used to
mean the “front screen” or top page of a website.
Internet A huge network made up of networks, the Internet allows high-speed data transfer among computers, mobile
phones and other devices.
IP address A string of numbers assigned to each computer connected to a network, and indicating the device’s location
on the network.
LAN Short for Local Area Network, this is a data-transfer network that connects a group of computers at a single
location (such as an office or home) by means of a special cable.
Link A highlighted word, button or icon within a web page that, when clicked, opens another web page.
Modem A device which connects and allows data transfer between a conventional telephone line and a computer. It
converts the digital signals from the computer to analog audio for sending over the phone line, and vice
versa.
NTP Short for Network Time Protocol, a standard for setting the internal system clock of the computer over a
network. For this instrument, the internal clock of the computer is used to specify the valid time/date for
cookies and SSL.
Provider A communications business that offers Internet connection services. In order to connect to the Internet, it is
necessary to contract to a provider.
Proxy A proxy server is a server that all computers on a local network have to go through before accessing
information on the Internet. It intercepts all or designated requests to the real server to see if it can fulfill the
requests itself. If not, it forwards the request to the real server. Proxy servers are used to improve performance
and speed, and to filter requests, usually for security and to prevent unauthorized access to an internal
network.
Router A device for connecting multiple computer networks. For example, a router is necessary when connecting
several computers in a house or office, and allow them to all access the Internet and share data. A router is
usually connected between a modem and a computer, although some modems have a built-in router.
Server A hardware system or computer used as a central point for a network, providing access to files and services.
Site Short for “website,” this refers to the group of web pages that are opened together. For example, the
collection of web pages whose addresses begin with “http://www.yamaha.co.jp/” is referred to as the Yamaha
site.
SSID This is an identification name for specifying a particular network over a wireless LAN connection.
Communication is possible only between terminals with matching SSID names.
SSL Short for Secure Sockets Layer, a standard for transmitting confidential data such as credit card numbers
over the Internet.
Subnet mask A setting used to divide a large-scale network into several smaller networks.
URL Short for Uniform Resource Locator, a string of characters used to identify and link to specific websites and
pages on the Internet. A complete URL usually starts with the characters “http://.”
Web page Refers to each individual page that makes up a website.
Wireless LAN A LAN connection that allows data transfer through a wireless, cable-free connection.
Connections
13
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
203
Connections
On the underside of the Electone keyboard is a separate panel equipped with various input/
output terminals and miscellaneous controls. On the ELS-01X, the backside of the
pedalboard is also equipped with output terminals, as described below.
This section provides brief explanations for each jack/control on the Electone.
For details on connecting to external devices, see page 206.
1 INPUT VOLUME knob
For adjusting the level of input signal from the MIC./LINE IN jack.
2 MIC./LINE IN jack
For connecting a mono input, such as microphone or guitar. The Electone outputs the
microphone or guitar sounds, with reverb processing, through the built-in speaker
system.
3 MIC./LINE switch
When connecting a microphone or other electric/electronic instrument to the MIC./
LINE IN jack, make sure to set this level gain switch appropriately, depending on the
device you use.
Contents
1 Accessory Jacks and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
2 Connection Examples – External Devices . . . .206
• Using Headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
• Playing the Sounds of the Electone Through an
External Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
• Recording the Sounds of the Electone to an External
Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
• Outputting the Sound of an External Device Through
the Built-in Speakers of the Electone . . . . . . . . .208
• Connecting a Microphone or Guitar . . . . . . . . . .209
• Controlling External MIDI Devices from the Electone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
• Controlling the Electone from an External Device
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
• Connecting USB storage devices or USB-LAN
adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
3 Connection with Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
• Using the USB terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
• Using the MIDI IN/OUT terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
4 MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
• What is MIDI? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
• MIDI Messages of the Electone . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
• MIDI Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
5 MIDI Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
1
Accessory Jacks and Controls
MIN
MAX
INPUT
VOLUME
MIC. /
LINE IN MIC. LINE PHONES
1 2 3
4
Reference Page
Connecting a Microphone or
Guitar (page 209)
13
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
204
Connections
13
4 PHONES jacks
For connection of a stereo headphone set. When headphones are connected to this
jack, sound to the Electone’s built-in speaker system is automatically cut off, allowing
you to play without disturbing others.
5 AUX IN (Phone; L/L+R, R) jacks
This pair of stereo phone jacks is for connection to an external device. The signal from
the connected external device sounds from the Electone’s built-in speakers.
6 AUX OUT (Standard Phone) jacks
6 - 1 AUX OUT (L/L+R, R) jacks
This pair of stereo outputs is for connection to an external amplifier/speaker
system.
The output level can be controlled with the MASTER VOLUME Dial.
6 - 2 AUX OUT (L, R) jacks (LEVEL FIXED) (ELS-01X only)
This set of stereo outputs is for connection to an external amplifier/speaker. The
output level is fixed and cannot be controlled.
7 AUX OUT (RCA; L, R) jacks (LEVEL FIXED)
This set of stereo outputs is for connection to an external amplifier/speaker. The output
level is fixed and cannot be controlled.
8 AUX OUT (XLR; L, R) jacks (ELS-01X only)
This set of stereo outputs is for connection to an external amplifier/speaker. The output
level can be controlled with the MASTER VOLUME Dial.
Reference Page
Using Headphones (page
206)
AUX IN
L / L+R R
AUX OUT
L / L+R R
AUX OUT
L R
(LEVEL FIXED)
AUX OUT
L RL R
(LEVEL FIXED)
5
8
(ELS-01X only)
6-2
6-1 7
Reference Page
Outputting the Sound of an
External Device Through the
Built-in Speakers of the
Electone (page 208)
Reference Pages
Playing the Sounds of the
Electone Through an External
Audio System (page 206)
Recording the Sounds of the
Electone to an External
Recorder (page 208)
Connections
13
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
205
9 OPTICAL OUT terminal
For connection using an optical-fiber cable. This terminal outputs a digital signal of
44.1 kHz, 16 bits.
) USB terminals
) - 1 USB TO DEVICE terminal(s)
For connecting USB storage devices (such as floppy disk drive) or a USB-LAN
adapter for connecting to the Internet.
) - 2 USB TO HOST terminal
For connecting to a computer with a USB cable. To connect to a computer,
make sure that an appropriate USB-MIDI driver is installed to the computer.
! MIDI IN/OUT terminals
For connecting external MIDI devices such a synthesizer or sequencer. You can also use
these to connect with a computer that has a MIDI Interface.
OPTICAL
OUT
TO DEVICE TO HOST
USB
IN OUT
MIDI
)-1 )-2
!
9
Reference Page
Recording the Sounds of the
Electone to an External
Recorder (page 208)
Reference Pages
Internet Direct Connection
(page 189)
Connecting USB storage
devices or USB-LAN adapter
(page 211)
Connection with Computer
(page 212)
USB
USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting
a computer with peripheral devices.
Reference Pages
Controlling External MIDI
Devices from the Electone
(page 210)
Controlling the Electone from
an External Device (page
211)
Connection with Computer
(page 212)
What is MIDI? (page 213)
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
206
Connections
13
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Using Headphones
To use headphones, connect them to one of the PHONES jacks (standard 1/4" phone
jacks). Two people can enjoy listening to the Electone together by connecting two pairs
of headphones to the two jacks.
Playing the Sounds of the Electone Through an
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
External Audio System
By using the AUX OUT jacks, you can connect your Electone to external speakers. If
you’re connecting the Electone to a mono device, use only the AUX OUT L/L+R jack
(standard phone).
2
Connection Examples – External Devices
Before connecting the Electone to other electronic components, turn
off the power to all the components. Before turning the power of the
components on or off, set all volume levels to minimum (0).
Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may
occur.
PHONES
AUX OUT
L/L+R
R
Speaker (Left)
Speaker (Right)
Connections
13
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
207
Connection example: Using a mixer for live performance
Generally, when you use the Electone on stage (in concert, etc.), you should
connect it to a mixer. By using a mixer, you can easily adjust the volume and tone
quality of each component.
To connect to a mixer, use the AUX OUT jacks of the Electone. The Electone
features different types of AUX OUT jacks, allowing you to choose the appropriate
one for your specific application.
*The balanced line is good for long cable runs, or for low-level signals since it picks up less noise
than unbalanced lines.
Power-on Procedure
Before turning the power on to all components, set all volume levels to minimum
(0) then turn on the power in the following order:
(1) Electone and external keyboard(s)
(2) Mixer
(3) Powered Speaker
To turn the power off, first turn down the volume for each devices, then turn off the
power in the reverse order (3 → 2 → 1).
Jacks Output Type Location
AUX OUT phone jacks
L/L+R, R
Balanced*
Level is controlled with the
MASTER VOLUME Dial.
Left underside of the keyboard
AUX OUT RCA pin jacks
L, R
Unbalanced*
LEVEL FIXED
Left underside of the keyboard
AUX OUT phone jacks
L, R (ELS-01X only)
Unbalanced*
LEVEL FIXED
Backside of the Pedalboard
AUX OUT XLR jacks
L, R (ELS-01X only)
Balanced*
Level is controlled with the
MASTER VOLUME Dial.
Backside of the Pedalboard
MIC.
MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER
Sound
Sound
Sound
Sound
Sound
Main Speakers
(ex. Powerd-amp Speakers)
Monitar
Speakers
Mixer
Keyboards
AUX OUT
STAGEA
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
208
Connections
13
Recording the Sounds of the Electone to an External
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Recorder
You can record your Electone performance to an external recorder, such as an MD
recorder or cassette tape recorder, using the OPTICAL OUT terminal or AUX OUT
jacks. Using the OPTICAL OUT terminal allows you to record to external media with
exceptionally high-quality digital sound (providing the external recorder has an Optical
In terminal). Or you can use the AUX OUT jacks (RCA or standard phone, depending
on the connectors of your particular recorder).
Outputting the Sound of an External Device Through
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
the Built-in Speakers of the Electone
Connect the AUX IN jacks of the Electone with the LINE OUT of an external device,
such as a CD player. The sound from the CD player is output from Electone’s built-in
speakers.
First turn on the power of the external device, then that of the Electone. Reverse this
order when you turn the power off.
If you’re connecting the Electone to a mono device, use only the AUX IN L/L+R jack.
NOTE
If you want to record the
sound input from the AUX IN
jack together with the
Electone sound, use the AUX
OUT standard phone jack on
the underside of the
keyboard.
OPTICAL IN
OPTICAL OUTAUX OUT L
LINE IN L
R
R
Cassette tape recorder, etc.
Cassette tape recorder, etc.
Audio cable
Optical digital cable
Recording
Recording
R
R
L/L+R
L/L+RLINE OUT
AUX IN
Stereo audio system
Playing
Connections
13
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
209
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Connecting a Microphone or Guitar
By connecting a microphone to the Electone, you can enjoy singing along with your
own performance. The Electone outputs your vocals or guitar sounds through the
built-in speakers.
Connect your microphone to the MIC./LINE IN jack (standard
1/4"phone jack).
A dynamic microphone is recommended.
Set the MIC./LINE switch to the MIC position when connecting a
microphone, or the LINE position when connecting a guitar or
other high-level output device.
Use the INPUT VOLUME knob to set the microphone volume.
1
MIC./LINE IN
2
MIC. LINE MIC. LINE
When connecting
a microphone
When connecting
a guitar
NOTE
When you’re not sure which
position is the best, first set it
to LINE. If the output level is
too low, switch to the MIC
position.
3
MIN MAX
INPUT
VOLUME
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
210
Connections
13
To adjust the volume/reverb:
Press the [UTILITY] button on the panel to call up the Utility
display.
Using the MIC. REVERB and VOLUME sliders in the GLOBAL
Page, adjust the amount of the reverb applied to the microphone,
and the volume.
No sound from the microphone can be heard even though you raise the volume
here, unless you turn the INPUT VOLUME knob to the right. Similarly, no
reverb can be heard even though you raise the reverb level here, unless you raise
the total reverb level with the panel REVERB button.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Controlling External MIDI Devices from the Electone
You can use the Electone to remotely play the Voices of a MIDI keyboard (or tone
generator), combining them with the Electone and letting you create even richer, more
multi-layered sound textures. (The MIDI receive channels of the MIDI keyboard must
match the transmit channels on your Electone.)
The Electone transmits as digital data a variety of performance messages along with
note information, including values that indicate how far the expression pedal is pressed
down and how hard you play the keyboard. How the connected external device
responds to these messages depends on the particular device.
MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the USB TO HOST terminal is used.
1
2
Reference Page
Reverb (page 46)
Reference Page
What is MIDI? (page 213)
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
Tone generator
MIDI cable
MIDI messages
NOTE
When you are using the
M.D.R., MIDI data cannot be
transmitted.
Connections
13
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
211
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Controlling the Electone from an External Device
You can use an external MIDI keyboard or sequencer to remotely play the sounds of
your Electone and change its Registrations. (You will need to set the MIDI transmit
channels of the MIDI keyboard to match the fixed receive channels on your Electone.)
MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the USB TO HOST terminal is used.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Connecting USB storage devices or USB-LAN adapter
Using the USB TO DEVICE terminal(s), you can connect USB storage devices (such
as the UD-FD01 floppy disk drive) for saving your Electone data, and/or a USB-LAN
adapter for direct connection to the Internet.
Compatible USB devices
You can connect a single USB-LAN adapter and up to two USB storage devices (such
as floppy disk, hard disk, flash disk and other drives) to the USB TO DEVICE
terminal(s). Before purchasing a USB-LAN adapter or USB storage devices, please
consult your Yamaha dealer, or an authorized Yamaha distributor for advice, or see the
Yamaha website (http://www.global.yamaha.com/).
NOTE
When you are using the
M.D.R., MIDI data cannot be
received.
MIDI IN MIDI OUT
MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER
MIDI keyboard or synthesizer
MIDI cable
MIDI messages
Reference Pages
Installing the Floppy Disk
Drive (page 221)
Internet Direct Connection
(page 189)
Formatting External Media
(page 95)
NOTE
If necessary, use a USB hub.
Only self-powered (battery or
external power supply) types
can be used. On the ELS-01,
USB hubs of up to two levels
can be used; on the ELS-
01C/01X, only one level can
be used.
Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminals
•Never turn the USB device’s power on/off and never plug/unplug the USB
cable when the connected USB storage device is of the self-powered type.
Doing so may result in the operation of the Electone “freezing” or hanging
up.
• While the instrument is accessing data (such as Save, Load, and Delete
operations), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT remove the media
from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either device. Doing so
may corrupt the data on either or both devices.
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
212
Connections
13
By using the USB TO HOST terminal or MIDI IN/OUT terminals, you can connect
your Electone to a computer and receive/transmit MIDI data (for more information
about MIDI, see page 213).
Connecting your Electone to a computer opens up a whole new world of musical
possibilities. You can save your original songs to computer and create notation (score
writing application or sequencing software is needed), and even upload your original
Electone song data to your own website, to promote your talents or share songs with
your friends. You can also control the Electone from the computer, for example, by
playing a MIDI file on the computer to play back the sounds of your Electone.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Using the USB terminal
Using the Electone’s USB TO HOST terminal and a standard USB cable, connect the
Electone and the computer.
MIDI terminals are automatically disabled when the USB TO HOST terminal is used.
3
Connection with Computer
Before you can actually transfer data between the Electone and a computer
via the USB connection, you will need to install an appropriate MIDI driver.
Download the latest MIDI driver software from the Yamaha web site at
“http://music.yamaha.com/download/.”
NOTE
When you are using the
M.D.R., MIDI data cannot be
transferred to/from the
computer.
Precautions when using the USB TO HOST terminals
When connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal, make sure to observe the
following points. Failing to do so may result in freezing of the computer, corrupting data,
and even losing data.
If the computer or the instrument freezes, turn the power to the instrument off or restart the
computer.
•Before connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal, exit from any
power-saving mode (such as suspended, sleep, standby) of the computer.
•Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the USB
TO HOST terminal.
•Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or
plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the USB TO HOST terminal.
•Quit any open applications.
•Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is
transmitted only by playing notes on the keyboard or playing back a Song.)
• While a USB device is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six
seconds or more between these operations: When turning the power of the
instrument off then on again, or when alternately connecting/disconnecting the
USB cable.
USB TO HOST
Computer
USB cable
Connections
13
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
213
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Using the MIDI IN/OUT terminals
By using an optional MIDI interface such as the UX16, you can connect the Electone
to the computer, with the MIDI IN/OUT terminals on the instrument. Connect the
Electone and the MIDI Interface with two standard MIDI cables (one connecting the
OUT terminal on the Electone to the MIDI IN terminal on the interface, and the
other connecting the IN terminal on the Electone to the MIDI OUT terminal on the
interface). Connect the MIDI interface to the computer with a USB cable.
This section explains what MIDI is, and what it can do, as well as how you can use
MIDI on your Electone.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
What is MIDI?
No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic instrument” and “digital instrument.”
In the world today, these are the two main categories of instruments. Let’s consider a
grand piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments. They are easy
to understand. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings
and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note sounds. But
how does a digital instrument go about playing a note?
NOTE
Depending on your particular
MIDI interface, you may have
to connect the MIDI Interface
and the computer with a
serial cable.
4
MIDI
MIDI
IN OUT
MIDI OUT MIDI IN
Computer
MIDI Interface
(for example, UX16)
Internal amp
Internal amp
Tone generator
(Electric circuit)
Playing the keyboard
RL
Acoustic guitar note production
Digital instrument note production
Pluck a string and the body resonates
the sound.
Based on playing information from the keyboard,
a sampled note stored in the tone generator is
played through the speakers.
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
214
Connections
13
As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument the sampled note
(previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is
played based on information received from the keyboard, and output through the
speakers. So then what is the information from the keyboard that becomes the basis for
note production?
For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on the
Electone keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note, the
electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as “with what
Voice,” “with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed” and “when was it
released.” Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to
the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the stored
sampled note.
Example of Keyboard Information
As described above, your keyboard performance and panel operations such as Voice
selection are handled as MIDI events. All rhythm-related data – including rhythm
patterns, auto accompaniment patterns, Rhythm Sequences, etc. – also consist of
MIDI messages.
MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) allows electronic musical instruments to
communicate with each other, by sending and receiving compatible Note, Control
Change, Program Change and various other types of MIDI data, or messages.
Voice number (with what Voice) 01 (grand piano)
Note number (with which key) 60 (C3)
Note on (when was it pressed) Timing expressed numerically (quarter note)
Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong)
Connections
13
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
215
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
MIDI Messages of the Electone
MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: the Channel Messages and System
Messages. Channel Messages consist of data related to the performance on the
keyboard for a specific channel. System Messages consist of data that allows several
MIDI devices to communicate with each other.
Channel Messages
Each time you play the keyboard on the Electone, channel messages (indicating which
keys are played and how strongly) are transmitted via a specific channel. Similarly, the
Electone can be played remotely when receiving this data from an external keyboard.
Note On: Indicates which keys are played with the note numbers 0 through 127.
The reception note range is C-2 (0) – G8 (127), C3 = 60.
Note Off: Generated when a key is released.
Velocity: Indicates how strongly the key is played. The range is 1 – 127.
For more detailed information, see MIDI Data Format on page 222 and MIDI
Implementation Chart on page 232.
• Program Change
Program Change messages allow you to change Voices in the middle of a song. With
these messages you can change the Registrations of the Electone. For more detailed
information, see MIDI Data Format on page 222 and MIDI Implementation Chart on
page 232.
• Control Change
Control Change Messages let you select Voice banks, control the volume, panning,
modulation, portamento time, brightness and various other sound parameters, through
specific Control Change numbers.
For more detailed information on the Control Change messages available on the
Electone, see MIDI Data Format on page 222 and MIDI Implementation Chart on
page 232.
System Messages
• System Exclusive Messages
System Exclusive messages are used to exchange the system and Voice/Registration
data.
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
216
Connections
13
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
MIDI Channels
MIDI data is assigned to one of sixteen MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1 – 16,
the performance data for sixteen different instrument parts can be simultaneously sent
over one MIDI cable.
Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV station transmits its broadcasts
over a specific channel. Your home TV set receives many different programs
simultaneously from several TV stations and you select the appropriate channel to
watch the desired program.
MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The transmitting instrument sends MIDI
data on a specific MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single MIDI cable to
the receiving instrument. If the receiving instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive
Channel) matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument will sound
according to the data sent by the transmitting instrument.
The receive channel of the Electone is fixed at channel 1 for the Upper Keyboard,
channel 2 for the Lower Keyboard, and channel 3 for the Pedalboard. This means that
when you are using another MIDI device to play the Electone’s Voices, you must set
the MIDI transmit channel(s) of the connected device to match the receive channel(s)
of the Electone. You can select the transmit channel for each keyboard (Upper, Lower
and Pedal) from channels 1 – 16. See page 217 for more information.
1
Weather Report
NEWS
2
2
NEWS
MIDI Transmit channel 2 MIDI Receive channel 2
MIDI
cable
Connections
13
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
217
When you connect your Electone with a second MIDI device (such as a synthesizer or
computer), you can determine how the Electone controls that MIDI device, or how the
Electone is controlled.
Press the [UTILITY] button in the panel to call up the Utility
Display.
Press the [MIDI] button at the top right of the display to call up
the MIDI Page.
1 OUTPUT
For setting the channels over which MIDI information will be transmitted. Any
channel from 1 through 16 can be assigned to each keyboard, the Upper keyboard, the
Lower keyboard and the Pedalboard. The MIDI messages on each keyboard will be sent
on the channels set here. You must set the transmit channel here to match the receive
channel of the connected device.
Pressing each OUTPUT button calls up the channel selection pop-up menu. After you
select the desired channel, the pop-up menu automatically closes.
2 MIDI OUT FILTER
Deletes unnecessary MIDI data and keeps it from being transmitted from the Electone.
After Touch and Rhythm start/stop are automatically filtered on the ELS-01.
In addition, Horizontal Touch and Second Expression are automatically filtered on the
ELS-01C/01X. Set the parameter for which you wish to disable transmission to ON.
5
MIDI Control
1
2
1
23
3-1 3-2 3-3
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
218
Connections
13
3 INTERNAL/EXTERNAL
Switches control over the displayed items between the Electone (INTERNAL) or the
connected device (EXTERNAL).
3 - 1 LEAD 1
Determines Internal or External control of the Lead Voices.
INT. (Internal): Lead Voice 1 is played from the Upper keyboard of the Electone.
(If the To Lower function is on, it is played from Lower keyboard.)
EXT. (External): The Lead Voice 1 is played from the connected instrument via MIDI
channel 4.
3 - 2 SYNC.
Determines the source of the timing control, for rhythm synchronization
purposes.
INT. (Internal): Pressing the Rhythm [START] or [SYNCHRO START] button on
the panel controls connected devices, such as a sequencer.
EXT. (External): Starting the rhythm of the connected rhythm machine starts the
rhythm of Electone.
3 - 3 EXPRESSION
Determines the control of the expression pedal functions. Ordinarily, this
control is set to AUTO.
AUTO: Internal and External is automatically switched.
INT. (Internal): You can manually control the expression pedal even during M.D.R.
playback.
EXT. (External): While playing the M.D.R. or receiving MIDI messages, the
expression pedal is invalid. (The volume is controlled by the recorded data in a
SmartMedia card or received MIDI data.)
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
219
Appendix
Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Bench for the ELS-01
Turn the bench board over and install two
legs for the front side.
Tighten the bolts using the included wrench (as shown).
Make sure to put washers between the bolts and
the bench board.
Install the foot rest to the legs with the
included four screws, using a screwdriver.
Install the two legs for the back side.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Bench for the ELS-01C/01X
Turn the bench board over and install the
legs with the included eight screws.
Tighten the screws using the included hexagonal
wrench (as shown).
Make sure to put washers between the screws and
the bench board.
Install the foot rest to the legs with the
included four screws, using a screwdriver.
Bench Assembly
1
L
R
Logo is written on back
Washer
Bolt
2
3
If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-
term use, tighten them periodically using the included
tool and a screwdriver.
1
L
R
Logo is written
on back
Washer
Bolt
2
14
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
220
If you are using the ELS-01X, uninstall the pedalboard before moving the Electone and install it again after moving.
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Installing the Pedalboard
Guide the pedal unit carefully into the side
frame as shown, fitting the metal protrusion
into the hook on the frame.
Take care not to pinch the pedalboard cord and/or
the output cord between the pedal unit and side
frame.
Securely connect the output cord to the left
side of the pedalboard.
Also, connect the pedalboard cord by
fastening to the nut.
NOTE
When disconnecting the output cord, pull it while firmly holding
the metal edge.
Attach the side covers.
Match the hole of the side cover to the projection of
the pedal unit, then slide the cover back so that it fits
in place.
To uninstall the pedalboard, reverse the procedure.
Installing the Pedalboard (ELS-01X)
Precautions
Before installing/uninstalling, turn the power of
the Electone off.
Be sure to install the pedalboard with two or
more people.
Take care not to drop the pedalboard or to
pinch your finger(s).
1
2
2
1
3
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
221
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Installing the Floppy Disk Drive
The optional UD-FD01 floppy disk drive can be installed
to the bottom of the instrument by using the included
floppy disk drive case and screws. Have a Phillips-head (+)
screwdriver ready.
Remove the three backing papers from the
adhesive tape in the case, and fit the floppy
disk drive into the case.
Fold the USB cable inside the case as
shown.
Attach the drive and case assembly to the
right underside of the instrument, using the
included four screws (4 mm x 10 mm).
Connect the USB cable to the [USB TO
DEVICE] terminal.
Installing Optional Hardware
1
Dual-sided
adhesive tape
2
3
4
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
222
1. Channel Messages
1.1 EL Mode
MIDI Data Format
Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit Remarks
8n, nn, 00-7F Note Off 1ch
2ch
3ch
(4ch)*
5-14ch
15ch
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
UK
LK
PEDAL
LEAD 1
XG
Keyboard Percussion
9n, nn, 00
9n, nn, 01-7F
Note Off
Note On
1ch
2ch
3ch
(4ch)*
5-14ch
15ch
(1ch)*
(2ch)*
(3ch)*
˛
˛
˛
UK
LK
PEDAL
LEAD 1
XG
Keyboard Percussion
An, nn, 00-7F Polyphonic After Touch 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 00, 00-7F
Bn, 20, 00-7F
Bank select 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 01, 00-7F Modulation 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 04, 00-7F 2nd Expression 16ch
(4ch)*
16ch
(4ch)**
Control
LEAD 1
(ELS-01 not transmitted)
Bn, 05, 00-7F Portamento Time 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 06, 00-7F
Bn, 26, 00-7F
Data Entry 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 07, 00-7F Volume 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 0A, 00-7F Pan 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 0B, 00-7F Expression 16ch
5-14ch
16ch Control
XG
Bn,10, 00-7F VA After Touch 1ch (1ch)* UK
(ELS-01C/01X only)
Bn, 40, 00-7F Hold 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 41, 00-7F Portamento 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 42, 00-7F Sostenuto 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 43, 00-7F Soft Pedal 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 47, 00-7F Resonance 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 48, 00-7F Release Time 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 49, 00-7F Attack Time 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 4A, 00-7F Brightness 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 4B, 00-7F Decay Time 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 4C, 00-7F Vibrato Rate 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 4D, 00-7F Vibrato Depth 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 4E, 00-7F Vibrato Delay 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 54, 00-7F Portamento Control 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 5B, 00-7F Reverb Send Level 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 5D, 00-7F Chorus Send Level 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 5E, 00-7F Variation Effect Send Level 5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 60, 00-7F
Bn, 61, 00-7F
Data Increment
Data Decrement
5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 62, 00-7F
Bn, 63, 00-7F
NRPN LSB
NRPN MSB
5-14ch ˛ XG
Bn, 64, 00-7F
Bn, 65, 00-7F
RPN LSB
RPN MSB
5-14ch ˛ XG
“˛” indicates “Not available.”
“
Ø” indicates “Available.”
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
223
* Can be changed in the MIDI settings (page 217).
** Can be output when assigned to channel 4.
1.2 XG Mode
Bn, 78, 00
Bn, 79, 00
Bn, 7B, 00
Bn, 7C, 00
Bn, 7D, 00
Bn, 7E, 00
Bn, 7F, 00
All Sound Off
Reset All Controllers
All Note Off
Omni Off
Omni On
Mono
Poly
5-14ch ˛ XG
Cn, nn Program Change 5-14ch
16ch
˛
16ch
XG
Control
Dn, 00-7F After Touch 1ch
2ch
3ch
(4ch)*
5-14ch
(1ch)*
(2ch)*
(3ch)*
UK
LK
PEDAL
LEAD 1
XG
En, 00-7F, 00-7F Pitch Bend 1ch
2ch
(4ch)*
5-14ch
(1ch)*
(2ch)*
˛
UK
LK
LEAD 1
XG
Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit Remarks
8n, nn, 00-7F Note Off 1-16ch ˛
9n, nn, 00
9n, nn, 01-7F
Note On
Note Off
1-16ch
(1ch)*
(2ch)*
(3ch)*
UK
LK
PEDAL
An, nn, 00-7F Polyphonic After Touch 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 00, 00-7F
Bn, 20, 00-7F
Bank select 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 01, 00-7F Modulation
1-16ch
˛
Bn, 04, 00-7F 2nd Expression ˛ 16ch
(4ch)**
Control
LEAD 1
(ELS-01C/01X only)
Bn, 05, 00-7F Portamento Time 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 06, 00-7F
Bn, 26, 00-7F
Data Entry 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 07, 00-7F Volume 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 0A, 00-7F Pan 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 0B, 00-7F Expression
1-16ch
16ch Control
Bn,10, 00-7F VA After Touch ˛ (1ch)* UK
(ELS-01C/01X only)
Bn, 40, 00-7F Hold 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 41, 00-7F Portamento 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 42, 00-7F Sostenuto 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 43, 00-7F Soft Pedal 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 47, 00-7F Resonance 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 48, 00-7F Release Time 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 49, 00-7F Attack Time 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 4A, 00-7F Brightness 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 4B, 00-7F Decay Time 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 4C, 00-7F Vibrato Rate 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 4D, 00-7F Vibrato Depth 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 4E, 00-7F Vibrato Delay 1-16ch ˛
Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit Remarks
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
224
* Can be changed in the MIDI settings (page 217).
** Can be output when assigned to channel 4.
2. Realtime Messages
* Received only when in the Ext. mode
3. System Exclusive Messages
3.1 Format
Universal Realtime Messages
Bn, 54, 00-7F Portamento Control 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 5B, 00-7F Reverb Send Level 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 5D, 00-7F Chorus Send Level 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 5E, 00-7F Variation Effect Send Level 1-16ch ˛
Bn, 60, 00-7F
Bn, 61, 00-7F
Data Increment
Data Decrement
1-16ch ˛
Bn, 62, 00-7F
Bn, 63, 00-7F
NRPN LSB
NRPN MSB
1-16ch ˛
Bn, 64, 00-7F
Bn, 65, 00-7F
RPN LSB
RPN MSB
1-16ch ˛
Bn, 78, 00
Bn, 79, 00
Bn, 7B, 00
Bn, 7C, 00
Bn, 7D, 00
Bn, 7E, 00
Bn, 7F, 00
All Sound Off
Reset All Controllers
All Note Off
Omni Off
Omni On
Mono
Poly
1-16ch ˛
Cn, 00-7F Program Change
1-16ch
16ch Control
Dn, 00-7F After Touch
1-16ch
(1ch)*
(2ch)*
(3ch)*
UK
LK
PEDAL
En, 00-7F, 00-7F Pitch Bend
1-16ch
(1ch)*
(2ch)*
˛
UK
LK
Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit Remarks
F8 Clock Ø* Ø
FA Start ØØ
FC Stop ØØ
FE Active Sensing ØØ
FF Reset ˛˛
Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit
F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 01, SS, TT, F7
XN
GM2 Master Volume Ø˛
F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 03, SS, TT, F7
XN
GM2 Master Fine Tuning Ø˛
F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 04, 00, TT, F7
XN
GM2 Master Coarse Tuning Ø˛
F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 05, 01, 01, 01, 01, 01, PP, VV, ..., F7
XN
GM2 Reverb Parameter Ø˛
F0, 7F, 7F, 04, 05, 01, 01, 01, 01, 02, PP, VV, ..., F7
XN
GM2 Chorus Parameter Ø˛
Code (Hexadecimal) Function Receive Transmit Remarks
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
225
Universal Non-Realtime Messages
XG Native
Clavinova Exclusive
Message Exclusive
Electone Exclusive
˛: don’t care N: Device Number (“0” on ELS-01/01C/01X) ID: Model ID (ELS-01C=4DH, ELS-01=4EH, ELS-01X=51H)
F0, 7F, 7F, 09, 01, 0n, PP, VV, ..., F7
XN
GM2 After Touch Parameter Ø˛
F0, 7F, 7F, 09, 03, 0n, CC, PP, VV, ..., F7
XN
GM2 Control Change Parameter Ø˛
F0, 7F, 7F, 0A, 01, 0n, KK, CC, PP, VV, ..., F7
XN
GM2 Key-Based Controller Ø˛
Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit
F0, 7E, 7F, 09, 01, F7
XN
GM ON Ø˛
F0, 7E, 7F, 09, 03, F7
XN
GM2 ON Ø˛
F0, 7E, 7F, 09, 02, F7
XN
GM OFF Ø˛
F0, 7E, 7F, 08, 08, JJ, GG, MM, ..data.., F7
XN
GM2 Scale/Octave Tuning Ø˛
Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit
F0, 43, 1N, 4C, AH, AM, AL, ..data.., F7 XG Parameter Change Ø˛
F0, 43, 0N, 4C, BH, BL, AH, AM, AL, ..data.., cc, F7 XG Bulk Dump Ø˛
F0, 43, 1N, 27, 30, 00, 00, MM, LL, cc, F7 XG Master Tuning Ø˛
Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit
F0, 43, 73, 01, 02, F7
03
Request for Internal Synch. Mode
Request for External Synch. Mode
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit
F0, 43, 60, 7A, F7 Rhythm Start Ø˛
F0, 43, 60, 7D, F7 Rhythm Stop Ø˛
Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit
F0, 43, 70, 70, 00, ..data.., F7
78
ID
Bulk Dump Data Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
Ø
˛
F0, 43, 70, ID, 00, F7 Model ID Data ˛Ø
F0, 43, 70, 70, 30, F7 Request-to-Send Model ID Data Ø˛
F0, 43, 70, 70, 38, 7F, F7
00
Bulk Dump Acknowledge
Bulk Dump Unacknowledge
˛
˛
˛
Ø
F0, 43, 70, 70, 40, nn(*1), 7F, F7
00
Switch ON
Switch OFF
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
F0, 43, 70, 70, 40, 50, TL, TH, F7 Tempo ØØ
F0, 43, 70, 78, 41, cc, dd, F7(*2) Panel Switch Events ØØ
F0, 43, 70, 78, 42, 3C, ..data.., F7 Current Registration Data ØØ
F0, 43, 70, 78, 44, ..data..(*3), F7 MIDI Parameters ØØ
F0, 43, 70, 70, 70, nn(*4), F7 MDR Ø˛
F0, 43, 70, 70, 73, F7 EL ON Ø˛
F0, 43, 70, 70, 78, 00, 00, F7 Bar Signal ˛Ø
Code (Hexadecimal) Message Receive Transmit
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
226
*1. Switches
*2. Panel Switch Events
Selectors
Volume
Organ Flute Voice
To Lower
Solo Mode
nn Switch Receive Transmit
45H Left Footswitch ØØ
47H Knee Lever ØØ
48H Fill In Ø˛
4BH Intro/Ending Ø˛
4DH Solo Bar ØØ
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
0F Registration Memory [1-16] Ø [00-0F] ˛ -
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
12 Upper Keyboard Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
13 Lower Keyboard Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
14 Upper Keyboard Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
15 Lower Keyboard Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
16 Lead Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
17 Pedal Voice 1 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
18 Pedal Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
19 Lead Voice 2 Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
1A Percussion Volume Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
1B Reverb Depth Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Depth Data 00:MAX, 7F:MIN
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
30 Upper Organ Flute Voice
[U. ORGAN FLUTES]
Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
31 Lower Organ Flute Voice
[L. ORGAN FLUTES]
Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
36 Lead Voice 1 To Lower
[TO LOWER ▼]
Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
37 Pedal Voice 1 To Lower
[TO LOWER ▲]
Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
38 Pedal Voice 2 To Lower
[TO LOWER ▲]
Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
39 Lead Voice 2 Solo (Knee)
[SOLO (KNEE)]
Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
MIDI Exclusive Format
F0, 43, 70, 78, 41, cc, dd, F7
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
227
Brilliance
Sustain
Solo Bar
Keyboard Percussion
Disable
Rotary Speaker
Rhythm Sequence
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
42 Upper Keyboard Voice 1 Brilliance Ø [00-06] Ø [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW
43 Lower Keyboard Voice 1 Brilliance Ø [00-06] Ø [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW
44 Upper Keyboard Voice 2 Brilliance Ø [00-06] Ø [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW
45 Lower Keyboard Voice 2 Brilliance Ø [00-06] Ø [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW
46 Lead Voice 1 Brilliance Ø [00-06] Ø [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW
47 Pedal Voice 1 Brilliance Ø [00-06] Ø [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW
48 Pedal Voice 2 Brilliance Ø [00-06] Ø [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW
49 Lead Voice 2 Brilliance Ø [00-06] Ø [00-06] 00:BRILLIANT, 06:MELLOW
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
50 Upper Sustain [UPPER (KNEE)] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
51 Lower Sustain [LOWER (KNEE)] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
52 Pedal Sustain [PEDAL] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
59 Solo Bar Ø [00-01] ˛ - 00:OFF, 01:ON
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
5B Keyboard Percussion [1] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
5C Keyboard Percussion [2] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
5F Disable [D.] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
60 Rotary Speaker Speed
[ROTARY SP SPEED]
Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
cc Switch dd Remarks
Code Receive Rx Range
Transmit
Tx Range
61 Sequence 1 [SEQ.1] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
62 Sequence 2 [SEQ.2] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
63 Sequence 3 [SEQ.3] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
64 Sequence 4 [SEQ.4] Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF, 01:ON
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
228
*3. MIDI Parameter
Voice Section Parameters
Panel Voice Parameters
(Address mm: 0 – 7 = UK1
,
UK2
,
LK1
,
LK2
,
LEAD 1
,
LEAD 2
,
PEDAL 1
,
PEDAL 2)
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
10 00-07 00-0D 5 00-7F
00-7F
00
00
00
Voice Assign Number 00-7F
00-7F
00
00
00
Ø 00-7F
00-7F
00
00
00
Ø 00-7F
00-7F
00
00
00
10 00-07 10 1 00-0D Voice Selector Number 00-0D Ø 00-0D Ø 00-0D
10 00-07 11 1 00-7F Volume 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
10 00-07 12 1 00-7F Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
10 00-07 13 1 00-7F Brilliance 00:BRILLIANT
40:CENTER
7F:MELLOW
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
10 00-07 14 1 00-04 Feet 00:PRESET
01:16'
02:8'
03:4'
04:2'
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-04
10 00-07 15 1 00-7F Pan 00:LEFT
40:CENTER
7F:RIGHT
Ø 00-7F Ø 08-78
10 00-07 16 1 00-7F Touch Tone Initial Touch 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
10 00-07 17 1 00-7F Touch Tone After Touch 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
10 00-07 18 1 00-7F Pitch After Touch 00:NARROW
7F:WIDE
Ø 00-7F Ø 32-4E
10 00-07 19 1 00-7F User Vibrato 00:PRESET
01:USER
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
10 00-07 1A 1 00-7F Vibrato Delay 00:SHORT
7F:LONG
Ø 00-7F Ø 02-1A
10 00-07 1B 1 00-7F Vibrato Depth 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-54
10 00-07 1C 1 00-7F Vibrato Speed 00:SLOW
7F:FAST
Ø 00-7F Ø 3C-6C
10 00-05 1D 1 00-7F Pitch Horizontal Touch 00:NARROW
7F:WIDE
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
10 00-07 1E 1 00-7F Touch Vibrato (On/Off) 00:OFF
7F:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
10 04-07 1F 1 00-7F TO LOWER▼/▲/SOLO (KNEE) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
10 04-05 20 1 00-02 Slide (On/Knee Lever/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
02:Knee Lever
Ø 00-02 Ø 00-02
10 04-05 21 1 00-7F Slide Time 00:FAST
7F:SLOW
Ø 00-7F Ø 02-7F
10 00-07 22 1 00-7F Tune/Detune 00:Down
40:Center
7F:Up
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
10 00-01/
04-07
23 1 00-7F 2nd Expression Pitch Bend 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
10 00-05 24 1 00-7F Footswitch Glide Control 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
10 00-07 25 1 3A-46 Transpose 3A:KeyDown
40:Normal
46:KeyUp
Ø 3A-46 Ø 3A-46
10 06-07 28 1 00-7F Poly (On/Off) 00:Mono
01:Poly
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
10 05 29 1 00-7F Priority (Last/Top) 00:TOP
01:LAST
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
10 00-07 2A 1 00-7F Volume Mute 00:Mute OFF
01:Mute ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
MIDI Exclusive Format
F0, 43, 70, 78, 44, hh, mm, ll, ..., F7
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
229
Organ Flute Voice Parameters (Address mm: 0 – 1 = UK, LK)
10 00-07 40 3 00
00-7F
00-7F
Effect 1 Type MSB/LSB 00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø 00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø 00
00-7F
00-7F
10 00-07 41 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 1 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 42 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 2 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 43 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 3 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 44 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 4 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 45 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 5 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 46 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 6 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 47 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 7 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 48 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 8 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 49 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 9 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 4A 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 10 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 4B 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 11 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 4C 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 12 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 4D 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 13 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 4E 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 14 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 4F 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 15 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 50 2 0000-7F7F Effect 1 Parameter 16 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 51 3 00
00-7F
00-7F
Effect 2 Type MSB/LSB 00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø 00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø 00
00-7F
00-7F
10 00-07 52 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 1 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F Ø 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 53 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 2 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 54 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 3 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 55 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 4 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 56 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 5 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 57 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 6 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 58 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 7 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 59 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 8 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 5A 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 9 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 5B 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 10 MSB/LSB 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 5C 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 11 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 5D 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 12 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 5E 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 13 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 5F 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 14 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 60 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 15 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
10 00-07 61 2 0000-7F7F Effect 2 Parameter 16 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F 0000-7F7F
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
11 00-01 00 1 00-7F Footage 16' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 01 1 00-7F Footage 8' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 02 1 00-7F Footage 5-1/3' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 03 1 00-7F Footage 4' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 04 1 00-7F Footage 2-2/3' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 05 1 00-7F Footage 2' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 06 1 00-7F Footage 1-3/5' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 07 1 00-7F Footage 1-1/3' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
230
Keyboard Parameters
Sustain Parameters (Address mm: 0 – 2 = UK, LK, PEDAL)
Keyboard Percussion Parameters (Address mm: 1 – 2 = K.B.P. [1], K.B.P. [2])
11 00-01 08 1 00-7F Footage 1' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 09 1 00-7F Response 00:FAST
7F:SLOW
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 0A 1 00-7F Attack 4' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 0B 1 00-7F Attack 2-2/3' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 0C 1 00-7F Attack 2' 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 0D 1 00-7F Attack Length 00:Short
7F:Long
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 10 1 00-7F Organ Flutes (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
11 00-01 11 1 00-7F Volume 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 12 1 00-7F Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
11 00-01 13 1 00-7F Type (Sine/Vintage) 00:Sine
01:Vintage
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
11 00-01 40 3 00
00-7F
00-7F
Effect Type MSB/LSB 00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø 00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø 00
00-7F
00-7F
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
12 00-02 00 1 00-7F Sustain (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
12 00-02 01 1 00-7F Length 00:Short
7F:Long
Ø 00-7F Ø 15-3D
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
12 01-02 10 1 00-7F Keyboard Percussion (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
12 01-02 11 1 00-08 Keyboard Percussion Menu 00:PRESET
01:USER 1
02:USER 2
03:USER 3
04:USER 4
05:USER 5
06:USER 6
07:USER 7
08:USER 8
Ø 00-08 Ø 00-08
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
231
Rhythm
Rhythm Parameters
Rhythm Sequence Parameters
Accompaniment Parameters
A.B.C. Function Parameters
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
13 00 00-0B 2 0000-7F7F Rhythm Assign Number 0000-7F7F Ø 00-7F
00-7F
Ø 00-7F
00-7F
13 00 10 1 00-0B Rhythm Selector Number 00-0B Ø 00-0B Ø 00-0B
13 00 11 1 00-7F Percussion Volume 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
13 00 12 1 00-7F Percussion Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
13 00 13 1 00-7F 2nd Expression
Tempo Control (On/Off)
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 00 14 1 00-7F Footswitch Rhythm Control 00:INTRO 1
01:INTRO 2
02:INTRO 3
08:MAIN A
09:MAIN B
0A:MAIN C
0B:MAIN D
18:BREAK
20:ENDING 1
21:ENDING 2
22:ENDING 3
7E:STOP
7F:OFF
(INTRO 1 –
STOP)
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
13 00 15 1 00-7F Add Drum (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 00 16 1 00-7F Main Drum (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 00 17 1 00-7F Chord 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 00 18 1 00-7F Chord 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 00 19 1 00-7F Pad (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 00 1A 1 00-7F Phrase 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 00 1B 1 00-7F Phrase 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 00 1C 1 00-7F Auto Fill (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
13 01 00-03 1 00-7F Sequence [SEQ.1] – [SEQ.4] 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
13 02 11 1 00-7F Accompaniment Volume 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
13 02 12 1 00-7F Accompaniment Reverb
(Send Level)
00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
13 03 00 1 00-7F Auto Bass Chord Mode 00:OFF
01:Single Finger
02:Fingered
03:Custom A.B.C.
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-03
13 03 01 1 00-7F Lower Memory (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 03 02 1 00-7F Pedal Memory (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
232
M.O.C. Function Parameters
Section Parameters
Keyboard Percussion Parameters
Overall
System Parameters
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
13 04 00 1 00-7F Melody On Chord Mode 00:OFF
01:1
02:2
03:3
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-03
13 04 01 1 00-7F M.O.C. Knee Lever Control
(On/Off)
00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
13 05 00 1 00-7F Intro 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 05 01 1 00-7F Intro 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 05 02 1 00-7F Intro 3 (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 05 08 1 00-7F Main A (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 05 09 1 00-7F Main B (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 05 0A 1 00-7F Main C (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 05 0B 1 00-7F Main D (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 05 18 1 00-7F Break (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 05 20 1 00-7F Ending 1 (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 05 21 1 00-7F Ending 2 (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
13 05 22 1 00-7F Ending 3 (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
13 10 11 1 00-7F Volume 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
13 10 12 1 00-7F Reverb (Send Level) 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
14 00 00 1 00-7F Disable (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
14 00 01 1 00-7F Organ Flute Attack Mode 00:Each
01:First
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
14 00 02 1 3A-46 Transpose 3A:KeyDown
40:Normal
46:KeyUp
Ø 3A-46 Ø 3A-46
14 00 03 1 01-0C 2nd Expression Range 01:100 C
0C:1200 C
Ø 01-0C Ø 01-0C
14 00 04 1 00-7F Footswitch Mode 00:OFF
01:Rhythm
02:Glide
03:
Rotary Speaker
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-03
14 00 05 1 00-7F Pitch 00:PitchDown
40:Normal
7F:PitchUp
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-7F
14 00 06 1 00-7F Footswitch Glide Time 00:FAST
7F:SLOW
Ø 00-7F Ø 04-1C
MIDI Implementation chart
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
233
*ELS-01
Effect Parameters (Overall): Reverb
Effect Parameters (Overall): Rhythm Reverb
Effect Parameters (Overall): Rotary Speaker
*
4. MDR
14 00 08 1 00-7F MIDI Control Expression (INT/EXT) 00:Internal
01:External
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
14 00 09 1 00-7F MIDI Control Lead 1 (INT/EXT) 00:Internal
01:External
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
14 00 0A 3 00-04
00-04
(00-03)*
00-0B
Registration Menu 00-04
00-04
(00-03)
00-0B
Ø 00-04
00-04
(00-03)
00-0B
Ø 00-04
00-04
(00-03)
00-0B
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
14 01 00 1 00-7F Reverb Depth 00:MIN
7F:MAX
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
14 01 01 1 00-7F Reverb Time (Panel) 00:FAST
7F:SLOW
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-45
14 01 02 3 00
00-7F
00-7F
Reverb Type (Panel) 00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø 00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø 00
00-7F
00-7F
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
14 02 01 1 00-7F Reverb Time (Rhythm) 00:FAST
7F:SLOW
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-45
14 02 02 3 00
00-7F
00-7F
Reverb Type (Rhythm) 00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø 00
00-7F
00-7F
Ø 00
00-7F
00-7F
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
14 03 00 1 00-7F Rotary Speaker Speed (On/Off) 00:OFF
01:ON
Ø 00-7F ˛ -
14 03 01 1 00-7F Rotary Speaker Speed Control
Mode
00:STOP
01:SLOW
Ø 00-7F Ø 00-01
14 03 02 2 0000-
007F
Rotary Speaker Speed Control
Speed
0000:SLOW
007F:FAST
Ø 0000-007F Ø 0040-007F
nn Command Receive Transmit
01H Play Start Ø˛
02H Play Stop Ø˛
03H Record Start Ø˛
04H Record Stop Ø˛
05H Fast Forward Start Ø˛
06H Fast Forward Stop Ø˛
09H Rhythm Pointer Reset Ø˛
Address Size Data Parameter Data Receive Rx Range Transmit Tx Range
hh mm ll
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
234
0, 32
1, 5, 7, 10
4
6, 38
11
16
96, 97
64-67
71-78
84, 91, 93, 94
98-99, 100-101
:True Voice
1, 2, 3, 16
(
*
1)
1-16
Ø 9nH, v=1-127
˛ 9nH, v=0
˛
Ø
˛
˛
Ø
(
*
7, *12)
˛
Ø
(
*
7)
Ø
(
*
8, *12)
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
(
*
10)
************************
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
˛
*1;
*2;
*3;
*4;
*5;
*6;
*8;
*10;
*11;
*12;
*7; CONTROL only
*9; External Mode only
1ch: UK, 2ch: LK, 3ch: PEDAL, 16ch: CONTROL
1ch: UK, 2ch: LK, 3ch: PEDAL, 4ch: LEAD1, 5-14ch: XG, 15ch: KEYBOARD PERCUSSION, 16ch: CONTROL
UK: 36-96, LK: 36-96, PEDAL: 36-60
UK, LK, PEDAL, LEAD1: 36-96, XG: 0-127, PERCUSSION: 3-127
UK: UK HorizontalTouch, LK: LK HorizontalTouch
XG only
UK only
CONTROL: 0-15
UK, LK, PEDAL, CONTROL: 0-15 XG: 0-127
ELS-01C/01X only
Mode 3
˛
************************
36-96
(
*
3)
************************
Ø
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY
Ø
(
*
5)
1-3, 5-16
(
*
2)
4
Ø 9nH, v=1-127
˛ 9nH, v=0 or 8nH
Ø
(
*
6)
Ø
Ø
(
*
6)
Ø
(
*
6)
Ø
(
*
7)
Ø
(
*
6)
Ø
(
*
6, 7)
Ø
(
*
8, *12)
Ø
(
*
6)
Ø
(
*
6)
Ø
(
*
6)
Ø
(
*
6)
Ø
(
*
6)
Ø
(
*
11)
˛
˛
˛
Ø
(
*
9)
Ø
Ø (120)
(
*
6)
Ø (121)
(
*
6)
˛
Ø (123-127)
(
*
6)
Ø
˛
Mode 3
˛
˛
0-127
(
*
4)
Ø
Ø
Bank Select
2
nd
Expression
Data Entry
Expression
VA After Touch
Data Entry SW
Sound Controller
NRPN, RPN
(FAH, FCH)
Ø : Yes
˛ : No
Date: 19-Sep-2003
Version: 1.00
YAMAHA [Electone-EL mode] / Model: ELS-01/01C/01X
Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO
TransmittedFunction Recognized Remarks
Basic
Channel
Note
Number
Velocity
After
Touch
Pitch Bend
Control
Change
Program
Change
System Exclusive
System
Common
System
Real Time
Aux
Messages
Notes
Mode
Default
Changed
Note on
Note off
Key's
Ch's
:Clock
:Commands
:All Sound Off
:Reset All Cntrls
:Local On/Off
:All Notes Off
:Active Sense
:Reset
:Song Position
:Song Select
:Tune
:True number
Default
Messages
Altered
MIDI Implementation Chart
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
235
0, 32
1, 5, 7, 10
4
6, 38
11
16
96, 97
64-67
71-78
84, 91, 93, 94
98-99, 100-101
:True Voice
1, 2, 3, 16
1-16
Ø 9nH, v=1-127
˛ 9nH, v=0
˛
Ø
˛
˛
Ø
(
*
2)
˛
Ø
Ø
(
*
2)
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø 0-15
************************
˛
˛
˛
Ø
Ø
*1;
*2;
Same as that in the EL mode
ELS-01C/01X only
Mode3
˛
************************
36-96
************************
Ø
Ø
1-16
1-16
Ø 9nH, v=1-127
˛ 9nH, v=0 or 8nH
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
Ø
Ø
˛
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
˛
˛
˛
˛
˛
Mode 3
˛
˛
0-127
Ø
Ø
Bank Select
2
nd
Expression
Data Entry
Expression
VA After Touch
Data Entry SW
Sound Controller
NRPN, RPN
Date: 19-Sep-2003
Version: 1.00
YAMAHA [Electone-XG mode] / Model: ELS-01/01C/01X
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY
Ø : Yes
˛ : No
Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO
˛
˛
˛
˛
Ø
˛
Ø (120)
Ø (121)
˛
Ø (123-127)
Ø
˛
Transmitted
(
*
1)
Function Recognized Remarks
Basic
Channel
Note
Number
Velocity
After
Touch
Pitch Bend
Control
Change
Program
Change
System Exclusive
System
Common
System
Real Time
Aux
Messages
Notes
Mode
Default
Changed
Note on
Note off
Key's
Ch's
:Clock
:Commands
:Song Position
:Song Select
:Tune
:True number
Default
Messages
Altered
:All Sound Off
:Reset All Cntrls
:Local On/Off
:All Notes Off
:Active Sense
:Reset
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
236
Troubleshooting
Problem Possible Cause and Solution
GENERAL OPERATION
The sound is not heard for about 10 seconds after
turning the power on.
This is normal; the Electone takes a while to start up.
A cracking noise is sometimes heard. Noise may be produced when either an electrical appliance is turned on or an
electric power tool (such as drill) is used in the proximity of the Electone. If this
occurs, plug the Electone into an electrical outlet located as far as possible
from the device that seems to be the source of the problem.
Interference from radio, TV, or other sources occurs. This is caused by the proximity of a high-power broadcasting station, an
amateur ham radio setup or a mobile phone.
The sound of the Electone causes surrounding
objects to resonate.
Because the Electone is capable of producing powerful bass sounds,
resonance may be caused in surrounding objects, such as cabinets or glass
windows. To avoid this, relocate the objects or lower the Electone’s volume.
In the LCD display, there are some black points (unlit)
or white points (always lit).
Unfortunately, this is a common characteristic of TFT-LCDs.
Some buttons on the panel do not respond. The UPPER/LOWER ORGAN FLUTES and LEAD VOICE 2 buttons are invalid
on the ELS-01. If you upgrade the ELS-01 to the ELS-01C/01X, these buttons
can be used.
Some of the LEDs in the DISPLAY SELECT section do
not light.
The LEDs of on/off buttons (UPPER/LOWER ORGAN FLUTES, VOICE EDIT,
RHYTHM PROGRAM, and ROTARY SP SPEED) are lit when those functions
are turned on. The LEDs of other function’s buttons momentarily light when the
functions are selected.
The sound is too small even when the volume is set to
its maximum.
• The Master Volume may be set around the minimum position. Turn it
clockwise.
• The Expression Pedal may not be pressed down. Press it down with your
toe.
• The POWER switch of the speaker may have been turned off. Turn it on.
• (For the ELS-01C/01X) The REAR SPEAKER switch may have been set to
OFF. Switch it to ON.
The Electone panel does not function normally or the
content of the memorized data has changed.
This happens very rarely. Occasionally, power surges and spikes due to
electrical storms or other reasons may cause the Electone to malfunction and/
or alter the contents of memorized data. If this happens, perform the Factory
Set operation to reset the Electone (page 21).
VOICES/RHYTHMS
The pitch may sound excessively high on the
Pedalboard and low in the higher registers of the
Lower and Upper keyboards.
This may occur when you compare the Electone’s sounds with that of a piano.
Because of the difference of the harmonics structure, the tuning system of the
Electone is different from the piano in the higher and lower ranges.
Some of the Voices may contain cracking and/or noisy
sounds.
You may find these mainly in the wind instrument Voices. These are purposely
added effects to the Voices to reproduce the characteristics of the wind
instruments such as the pipe vibrations, breath noises and squeaks.
When too many keys are pressed, not all of the notes
sound.
Total polyphonic capacity (notes sounding for both Upper and Lower
Keyboards) is 14 notes. When you turn the Pedal Polyphonic mode to on, the
total is 14 for all keyboards, Upper, Lower and Pedalboard.
Only one sound is heard when two notes of the Lead
or Pedal Voices are simultaneously played.
For practical performance reasons, the Electone has been designed so that
only one note of the Lead or Pedal Voices can be played at a time. If you want,
the pedal Voice can be set to polyphonic mode (page 40).
The Pedal Voices do not sound, even though the
volume is properly set.
• The Single Finger or Fingered Chord mode of Auto Bass Chord is on. Turn
off the mode in the display (page 62).
• TO LOWER buttons in the Pedal Voice sections are turned on. Turn the
function off (page 26).
When selecting a User button Voice or rhythm, the
Voice or rhythm title at the top of the LCD does not
match the selected Voice or rhythm.
The currently assigned Voice or rhythm is displayed at the top of the LCD, and
remains until another Voice or rhythm has been selected.
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
237
When keys are pressed, the sounds of percussion
instruments are also heard.
The Keyboard Percussion function has been turned on. When not using the
function, be sure to turn it off (page 65).
Even though a User button’s rhythm has been
selected and started, the pattern does not sound.
Since the User buttons contain User rhythms, no rhythm will sound if a pattern
has not been saved to the selected User button.
EFFECTS
The Touch Tone function does not operate. Adjust the Touch Tone settings in the Voice Condition display (page 39).
The Reverb effect is not applied to the desired Voice
sections, even when the REVERB button setting on
the panel is increased.
Increase the Reverb depth for the desired Voice sections in Reverb Display
Pages 2 – 4.
The Rotary Speaker effect cannot be heard, even
when the [ROTARY SP SPEED] button in the DISPLAY
SELECT section is on.
Rotary Speaker must be selected first in Voice Condition display Pages 3 and/
or 4 (for panel Voices), or in the Organ Flute Voices ATTACK/VOLUME Page
(for Organ Flute Voices).
ACCOMPANIMENT
The pitch in the Single Finger mode does not change,
even when pressing different keys of the keyboard.
Single Finger mode will only produce notes when played within a fixed octave
interval on the Lower keyboard. If notes with the same letter name are pressed
outside of that range, the chords that are sounded will share the same pitch.
While an Intro/Ending pattern is automatically playing,
the Lower keyboard does not produce any sound,
even when the keys are played.
Since the Accompaniment chords play automatically one after another, the
Lower keyboard is designed not to produce any sound during the playback of
an Intro/Ending pattern.
The Accompaniment cannot be heard even when an
appropriate Accompaniment type is selected and the
rhythm has been started.
• The Accompaniment volume may have been set to 0. Be sure to raise the
Accompaniment volume in the Rhythm Condition display (page 62).
• All Accompaniment parts may be set to off (mute). Set the desired part on
(page 61).
The harmony notes of the Melody On Chord function
cannot be heard.
The Upper keyboard has been set to sound only Lead Voices. Increase the
volume of the Upper Keyboard Voices.
The bass phrase of the Auto Bass Cord cannot be
heard.
The pedal polyphonic mode may be set to on. Turn it off in the Voice Condition
display (page 40).
REGISTRATION MEMORY
Certain functions have not been memorized to
Registration Memory.
Some functions cannot be memorized. Refer to page 81.
VOICE EDITING
The Voice Edit display cannot be called up even when
the [VOICE EDIT] button is pressed.
The Voice Edit display cannot called up by pressing only the [VOICE EDIT]
button. While holding down the [VOICE EDIT] button, press the desired Voice
button.
During Voice editing, the specified Voice isn’t heard,
even when the keyboard is played.
• The Element is turned to mute or its level is set to minimum. Turn it to on or
increase the volume.
•You may have played keys outside the range of Note Limit. Play only keys
within the Note Limit range.
An error message appears while the Voice name is
entered.
Voice name capacity is 16 characters. Delete the unnecessary letters or
spaces.
RHYTHM PROGRAM
During use of the Rhythm Pattern Program, no sound
is produced even when you play a certain percussion
sound.
If percussion sounds have been recorded while memory is full, no
subsequently selected instruments can be heard or recorded. If necessary,
erase some of the less necessary percussion sounds and play again.
MUSIC DATA RECORDER
Recording or playback cannot be performed. • The part buttons in the Rec Standby display or Playing display may have
been turned off. Turn the desired part to REC or PLAY.
• The performance data is too large. The maximum limit for recording
performance data is 1 MB.
• The media is write-protected. Cancel the write-protect.
• The media/folder may contain EL-format songs. You cannot record to the
media/folder that contains EL-format songs. Create a new folder and record
the song to it.
Problem Possible Cause and Solution
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
238
Recording is stopped before the performance is
finished.
• The amount of recorded data on the media is close to the maximum limit.
Either use another media or delete the data of unnecessary songs.
• When you overwrite the song, the length of a subsequently recorded part
cannot exceed the length of the previously recorded parts. Delete the
previously recorded song, then record again (page 120).
• The performance data is too large. The maximum limit for recording
performance data is 1 MB.
An error message appears while entering a folder
name or song name.
• The song/folder name is too long. The capacity is 50 letters.
• The song/folder name may be an invalid name. Refer to page 106.
• The path name is too long. The capacity of the path name is 234 letters.
Reduce the layer or shorten the song/folder name to shorten the path.
The rhythm does not start at the beginning of a
recording, or stops in the middle of the performance.
The M.D.R. is designed so that the rhythm cannot be started at the very
beginning of a recording. If you wish to use the rhythm, start it after the time
indicator appears in the display.
The floppy disk cannot be formatted when you want to
format an unformatted disk.
Recognizing an unformatted disk takes a few seconds after it is inserted.
Wait about 30 seconds, then try to format again.
The notes of the recording are “stuck” and sound
continuously.
During playback, you may have removed the SmartMedia card or floppy disk.
Whenever you wish to stop playback, always press the [J] (Stop) button
before removing the media.
Problem Possible Cause and Solution
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
239
Specifications
Electone STAGEA ELS-01 Electone STAGEA ELS-01C Electone STAGEA ELS-01X
TONE GENERATION
AWM (4) AWM (4) + VA + Organ Flutes
KEYBOARD
Upper: 49 keys (C – C),
Lower: 49 keys (C – C),
Pedal: 20 keys (C – G)
Upper: 61 keys (C – C),
Lower: 61 keys (C
– C),
Pedal: 25 keys (C – C)
Keyboard Type
Standard (FS) Custom (FSV)
Initial Touch
Upper, Lower, Pedal
After Touch
Upper, Lower Upper, Lower, Pedal
Horizontal Touch
— Upper, Lower
REGISTRATION Registration Menu
240 300
Registration Memory
M. (Memory), 1 – 16, D. (Disable)
Registration Shift
Shift, Jump, User (80)
VOICE Voice Sections
Upper 1, Upper 2, Lead 1, Lead 2, Lower 1, Lower 2, Pedal 1, Pedal 2
Voice
Buttons
Upper/
Lower
STRINGS, BRASS, WOODWIND, TUTTI, PAD, SYNTH, PIANO, ORGAN,
PERCUSSION, GUITAR, CHOIR, WORLD, USER 1, USER 2
Lead
VIOLIN, SYNTH, FLUTE,
TRUMPET, USER 1,
TO LOWER (Lead 1),
SOLO (Lead 2)
VIOLIN, SYNTH, FLUTE, TRUMPET, VA-ACOUSTIC,
VA-VIRTUAL, VA-ELECTRONIC, VA-CUSTOM, USER 1,
TO LOWER (Lead 1), SOLO (Lead 2)
Pedal
CONTRABASS, ELEC. BASS, TIMPANI, SYNTH BASS, USER 1, TO LOWER
Preset Voice
415 509 (including VA Voices)
User Voice
AWM: 16 AWM:16, VA: 6
Organ Flute Voice
— Type: Sine, Vintage
Footage: 16', 5 1/3', 8', 4', 2 2/3', 2', 1 3/5', 1 1/3', 1'
Attack: 4', 2 2/3', 2', Length, Response
Effect: XG Rotary Sp, Rotary Sp 1 – 5, 2Way Rot Sp,
Dual Rotsp 1 – 2, Dist+Rot Sp, Odrv+Rot Sp, Amp+Rot Sp,
Dist+2Rot Sp, Odrv+2Rop Sp, Amp+2Rot Sp, OFF
Rotary Speaker Control
2.69 – 39.7 Hz, Slow, Stop
EFFECT/
CONDITION
Sustain
Upper (Knee), Lower (Knee), Pedal
Reverb
Type: Hall 1 – 3, M, L,
Room 1 – 4, S, M, L,
Stage 1 – 2, Plate 1 – 2,
White Room, Tunnel,
Canyon,Basement,
XG Hall 1 – 2, XG Room 1 – 3,
XG Stage 1 – 2, XG Plate,
GM Plate
Depth: Upper 1 – 2, Lower 1 –
2, Lead 1 – 2, Pedal 1 – 2,
Percussion, Accompaniment,
Keyboard Percussion
Type: Hall 1 – 3, M, L, Room 1 – 4, S, M, L,
Stage 1 – 2, Plate 1 – 2, White Room, Tunnel,
Canyon, Basement, XG Hall 1 – 2,
XG Room 1 – 3, XG Stage 1 – 2,
XG Plate, GM Plate
Depth: Upper 1 – 2, Lower 1 – 2, Lead 1 – 2,
Pedal 1 – 2, Percussion, Accompaniment,
Keyboard Percussion, Upper Organ Flute,
Lower Organ Flute
Effects
Reverb, Delay, ER/Karaoke, Chorus, Flanger, Phaser, Tremolo/Auto Pan,
Rotary Speaker, Distortion, Distortion+, Wah, Dynamic, EQ/Enhancer,
Pitch Change, Miscellaneous, Thru
RHYTHM Rhythm Buttons
MARCH, WALTZ, SWING & JAZZ, POPS, R&B, LATIN, WORLD MUSIC, BALLAD,
ROCK, DANCE, USER 1, USER 2
Preset Rhythm Pattern
274
Parts
Main Drum, Add Drum
Sections
Intro 1 – 3, Ending 1 – 3, Main/Fill In A – D, Break, Auto Fill
ACCOMPANIMENT
Accompaniment Parts
Chord 1, Chord 2, Pad, Phrase1, Phrase 2
Auto Bass Chord
OFF, Single Finger, Fingered Chord, Custom A.B.C.
Memory: Lower, Pedal
Melody On Chord
OFF, 1, 2, 3, Knee
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
240
Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or
modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in
every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.
PROGRAMS Voice Edit
✓
Rhythm Pattern
Program
✓
Rhythm Sequence
Program
SEQ. 1 – 4 (Rhythm and Registration program)
Keyboard Percussion
Preset 1 – 2, User 1 – 8
CONTROLS
Footswitch
Left
Rhythm: Stop, Break, Main A-D, Intro 1 – 3, Ending 1 – 3
Glide: Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead 1, 2, Glide Time
Rotary Speaker Speed
Right
Registration Shift
Expression Pedal
✓
2nd Expression Pedal
Pitch Bend,
Tempo (set only, not controlled)
Pitch Bend, Tempo
Knee Lever
Sustain (Upper/Lower), M.O.C., Lead Slide, Solo (Lead 2)
Transpose
-6 – +6
Pitch
A = 427.2 – 452.6 Hz
MIDI Control
✓
Main Controls
POWER on/off, MASTER VOLUME
M.D.R.
Song Select: Stop, Play, Custom Play, Rec, Pause, Fast Forward, Rewind,
Folder Select, Registration Edit, Tempo (50 – 200%)
Tools: Repeat Setting, Change Song Name, Remaining Memory, Format, Song Copy,
XG Song Copy, Song Delete, XG Song Delete, Convert ELS->EL, Convert EL->ELS, Convert To XG
Utility
Language (English/Japanese), Touch Panel Sound, LCD Brightness,
Mic. (Reverb/Volume), Initialize
Display Select
VOICE DISPLAY, A.B.C./M.O.C.,
MDR, FOOTSWITCH, UTILITY,
INTERNET, VOICE EDIT,
RHYTHM PATTERN PROGRAM,
RHYTHM SEQUENCE
PROGRAM, ROTARY SP SPEED
VOICE DISPLAY, A.B.C./M.O.C., MDR, FOOTSWITCH,
UTILITY, INTERNET, VOICE EDIT,
RHYTHM PATTERN PROGRAM,
RHYTHM SEQUENCE PROGRAM,
U. ORGAN FLUTES, L. ORGAN FLUTES,
ROTARY SP SPEED
OTHERS LCD Display
800 x RGB x 480 dots
Sound
System
Power
Amplifiers
50W x 2 70W x 2
Speakers
Cone: 13 cm x 2, 5 cm x 2
Monitor speaker: 6.6 cm x 2
Cone: 13 cm x 8
Dome: 2.5 cm x 4
Monitor speaker: 6.6 cm x 2
Storage
SmartMedia card slot SmartMedia card slot, Floppy disk slot
Connectors
PHONES (2), AUX OUT: L/L+R
(standard phone), L/R (Level
Fixed, RCA), AUX IN: L/L+R
(standard phone), MIDI IN/OUT,
USB TO HOST, USB TO
DEVICE, OPTICAL OUT, MIC./
LINE IN (jack, switch, and
volume control)
PHONES (2), AUX OUT: L/L+R
(standard phone), L/R (Level
Fixed, RCA), AUX IN: L/L+R
(standard phone), MIDI IN/OUT,
USB TO HOST, USB TO DEVICE
(2), OPTICAL OUT, MIC./LINE
IN (jack, switch, and volume
control)
PHONES (2), AUX OUT: L/L+R
(standard phone), L/R (Level
Fixed, RCA), AUX IN: L/L+R
(standard phone), MIDI IN/OUT,
USB TO HOST, USB TO DEVICE
(2), OPTICAL OUT, MIC./LINE
IN (jack, switch, and volume
control)
Pedal unit: AUX OUT: L/R (Level
Fixed, standard phone),
L/R (XLR)
Power Consumption
90W 105W
Dimensions
(W x D x H), Weight
1229 x 574 x 1017 (1276 with
Music Rest) mm, 100.0 kg
1229 x 574 x 1017 (1276 with
Music Rest) mm, 109.0 kg
1229 x 987 x 1017 (1276 with
Music Rest) mm, 129.0 kg
Bench
781 x 305 x 618 mm, 8.8 kg 915 x 365 x 618 mm, 12.1 kg
Color
Silver Metallic
Supplied Accessories
Bench, Owner's Manual, Tutorial Guidebook, SmartMedia card
Electone STAGEA ELS-01 Electone STAGEA ELS-01C Electone STAGEA ELS-01X
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
241
Numerics
2nd Expression Pedal............................................................. 185
A
A.B.C./M.O.C. ..................................................................... 62, 64
ACCENT.................................................................................. 147
Accompaniment........................................................................ 61
Add Drum ................................................................................. 61
AFTER touch (Pitch).................................................................. 40
AFTER touch (Touch Tone)....................................................... 39
ASSEMBLE ............................................................................. 144
ASSIGN (Keyboard Percussion)............................................... 70
ATTACK (Organ Flutes) ............................................................ 36
ATTACK RATE (Voice Edit)............................................. 132, 136
Auto Bass Chord....................................................................... 62
Auto Fill ..................................................................................... 54
AUX IN .................................................................................... 204
AUX OUT ................................................................................ 204
AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) ....................................................... 204
AWM (Voice Edit).................................................................... 130
AWM Voice ............................................................................... 34
B
BAR/BEAT................................................................................. 56
Bookmark................................................................................ 194
BREAK ...................................................................................... 53
BRILLIANCE (Panel) ................................................................. 47
Browser........................................................................... 191, 198
C
CHANGE SONG NAME .......................................................... 105
Channel Messages ................................................................. 215
CHORD 1 .................................................................................. 61
CHORD 2 .................................................................................. 61
CHORUS (Effect) ...................................................................... 50
CHORUS (Rhythm Pattern Program) ...................................... 160
Control Change....................................................................... 215
Control Menu .......................................................................... 191
CONVERT EL -> ELS .............................................................. 125
CONVERT ELS -> EL .............................................................. 124
CONVERT TO XG ................................................................... 122
CUSTOM A.B.C. ....................................................................... 63
CUTOFF FREQ........................................................................ 133
D
[D.] (Disable) .............................................................................82
DATA CONTROL dial ................................................................10
DECAY RATE...........................................................................136
DELAY (Effect)...........................................................................50
DELAY (Vibrato) ........................................................................41
DEPTH (Reverb) ........................................................................44
DEPTH (Vibrato) ........................................................................41
Display Select............................................................................10
DISTORTION .............................................................................50
DYNAMIC ..................................................................................50
E
EACH (Organ Flutes).................................................................36
EFFECT......................................................................................42
Effect category (Voice)..............................................................42
Effect Parameters ......................................................................43
EFFECT TYPE (Organ Flutes)....................................................37
Effect type (Voice) .....................................................................43
Element....................................................................................127
ENDING.....................................................................................53
Envelope Parameters ..............................................................136
EQ (Equalizer) .................................................................130, 136
EQ/ENHANCER (Effect) ............................................................50
ER/KARAOKE ............................................................................50
Expression pedal.......................................................................12
EXTERNAL...............................................................................218
F
Factory Set ................................................................................21
Fast Forward............................................................................113
FEET ..........................................................................................40
File ...........................................................................................100
FILL IN .......................................................................................53
Filter.........................................................................................133
FINGERED CHORD...................................................................63
FIRST (Organ Flutes).................................................................36
FLANGER ..................................................................................50
Floppy disk ................................................................................94
Folder ......................................................................................100
FOOT SWITCH ..................................................................85, 180
FOOTAGE..................................................................................35
Footswitch ...............................................................................180
FORMAT (MDR).........................................................................95
G
Gate Time ................................................................................156
Glide ........................................................................................182
Index
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
242
H
Headphones ........................................................................... 206
Home Page ............................................................................. 197
HORIZONTAL touch ................................................................. 40
I
INITIAL touch ............................................................................ 39
Initialize (Factory Set) ............................................................... 21
Initialize (Internet Settings) ..................................................... 201
Initialize (Registration Memory) ................................................ 84
INPUT VOLUME...................................................................... 203
INTERNAL............................................................................... 218
INTERNET ............................................................................... 190
Internet Direct Connection...................................................... 189
INTRO ....................................................................................... 52
J
Jacks and Controls ................................................................. 203
JUMP ........................................................................................ 85
K
Keyboard Percussion ............................................................... 65
Knee Lever.............................................................................. 183
L
L. ORGAN FLUTES ................................................................... 35
LAN ......................................................................................... 199
LANGUAGE .............................................................................. 15
LAST (Lead Voice).................................................................... 40
LAYER (Voice Edit) ................................................................. 131
LCD BRIGHTNESS ................................................................... 16
LCD Display.............................................................................. 10
Lead Slide................................................................................. 42
Lead Voice................................................................................ 22
LEAD VOICE (Panel)................................................................... 9
LEVEL (Voice Edit).......................................................... 132, 135
LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator)............................................. 135
Lower Keyboard Voice ............................................................. 23
LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE (Panel)........................................... 8
M
[M.] (Memory)............................................................................80
M.O.C. .......................................................................................64
MAIN..........................................................................................52
Main Drum .................................................................................61
MAIN/FILL IN .............................................................................52
MASTER VOLUME.....................................................................11
MDR...........................................................................................92
Melody On Chord ......................................................................64
MEMORY (A.B.C.) .....................................................................64
METRONOME..........................................................................143
MIC./LINE IN jack ....................................................................203
MIC./LINE switch .....................................................................203
MIDI .........................................................................................213
MIDI Control ............................................................................217
MIDI IN/OUT ............................................................................205
MIDI OUT FILTER ....................................................................217
MISCELLANEOUS.....................................................................50
MODE (Organ Flutes)................................................................36
MODE (Rotary Speaker)............................................................49
Music Data Recorder ................................................................92
N
Next Regist ..............................................................................109
NEXT REGIST (Shift End) ..........................................................87
NOTE LIMIT .............................................................................132
NOTE SHIFT ............................................................................132
O
OPTICAL OUT .........................................................................205
Organ Flutes..............................................................................35
OUTPUT (MIDI) .......................................................................217
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
243
P
PAD........................................................................................... 61
PAN (Voice Edit) ..................................................................... 132
PAN (Voice) .............................................................................. 39
Part (Rhythm) ............................................................................ 61
PART SETUP (MDR) ......................................................... 97, 117
PATTERN ................................................................................ 140
Pause ...................................................................................... 113
Pedal polyphonic mode............................................................ 40
Pedal Voice............................................................................... 23
PEDAL VOICE (Panel) ................................................................ 9
PHASER .................................................................................... 50
PHONES ................................................................................. 204
PHRASE 1 ................................................................................. 61
PHRASE 2 ................................................................................. 61
Pitch ........................................................................................ 188
PITCH (Voice Section) .............................................................. 40
Pitch Bend .............................................................................. 186
PITCH CHANGE ....................................................................... 50
Playback ................................................................................. 112
POLY......................................................................................... 40
POWER ..................................................................................... 11
PRESET (Vibrato) ...................................................................... 41
Preset Keyboard Percussion .................................................... 65
PRESET TEMPO........................................................................ 57
PRIORITY .................................................................................. 40
Program Change .................................................................... 215
Protected Song ....................................................................... 121
Punch-in Recording ................................................................ 104
Q
Quantize.................................................................................. 152
R
Real Time Write ...............................................................145, 153
Recording................................................................................101
Recording (Lead Voice 1 Voice only)......................................102
Recording (Part) ......................................................................102
REGIST EDIT (MDR)................................................................107
Registration Memory .................................................................80
REGISTRATION MENU .............................................................19
Registration Sequence ............................................................175
Registration Shift .......................................................................84
RELEASE RATE (Voice Edit) ...........................................132, 136
Repeat .....................................................................................115
RESONANCE...........................................................................133
RESP. (Response) .....................................................................36
Reverb .......................................................................................43
REVERB (MIC.)........................................................................210
REVERB (Panel) ........................................................................43
REVERB (Rhythm Pattern Program) ........................................159
Rewind.....................................................................................113
Rhythm ......................................................................................51
Rhythm button ...........................................................................51
Rhythm Clock ..........................................................................147
Rhythm Condition ......................................................................54
Rhythm Menu ............................................................................52
Rhythm Pattern Program .........................................................140
Rhythm Program......................................................................139
Rhythm Sequence Program ....................................................170
Rhythmic Chord.......................................................................154
ROTARY SP SPEED...................................................................48
Rotary Speaker..........................................................................48
S
Sections.....................................................................................52
SEQUENCE .............................................................................170
SHIFT (Registration Shift) ..........................................................85
SHIFT END ................................................................................87
SINGLE FINGER........................................................................63
SLIDE.........................................................................................42
SLOW (Rotary Speaker) ............................................................49
SmartMedia ...............................................................................93
SOLO.........................................................................................27
Song ..................................................................................96, 100
Song Copy...............................................................................118
Song Delete.............................................................................120
Specifications ..........................................................................239
SPEED (Rotary Speaker) ...........................................................49
SPEED (Vibrato) ........................................................................41
START........................................................................................53
Step Write ................................................................................145
STOP (Rotary Speaker) .............................................................49
STOP (Shift End)........................................................................87
Style File Format ......................................................................166
Sustain.......................................................................................47
SUSTAIN (Panel) .......................................................................47
SYNCHRO START .....................................................................53
System Exclusive Messages ...................................................215
System Messages ...................................................................215
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
244
T
Tempo (MDR) ......................................................................... 114
TEMPO (Rhythm) ...................................................................... 56
THRU (Effect)............................................................................ 50
TIME (Slide) .............................................................................. 42
TO LOWER................................................................................ 26
TOP (Lead Voice) ..................................................................... 40
TOP (Shift End) ......................................................................... 87
TOUCH PANEL SOUND ........................................................... 16
TOUCH TONE........................................................................... 39
TOUCH VIBRATO ..................................................................... 41
Transpose ............................................................................... 188
TRANSPOSE (Voice section) .................................................... 42
TREMOLO/AUTO PAN.............................................................. 50
TUNE (Voice section)................................................................ 42
TUNE FINE (Voice Edit) .......................................................... 132
U
U. ORGAN FLUTES .................................................................. 35
UD-FD01 ................................................................................. 221
Upper Keyboard Voice ............................................................. 22
UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE (Panel)............................................ 8
USB TO DEVICE ..................................................... 204, 205, 211
USB TO HOST ................................................................ 205, 212
USER (Registration Shift) .......................................................... 86
USER (Vibrato).......................................................................... 41
User button (Rhythm)................................................................ 58
User button (Voice)................................................................... 28
User Keyboard Percussion....................................................... 70
User Rhythm ........................................................................... 163
User Voice .............................................................................. 137
UTILITY ..................................................................................... 15
V
VA (Voice Edit)........................................................................ 135
VA Custom Voice .................................................................... 137
VA Voice ................................................................................... 34
VARIATION (Rhythm Pattern Program) .................................. 161
Version ...................................................................................... 21
VIBRATO................................................................................... 41
Voice ......................................................................................... 22
Voice button.............................................................................. 23
Voice Condition................................................................... 25, 39
VOICE DISPLAY........................................................................ 17
Voice Edit................................................................................ 127
VOICE EDIT (Panel) ................................................................ 129
Voice Menu ............................................................................... 24
Voice section ............................................................................ 22
Volume (Accompaniment) ........................................................ 62
Volume (Keyboard Percussion) ................................................ 66
VOLUME (MIC.) ...................................................................... 210
VOLUME (Organ Flutes) ........................................................... 36
VOLUME (Rhythm Pattern Program) ...................................... 158
VOLUME (Rhythm).................................................................... 55
VOLUME (Voice)....................................................................... 25
VOLUME (XG)......................................................................... 117
W
WAH ..........................................................................................50
Wireless LAN ...........................................................................199
X
XG........................................................................................6, 116
Appendix
14
ELS-01/01C/01X Owner’s Manual
245
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
MEMO
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below.
MEXICO
Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.
Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,
Col. Guadalupe del Moral
C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México
Tel: 55-5804-0600
BRAZIL
Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.
Av. Reboucas 2636-Pinheiros CEP: 05402-400
Sao Paulo-SP. Brasil
Tel: 011-3085-1377
ARGENTINA
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Sucursal de Argentina
Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: 1-4371-7021
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá
Tel: +507-269-5311
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2312
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone
P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.
Tel: +971-4-881-5868
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.
25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West),
Jingan, Shanghai, China
Tel: 021-6247-2211
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: 2737-7688
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 21-520-2577
KOREA
Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong,
Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea
Tel: 02-3770-0660
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.
Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: 3-78030900
PHILIPPINES
Yupangco Music Corporation
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,
Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines
Tel: 819-7551
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.
#03-11 A-Z Building
140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015
Tel: 747-4374
TAIWAN
Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.
Taiwan 104, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2511-8688
THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 floor
Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan
Bangkok 10330, Thailand
Tel: 02-215-2626
OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2317
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
AFRICA
MIDDLE EAST
ASIA
HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-3273
[EL] 37
U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation
© 2004 – 2005 Yamaha Corporation
WF37040 503MWCP1.2-02B0
Printed in Japan
This document is printed on chlorine free (ECF) paper with soy ink.
Yamaha Manual Library
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/
/